^sS^^^^^^P^^^ 


$e 


^^^s 


7l 


-Vw 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

Microsoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/elementsofgermanOOjagerich 


H.  O.  G.  von  JAGEMANN'S  WORKS. 

ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  SYNTAX.  With 
special  reference  to  Prose  Composition,  vi  ■+- 1 70. 
i2mo. 

MATERIALS  FOR  GERMAN  PROSE  COMPO- 
SITION.    With  Notes  and  Vocabulary.     {Shortly.) 

FOUQUE'S  UNDINE.  Eine  Erzahlung  von 
Friedrich  Baron  de  la  Motte  Fouque.  With  an 
Introduction,  Notes,  and  Vocabulary,  x-f  220  pp. 
i2mo. 

GOETHE'S  DICHTUNG  UND  WAHRHEIT. 
First  Three  Books.  With  Introduction  and  Notes. 
(In  preparation. ) 

Henry  Holt  &  Co.,  Publishers,  New  York. 


ELEMENTS 


OF 


GERMAN    SYNTAX 


WITH    SPECIAL    REFERENCE   TO 


PROSE    COMPOSITION" 


H.  C.  G.  von  JAGEMANN 

Assistant  Professor  of  German 
in  Harvard  University 


NEW    YORK 

HENRY  HOLT  AND  COMPANY 

F.  W.  CHRISTERN 
Boston  :  CARL  SCHOENHOF 


Copyright,  1892 

BT 

HENRY  HOLT  &  CO. 


PREFACE. 


It  has  been  the  author's  aim  to  present  the  most  important 
characteristics  of  German  syntax  from  the  point  of  view  of  the 
English  language.  Completeness  has  not  been  intended ;  on  the 
contrary,  it  has  seemed  desirable  to  exclude,  on  the  one  hand, 
everything  which  is  quite  natural  and  self-understood  and  offers  no 
serious  difficulty  to  the  pupil,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  all  uncommon 
forms  and  constructions,  both  English  and  German.  The  author 
can  hardly  expect  that  his  judgment  has  been  uniformly  correct  in 
this  matter.  If,  however,  the  directions  contained  in  the  following 
pages  enable  the  student  to  find  at  least  one  correct  and  fairly 
idiomatic  German  rendering  for  every  ordinary  construction  in 
simple  English  prose,  the  purpose  of  the  book  has  been  accom- 
plished. Those  who  have  had  experience  in  teaching  German  Com- 
position will  probably  agree  that  the  subject  is  difficult  enough  to 
justify  the  relatively  limited  scope  of  the  book.  —  In  a  few  cases, 
things  which  may  appear  to  present  no  special  difficulties  have 
been  included,  in  order  to  explain  more  difficult  points  connected 
with  them ;  and  it  has  also  seemed  desirable  to  include  certain 
constructions  which,  while  not  of  frequent  occurrence  in  the  best 
English  prose,  are  yet  very  common  in  familiar  discourse,  and  will, 
therefore,  surely  be  attempted  in  German,  as  soon  as  the  pupil  be- 
gins to  express  his  own  thoughts. 

Furthermore,  it  has  seemed  best  to  include  a  certain  amount  of 
lexicological  material,  especially  such  as  relates  to  the  use  of  in- 
definite pronouns,  modal  auxiliaries,   adverbs,  prepositions  and 

(iii) 

797966 


IV  PREFACE. 

conjunctions  —  matters  which,  for  the  purpose  of  writing  German, 
are  of  as  vital  consequence  as  some  things  purely  syntactical.  In 
a  few  particulars,  notably  regarding  the  order  of  words,  and  some 
things  connected  with  that  subject,  the  author  has  ventured  to 
depart  from  the  traditional  treatment.  In  other  respects,  the  little 
book  claims  no  originality. 

Cambridge,  Mass.,  May  1892. 


CONTENTS. 


The  references  are  to  paragraphs. 

Articles,  1-13;  definite  article,  2-7;  indefinite  article,  8-13. 

Nouns,  14-16;  titles,  16. 

Adjectives  and  Participles,  17-23;  comparative  and  superlative, 
19-23. 

Pronouns,  24-53 ;  form  of  direct  address,  27 ;  substitutes  for  pronouns, 
28;  the  pronoun  e§,  29 ;  reflexives,  30;  possessives,  31;  demonstra- 
tives, 32;  determinatives,  33;  relatives,  34;  interrogatives,  35;  in- 
definites, 36-53. 

Numbers  and  Cases,  54-81 ;  singular  and  plural,  54-55 ;  nominative, 
56;  genitive,  57-62 ;  dative,  63-73;  accusative,  74-81. 

Verbs,  82-128;  transitives  and  intransitives,  83;  impersonals,  84; 
auxiliaries,  85-95;  perfect  and  pluperfect,  87;  future  and  conditional, 
88-90;  passive,  91-95;  modal  auxiliaries,  96-105 ;  tenses,  106-110; 
subjunctive,  111-118;  optative  subjunctive  in  independent  sentences, 
112;  in  dependent  clauses,  113;  subjunctive  in  indirect  discourse, 
114-116;  potential  subjunctive,  117-118;  infinitive,  119-122;  par- 
ticiples, 123-126;  verbal  nouns  in  ~ing}  127-128. 

Adverbs,  129-136. 

Prepositions,  137-138. 

Conjunctions,  139-141. 

The  most  important  English  Adverbs,  Prepositions,  and  Con- 
junctions, in  Alphabetical  Order,  with  their  German 
Equivalents,  142-211. 

Word  Order,  212-246;  normal  order,  214-233;  interrogative  or  em- 
phatic order,  234-235 ;  dependent  order,  236-241 ;  periods,  242-246. 

Appendix  :  The  most  common  adjectives,  participles  and  verbs,  requir- 
ing in  German,  constructions  different  from  the  English.  Adjectives 
and  Participles,  p.  157;  Verbs,  p.  161. 

(v) 


Brtfcles. 

1.  The  use  of  the  articles,  in  English,  is  more  or  less 
idiomatic;  compare,  for  instance,  'in  church/  'in  school/ 
cin  college/  'in  town/  'in  congress/  'in  parliament/  'in 
jail/  '  in  prison/  with  '  in  the  university/  '  in  the  academy/ 
'in  the  city/  'in  the  legislature/  'in  the  senate/  'in  the 
penitentiary/  The  use  of  the  articles,  in  German,  is  also 
quite  idiomatic,  and  it  is,  therefore,  necessary  to  learn  a 
great  many  expressions  individually.  A  large  number  of 
such  will  be  given  in  connection  with  the  treatment  of 
prepositions.  The  following  rules  are  not  exhaustive  and 
admit  of  exceptions. 

DEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

2.  The  definite  article   is  generally  used  before  the 

names  of  the  seasons,  months  and  days  of  the  week : 

In  summer  3m  (for  in  bem)  <Sotnmer 

February  was  very  cold  2)er  gcbruar  tear  feljr  fait 

On  Monday  2tm  (for  cm  bem)  Sftontag 

3.  The  definite  article  is  used  with  proper  names  — - 

a.  When  preceded  by  adjectives : 

Little  William  2)er  Heine  Sityefa 

Modern  Greece  £>a8  Ijeuttge  ©rtedjenlanb 

b.  To  indicate  the  case,  when  the  name  itself  cannot  be, 
or  is  not,  inflected : 

At  the  time  of  Phidias  3ur  3cit  be$  $ljibia« 

a) 


2  DEFINITE   ARTICLE. 

c.  Often,  in  familiar  discourse : 

Heine  is  my  favorite  poet  £)er  §eine  ift  mem  iHebtinggbid)ter 

Fritz  has  broken  his  arm  2)er  gri^  \)at  ben  s#rm  gebrodjen 

d.  Feminine  names  of  countries  (i.  e.  all  in  -ct  and  bte 

©d)tt)et§  Switzerland)  are  always  preceded  by  the  definite 

article : 

I  am  coming  from  Turkey  3d)  fommc  an%  ber  Xiirfet 

He  travelled  in  Switzerland  (Sr  reifte  in  ber  @djroet$ 

4.  1.  The  definite  article  is  used  with  nouns  employed 
in  a  general  sense : 

Poetry  is  the  most  perfect  ex-  2)ie  2)id)tung  ift  ber  uollfommeufte 
pression  of  human  feeling  toSbrucf  be§  menfdjUdjen  ©ef iifyleS 

Kant's  Criticism  of  Pure  Reason  $ant$  $rittf  ber  reinen  SSernunft 

Gold  is  heavier  than  lead  2)a$  ©otb  ift  fdjtnerer  aU  ba%  23tei 
But 

His  shield  was  covered  with  gold  @ein  ©d)Ub  roar  mit  ©olb  bebecft 

2.  The  definite  article  is  often  used  before  verbal  nouns 
in -eit  ("infinitives  used  as  nouns"),  particularly  when  pre- 
ceded by  a  preposition,  when  followed  by  a  genitive,  or 
when  the  syntactical  relations  could  not  otherwise  be 
clearly  indicated ;  for  examples  see  128,  2. 

3.  The  definite  article  is  used  distributively : 

This  cloth  costs  five  marks  a      £>tefe8  £ud)  foftet  fxinf  Tlaxt  bie  (Site 

yard 
He  comes  to  see  us  twice  a  year      (§r  bef  udjt  un8  gtneimat  t*a%  3af)r 

{or  tm  3aljre) 

5.  The  definite  article  is  often  used  in  place  of  an 
English  possessive  when  the  context  leayes  no  doubt  as  to 
who  the  possessor  is;  this  is  most  frequently  done  in 
speaking  of  the  parts  of  the  body  and  of  clothing : 


INDEFINITE   ARTICLE.  3 

He  broke  his  arm  (5r  brad)  ben  %xm 

He  entered  with  his  hat  in  his      (5r  tarn  fjeretn  nut  bem  §ute  in  bcr 

hand  §cmb 

He  lost  his  life  (Sr  toertor  ba8  ?eben 

(See  71.) 

6.  As  in  English,  the  definite  article  is  omitted  before 
a  noun  preceded  by  a  genitive : 

The  friend  of  my  brother  2)er  greunb  tneineS  SBruberS 

But 
My  brother's  friend  2Mne8  SBruberS  greunb 

The  king's  son  2)e«  tonigS  ©ofni 

(See  21,  3  6  and  58.) 

7.  The  definite  article  is  usually  omitted  after  aH; 
see  36,  1 

INDEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

8.  In  English,  the  indefinite  article  a,  an,  is  now  so 
different  in  form  from  the  numeral  one,  that  we  may  use 
the  former,  without  ever  thinking  that  it  was  originally 
the  same  as  the  numeral  one,  in  cases  where  a  suggestion 
of  such  identity  would  lead  to  absurdity ;  we  may  say,  for 
instance,  "he  entered  the  room  with  a  sad  countenance." 
In  German,  the  indefinite  article  is  still  identical  with  the 
numeral  adjective  cin  (see  47,  1),  except  in  the  matter  of 
emphasis;  for  this  reason  the  use  of  the  indefinite  article 
in  cases  like  the  above  is  far  less  common  than  in  Eng- 
lish, although  it  is  difficult  to  formulate  a  definite  rule. 
Thus: 

He  was  filled  with  a  terrible  (§r  ttmrbe  Don  furdjtbarem  3orne 

hatred  of  his  enemy  gegen  fetnen  geinb  erfiittt 

I  have  a  great  desire  to  visit  3d)  trage  grogeS  SBerlangen  Sluftva* 

Australia  lien  ^u  befudjen 

He  entered  the  room  with  a  sad  (§r  trat  mit  traurtgem  ©eftdjte  in$ 

countenance  dimmer 


4  INDEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

9.  1.  After  aU  as,  and  in  the  predicate  after  neuter 
verbs,  the  indefinite  article  is  generally  omitted  before 
nouns  denoting  condition,  profession,  rank,  religion : 

As  a  Lutheran  he  was  offended  $18  2utl)eraner  fittjlte  cr  ftd)  bur* 

by  these  remarks  biefe  93emerfungen  beteibtgt 

He  is  a  teacher  (Sr  i(l  2el)rer 

He  became  a  soldier  (5r  rourbe  ©otbat 

2.  The  indefinite  article  is  also  omitted  after  ate  in  the 
sense  of  for,  as : 

He  used  the  dog  as  a  messenger      (Sr  gebraudjtc  ben  £unb  at8  53otcu 

3.  But  the  indefinite   article   should  not  be  omitted 

before  a  noun  preceded  by  an  adjective,  unless  adjective 

and  noun  together  form  one  term : 

He  is  an  efficient  officer  (§r  ifl  ein  tudjttger  Ofjtcier 

She  is  a  very  fine  singer  ©ie  iji  etne  cmSgegetdjnete  ©argerin 

But 

He  travelled  about  as  a  wander-  (£r  jog  al8  roanbernber  ©anger  um* 

ing  singer  Ijer 

10.  The  indefinite  article  is  omitted  after  of)ne: 
A  king  without  a  kingdom  (gin  $onig  ofyne  $onigreitf) 

11.  The  indefinite  article  is  never  used  before  toenige 
few  (see  41) ;  it  is  superfluous  before  fyunbert  hundred  and 
tcmfenb  thousand: 

A  hundred  and  fifty  volumes  §nnbert  unb  fiinfgig  S3a*nbe 

12.  Only  manti)  (44),  fold)  (53),  tvdd)  (35,  2  a)  and  tva$ 
fur  (35,  2  b)  are  allowed  to  stand  before  the  indefinite 
article  and  they  are  then  uninflected;  all  common  ad- 
jectives must  follow : 

So  vast  a  country  ($in  f0  grofjeS  2anb  {or  fo  ein  grogeS 

2anb;  see  53,  2. 
As  learned  a  man  as  Grimm  (Sin  fo  geiefjrter  2ftcmn  rote  ©rimm 


TITLES. 


13.  Articles,  as  well  as  pronouns  and  adjectives,  should 
be  repeated  when  qualifying  several  nouns  of  different 
genders  or  numbers : 

A  knife  and  fork  (Sin  9fteffer  unb  einc  ©abet 


Mouns, 

>j      li     A  noun   in  apposition  should  agree  in  case  and 
number  with  the  noun  or  pronoun  to  which  it  belongs : 

Charles  V.  was  the  son  of  Philip      $arl  V.  (ber  f?ilnfte)  roar  ber  ©ofnt 
the  Fair,  archduke  of  Austria,  Wttty)8  be§  @d)onen,  (SrgfyergogS 

and  the  grandson  of  Maximil-         oon   Dfterreid),   unb   ber   (Snfel 
ian  I.,  emperor  of  Germany  2JtoritmUang  I.  (be$  (Srften),  8ai* 

fer8  toon  2)eutfdjlanb 

I  15.  From  masculine  nouns  denoting  nationality,  re- 
ligion, rank,  profession,  etc.,  feminines  are  formed  by 
means  of  the  suffix  -in  (plur.  tttlteit),  and  these  should  al- 
ways be  used  in  speaking  of  women : 

Rosa   Bonheur    is    a    French      Sftofa  23oiu)eur  ijt  eine  fransojtfdje 
artist  $  ihtfiterm 

TITLES. 

16.  1.  A  title  preceding  a  proper  name  may,  or  may 
not,  have  the  definite  article ;  but  the  article  is  usually 
omitted  before  the  title  if  the  name  is  followed  by  an  ad- 
junct in  apposition : 

Captain  Werner  $ apitan  SBerner,  or   ber  $ apitan 

SSerner 
Emperor  William  $ aifer  SBitljefm,  or  ber  # aifer  SBil- 

Ijelm 
King  Frederick  the  Great  $onig  griebriti)  ber  ©rofce 


a 


ADJECTIVES    AND    PARTICIPLES. 


2.   If  preceded  by  the  definite  article,  the  title  may,  or 
may  not,  be  inflected ;  the  name  remains  uninflected : 
The  patients  of  Dr.  Koch  £>te  ^atienten  be8  2)oftor[8]  Stod) 

a.   But  §err,  which  in  polite  language  frequently  pre- 
cedes other  titles,  is  always  inflected : 


The  house  of  Mr.  Schulze 
The  children  of  the  General 


2)a8  £au8  be$  §errn  ©djulje 
S)ic  Winter  beg  §errn  ©enerale 


3.   If  the  title  does  not  have  the  definite  article,  it  re- 
mains uninflected,  while  the  proper  name  must  be  inflected : 

The  patients  of  Dr.  Koch  S)ie  ?5atienten   S)oftor   $od)8,   or 

25oftor  $od)3  ^attenten 
The  victories  of  King  Frederick      £)ie   @iege  $onig    griebrtd)8   be8 
the  Second  $m\\tn 


Hbjectives  ant>  participles. 

17.    Adjectives  and  participles  are  inflected  when  used 

1.  attributively  before  nouns : 

A  rich  country  (Sin  rettf)e#  2anb 

The  praying  child  3)a8  betenbe  $mb 

A  defeated  general  (Sin  gefdjlagener  gelbljerr 


2.  as  nouns : 

A  German 

(Sin  2>eutfd)er 

This  German 

3>tefer  2)eutfd)e 

Germans ! 

©eiitf  djc ! 

The  Germans 

S)ie  ©entfdjen 

A  stranger 

Masc. 

Sin  grember 

Fern. 

Sine  grembc 

All  present 

OTe  ^nmefenben 

No  wounded 

$eine  SBerrounbeten 

a.   After  ettt)a$  something,  ni(f)t3  nothing  and  \va$  what, 


COMPARATIVE   AND   SUPERLATIVE.  7 

something,  adjectives  are  treated  like  substantives  in  appo- 
sition : 

Something  new  (SttoaS  9?eue8 

Nothing  rare  9ttd)t8  ©elteueS 

b.  Use  the  neuter  singular  to  denote  that  in  general 
which  possesses  the  quality  expressed  by  the  adjective : 

The    beautiful,  that   which    is      2>a8  ©d)one 

beautiful 
The  sublime  2)a«  (Srfjabene 

18.  Adjectives  and  participles  remain  uninflected 

1.  in  the  predicate : 

The  earth  is  round  £>te  (£rbe  ifr  runb 

She  is  charming  ©ie  ift  reigenb 

He  has  lost  his  watch  (gr  fjat  feme  Uljr  fcerloreu 

My  coat  is  torn  SDfcein  9lo(f  ift  gerriffen 

2.  in  apposition,  except  when  preceded  by  the  article : 

All  Germans,  old  and  young  Wit  3)eutfcf)en,  alt  uttb  jung 

Standing  on  the  watchtower  of  2(uf  ber  SBarte  jeineS  ©d)toffe§  fte= 

his  castle,  he  could  see  the  l)enb,  fonnte  er  ben  geiub  fyeran* 

enemy  approaching  fommett  fefjeit 

Tired  from  his  long  march,  he  $on  feinem  langen  9ftarfd)e  ermiibet, 

lay  down  to  rest  legte  er  ftd)  nieber  urn  au^uru^eu 

But 

Frederick  the  Great  ftrtebridj  ber  ©rofje,  see  16. 1  and  3. 

3.  as  adverbs : 

He  writes  well  (Sr  fdfyreibt  gut 

She  sings  charmingly  @ie  ftngt  reigenb 

COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE. 

19.  The  ordinary  comparatives  and  superlatives  in 
-er  and  -jt  (or  eft)  are  to  be  used  in  all  cases  except  when 
a  person  or  a  thing  is  said  to  possess  one  quality  in  a 
higher  degree  than  another  quality  : 


8  COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE. 

She  is  more  beautiful  than  her  ®ie  ift  fdjoner  al8  tfjre  (Sdpueftet 

sister 

The  most  magnificent  church  in  2)te  £rarf)tigfte  $trd)e   ini    gan^en 

the  whole  country  2anbe 
J5u£ 

This  church  is  more  magnificent  £>iefe  $ird)e  ift  tnefjr  pradjttg  a(8 

than  beautiful  jd)5n 

20.  The  rules  for  the  inflection  of  adjectives  as  given 
above  apply  also  to  comparatives ;  to  superlatives,  how- 
ever, only  when  used  as  nouns,  or  attributively  before 
nouns : 

A  larger  tree  Sin  grofterer  23cwm 

He  writes  more  rapidly  than  I  ($r  fd)reibt  frfjneller  al$  id) 

The  greatest  nonsense  2)cr  grofjte  Unftnn 

That  which  is  best  2)a§  23efte 

21.  1.  Superlatives  are  used  in  English  either  rel- 
atively, when  a  comparison  is  expressed  or  implied :  she 
of  all  the  pupils  played  most  beautifully,  or  absolutely, 
without  any  expressed  or  implied  comparison  :  she  played 
most  beautifully  for  very  beautifully. 

2.  As  a  rule,  superlatives  cannot  be  used  absolutely  in 
German :  instead  of  an  absolute  superlative,  a  positive  pre- 
ceded by  an  adverb  expressing  high  degree,  or  a  cor- 
respondingly stronger  adjective,  should  be  used : 

She  played  most  beautifully  ©te  ftrielte  fer)r  fd)on,  ronnberfd)oii, 

au^gegeidjnet  (exquisitely) 

a.  A  few  superlatives  are  used  absolutely,  especially 
aHerltcbft  charming ;  see  22,  2  a  and  b,  and  23. 

3.  Superlatives  used  relatively  are,  as  a  rule,  preceded 
by  the  definite  article  : 

Most  people  2)ie  meiften  2ften(d)en 


COMPARATIVE    AND    SUPERLATIVE.  9 

The  article  is  not  used  before  superlatives  — 

a.  In  the  vocative  : 

Most  noble  lord !  (£betfter  §err ! 

This  may  also  be  regarded  as  an  absolute  superlative. 

b.  When  the  superlative  is  preceded  by  a  genitive : 

Schiller's  greatest  work  €5d)iUer8  grofeteS  SBerf 

{See  6.) 

22.  Superlatives  are  not  used  in  their  uninflected  form 
in  the  predicate,  in  apposition,  or  adverbially,  as  com- 
paratives and  superlatives  are. 

1.  In  the  predicate,  after  neuter  verbs,  two  construc- 
tions are  possible : 

a.  The  superlative  with  the  definite  article,  in  the 
nominative : 

This  house  is  the  largest  2)ie|e$  §au8  ift  ba8  grdgte 

This  construction  is  most  common  when  a  thing  is  com- 
pared with  things  of  its  own  kind. 

b.  An  adverbial  phrase  consisting  of  am  and  the  in- 
flected superlative:  am  cjroftten,  literally  at  the  largest: 

This  house  is  the  most  beautiful      £>iefe8  §au3  ift  am  fdjonften 

This  construction  is  most  common  when  a  thing  is 
compared  with  things  of  another  kind. 

2.  When  a  superlative  is  to  be  used  adverbially,  the 
same  construction  is  used : 

She  of  all  the  pupils  played  most      $>on  alien  ©djitferinnen  foielte  fie 
beautifully  am  fd)5nfien 


y 


10  PRONOUNS. 

a.  Instead  of  on  with  the  dative,  Quf  with  the  ac- 
cusative is  sometimes  used,  generally  in  an  absolute 
sense : 

He  entertained  us  most  agree-  (Sr  unterljtelt  un8  auf8  angenefymfte 
ably 

I.  Notice  the  following  expressions : 

f)ocf)ft  highly,  used  absolutely :  fyodjftenS  at  the  most 

she  was  a  highly  gifted  girl  roenigftenS,  mtubeftenS,  gum  roenig* 

fie  roar  cin  Ijodjft  begabteS  Wlab*  ften,  gum  minbeften  at  least 

djen  meiftenS  mostly 

23.  Superlatives  are  frequently  strengthened  by  pre- 
fixing to  them  the  genitive  plural  after  of  all. 

The  most  beautiful  woman  of      2)ie  atterjdjonfte  grau 

all 
She  sang  most  beautifully  of  all      @ie  fang  am  allerfdjonften 


pronouns. 

24.  All  kinds  of  pronouns  must  agree  in  number  and 
gender  with  the  nouns  for  which  they  stand : 

He  tried  to  open  the  door,  but      (Sr  fcerfud)te  bie  Zijiix  gu  offnen,  abex 
it  was  locked  fie  xoax  toerjdjtoffen 

25.  If  the  grammatical  gender  of  a  noun  denoting  a 
person  is  not  the  same  as  its  natural  gender,  a  pronoun 
referring  to  such  a  noun  more  generally  follows  the 
natural  gender : 

This  poor  maiden  has  lost  her      2)ieje8  arme  2ftabd)en  tjat  ifyre  (in- 
mother  stead  of  feine)  2Jhitter  Derfof en 

26.  1.  A  pronoun  referring  to  a  collective  noun  gen- 


FORM    OF    DIRECT    ADDRESS.  11 

erally  follows  the  grammatical  gender  and  number  of  the 

noun,  as  does  also  the  verb : 

The  people  have  lost  their  great      2)a$  SSolt  fyat  feinett  grogen  giifyrei4 
leader  oerloren 

2.  But  if  a  collective  noun  is  followed  by  a  plural 

noun  in  apposition  (59,  t>),  the  pronoun  must  be  in  the 

plural :  k 

A  large  number  of  people  were      Sine  grogc  Sftettge  ?eute  mugteu  tfjre 
compelled  to  leave  their  dwell-         SSofymmgen  Derlaffen 
ings 

FORM    OF    DIRECT    ADDRESS. 

27.  1.  The  natural  form  of  address  is  the  second  person 
singular  in  addressing  one  person :  bit  l)aft,  bit  6ift,  etc. ; 
and  the  second  person  plural  in  addressing  several  per- 
sons :  i(]r  fyabt,  ifjr  feib,  etc. 

2.  The  use  of  this  form  of  address  has  been  limited, 
however,  to  those  cases  in  which  relatives,  intimate  friends, 
very  young  persons,  or  (more  rarely)  inferiors  in  station, 
are  addressed ;  in  all  other  cases  a  conventional  form  is  used 
instead  of  the  natural  form  of  address. 

3.  This  conventional  form  of  address  consisted  formerly, 
as  it  does  now  in  English,  in  the  use  of  the  second  person 
plural  in  addressing  either  one  or  several  persons:  itjr 
Ijabt,  if)r  fetb.  This  form  was  in  use  as  late  as  the  begin- 
ning of  the  seventeenth  century  and  is  employed  by 
modern  writers  when  dealing  with  former  times  except 
when  the  natural  form  is  used. 

4.  Later,  the  third  person  came  to  be  used  as  the  con- 
ventional  form  of  address,  and  at  present  the  third  person 


12  SUBSTITUTES    FOR    PRONOUNS. 

plural  is  used  in  speaking  either  to  one  or  several  per- 
sons, the  pronoun  being  then  capitalized :  @te  Ijabeu,  ©ie 
ftub,  so  that  the  use  of  the  second  person  plural  is  now- 
restricted  to  those  cases  in  which  several  persons  are 
addressed  each  one  of  whom  would  be  addressed  by  bit. 

5.  Whatever  form  of  address  be  used,  be  careful  to  be 
consistent:  do  not  change  from  one  form  to  another,  make 
the  verb  agree  with  its  subject  and  use  the  right  pos- 
sessives  for  each  personal  pronoun :  bit  —  bein,  iljv —  eiter, 
©ie —  Sfjr. 

6.  In  the  address,  only  ©ie  and  its  possessive  Sf)t  are 
always  capitalized ;  other  pronouns  and  possessives  ordi- 
narily only  in  letters. 

SUBSTITUTES    FOR    PRONOUNS. 

28.  1.  For  a  personal  pronoun,  and,  often,  for  a  de- 
monstrative pronoun,  referring  to  a  thing  and  governed  by 
a  preposition,  there  is  substituted  a  compound  adverb  con- 
sisting of  the  adverbs  ba  (before  vowels  bar)  or  f)ter,  and 
the  preposition  in  question ;  barauf  for  cutf  itjm,  auf  tf)r,  auf 
iljn,  auf  fie,  auf  e$,  auf  tfynen ;  bamit  for  tntt  iljm,  ntit  iln\ 
mit  ifjnen : 

This  pen  is  so  poor  that  I  can-      2)iefe  geber  ift  fo  fd)fecf)t,  baft  id) 
not  write  with  it  ntd)t  bamit  fdjmben  lann 

2.  Similarly,  for  a  relative  or  interrogative  pronoun, 
governed  by  a  preposition  and  referring  to  a  thing,  a  com- 
pound with  too  (before  vowels  tour)  is  often  substituted: 
toorauf  for  auf  toetdjem,  auf  tocldjer,  auf  roeldjeu,  auf  toctdjc, 
auf  toetdjeS : 


THE    PRONOUN   C«.  13 

The  letter  in  which  he  wrote      2)er  93rief  toorin  er  bie«  fdjrteB  tft 
this  is  lost  Derloren  gegangen 

THE    PRONOUN    e3. 

29.     The  pronoun  e£  is  used  1)  in  a  definite  sense  — 
a.  "When  referring  to  a  neuter  noun : 

The  child  is  too  small,  it  cannot  £>a$  $inb  ift  gu  tteitt,  e3  fann  nod) 

yet  walk  nid)t  getyen 

I  have  not  seen  it  for  a  long  3d)  Ijabe  e«  tcuige  tud)t  gefefyen 

time 

1.  With  the  verb  fetn,  to  be,  to  express  identity : 

It  is  my  brother  (58  ift  metn  93ruber 

It  is  a  slander  (§3  ift  eine  SBertaumbiing 

If  the  noun  which  follows  (and  which  is  really  the 
predicate)  is  in  the  plural,  the  verb  is  made  to  agree  with 
it  in  number : 

They  are  Frenchmen  (§8  ftnb  (or  fie  finb,  in  case  the  sub- 

ject has  been  clearly  mentioned 
before)  grcmgofen 

If  the  predicate  is  a  pronoun,  subject  and  predicate  ex- 
change parts  and  the  verb  agrees  in  number  and  person 
with  the  new  subject : 

It  is  she  @te  ift  e8 

Is  it  you?  SBtft  bu  c«? 

c.  When  referring  to  an  idea  previously  expressed,  it 

should  be  used  in  place  of  the  English  so,  frequently  used 

for  that  purpose  (see  189) : 

He  said  that  he  had  read  the      @r  fagte,  baft  er  ba$  SBurf)  gelefen 

book,  but  I  do  not  believe  it  Ijatte,  aber  id)  glaube  e$  m'djt 

Will  he  come  1  I  hope  so  SBtrb  er  fommen?  3d)  Ijoffe  e8 

d.  To  anticipate,  as  subject,  or,  more  rarely,  as  object, 


14  REFLEXIVES. 

the    contents    of    a  following  substantive  clause  or  an 
infinitive  with  311 : 

It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  (58  nmdjt    mir  grogeS  $erguiigen 

see  you  here  ©ie  fyier  p  jefyen 

I  am  sorry  that  I  was  not  at  (5§  tljut  mir  leib,  baft  idj  ntd)t  ju 

home  §cmfe  mar 

I  do  not  believe  that  he  saw  3d)  gfaube  [e$]  tudjt,  baft  er  mid) 

me  gefefjen  l)at 

The  citizens  did  not  dare  to  op-  2)ie  23iirger  toagten  [e8]  nid)t,  bent 

pose  the  enemy  getnbe  2Biberftanb  311  leiften 

My  father  does  not  wish  me  to  Sftein  $ater  tt)Mtfd)t  [eg]  nid)t,  baft 

study  medicine  (see  122)  id)  9ftebi$in  ftubiere 

I  had  forgotten  to   take   my  3d)   fyatte  [e§J  uergeffett,    metnen 

overcoat  Ubeqiefyer  mitntnefmien 

When  c£  would  appear,  however,  as  the  subject  of  a 
passive  verb,  it  is  commonly  omitted  if  any  other  element 
of  the  sentence  stands  before  the  verb : 

I  was  told  that  you  had  accept-      (E§  tnurbe  mir  gefagt  (see  64),  or 
ed  his  offer  mir  rourbe  gefagt,  baft  ©te  fern 

5uterbieten  attgenommeu  fatten 
(See  also  84,  4.) 

2.  As  the  indefinite  subject  of  impersonal  verbs;  see 
84. 

3.  As  an  "expletive,"  before  the  verb,  when  it  is  de- 
sired to  let  the  subject  follow,  like  the  English  there ;  see 
192,  3  and  223. 

REFLEXIVES. 


K 


30.  1.  Ke member  that  in  English  the  pronouns  my- 
self, thyself,  himself  etc.,  are  used  both  as  reflexive  and  as 
emphatic  pronouns,  and  are  used  for  the  nominative,  da- 
tive and  accusative  cases  without  change  of  form:  he  did 
it  himself  (emphatic,  nominative),  /  shall  give  myself  the 


REFLEXIVES.  15 

pleasure  (reflexive,  dative),  he  deceived  himself  (reflexive, 
accusative),  etc. 

2.  In  German,  the  ordinary  personal  pronouns  of  the 
first  and  second  person  also  serve,  in  the  dative  and  accu- 
sative, as  reflexives : 

I  shall  give  myself  the  pleasure      3d)  roerbe  mix  ba%  SBergniigen  ma* 

d)en 
You  have  deceived  yourself  2)u  Ijaft  bid)  getaufdjt 

3.  In  the  third  person,  fid)  serves  as  reflexive  for  both 
dative  and  accusative,  singular  and  plural,  masculine, 
feminine  and  neuter,  and  it  must  be  used  whenever  sub- 
ject and  object  are  identical,  even  in  cases  where,  in 
English,  the  simple  personal  pronoun  may  be  used : 

The  king  called  his  ministers      £)er  $onig  rtef  jeine  Sftinifter  uut 

around  him       *  fid) 

She  has  killed  herself  <Ste  Ijat  fid)  gctotet 

4.  If  the  object  of  an  infinitive  is  a  personal  pronoun 
of  the  third  person  it  should  be  rendered  by  the  reflexive 
fid),  as  a  rule,  only  when  referring  to  the  logical  subject 
of  the  infinitive : 

The  physician  advised  him  to      3)er  2tr$t  riet  ifym,  ftd)  einige  Sftutje 
allow  himself  some  rest  jit  gbmten 

Otherwise  the  simple  personal  pronoun  should  be 
used : 

He  ordered  the  servant  to  bring  (5r  befall  bem  2)iener,  U)m  ein  paar 

him  some  eggs  Gner  ;w  brutgen 

He  ordered  a  castle  to  be  built  (Sr  befafyl,  ifym  ein  ©djtofj  auf  bem 

for  himself  on  the  mountain  SBerge  gu  banen 
(120) 

But  after  laffen,  f)6ren,  jeljen,  in  the  construction  ex- 


16  POSSESSIVES. 

plained  in  120,  the  reflexive  should  be  used  to  refer  to  the 

subject  of  the  governing  verb : 

He  had  a  castle  built  for  him-      (§r  Ueg  fid)  ein  ©cfytofj    auf    btm 

self  on  the  mountain  S8crge  bauen 

He  heard  himself  called  (Sr  Ijorte  ftd)  rufen 

5.  The  personal  pronouns  used  as  reflexives,  and  the 
reflexive  fid),  are  also  very  often  used  in  place  of  the  recip- 
rocal etnanber : 

We  have  not  seen  each  other      2Bir  Ijaben  un8  (or  etnanber)  Jauge 
for  a  long  time  nid)t  gefeljen 

a.  Whenever  a  misunderstanding  might  arise,  etnanber 
should  be  used,  or  gegenfetttg  mutually  should  be  added  to 
the  reflexive : 
They  killed  each  other  @ic  toteten  eincmber,  or  ftcf)  gegen* 

jeittg 

6.  The   emphatic   felbft   may   be   used  to  re-enforce  a 

noun  or  a  personal  or  reflexive  pronoun  without  regard  to 

case,  number  or  gender,  but  it  can  never  take  the  place  of 

such  a  noun  or  pronoun : 

He  has  done  it  himself  (§r  fyat  e«  felbfi  getljcm 

They  can  see  it  better  than      <Sie  fonnen  e$  beffer  feljett  alS  toir 
ourselves  felbft 

POSSESSIVES. 

31.  1.  The  possessive  adjectives  are  meitt  my,  belli, 
thy,  your,  feilt  his,  its,  if)r  her,  its,  unfer  our,  etter  your, 
it)r  their,  Sf)V  your.     See  24-27. 

2.  The  possessive  pronouns'  mine,  thine,  etc.  (in  contra- 
distinction to  the  possessive  adjectives  my,  thy,  etc.)  may 
be  rendered  — 

a.  By  ntetn,  bein,  etc.  declined  pronominally,  i.  e.  as  ad- 
jectives are  declined  when  not  preceded  by  the  definite 


DEMONSTRATIVES.  17 

article  or  by  another  limiting  word  having  the  same  end- 
ings :  masc.  metner,  fern,  mchtc,  neut.  meineS,  etc., 

I.  By  the  same  words  preceded  by  the  definite  article : 
masc.  ber  metne,  fern,  bie  meine,  neut.  ba3  meine, 

c.  By  the  adjectives  metnig,  beinig,  etc.,  preceded  by  the 
definite  article :  masc.  bcr  meinigef  fern,  bie  meinige,  neut. 
ba$  meinige,  etc. : 

Your  coat  is  warmer  than  mine      3)ein  SRocf  ift  toarmrr  ctt8  ineiner, 

or  ber  metne,  or  ber  meinige 

DEMONSTRATIVES. 

32.  The  demonstratives  are  btefer  this,  that,  jener  yon, 
that,  and  ber  this,  that  (gen.  sing.  masc.  neut.  beffen,  fern, 
bcrcn,  plur.  beren ;  dat.  plur.  bcncn).  2)te[er  is  used  when 
referring  to  a  nearer,  jener  when  referring  to  a  remoter 
object;  ber  may  be  employed  in  either  case.  In  the 
genitive,  however,  biefer  and  jener  are  very  rarely  used, 
except  adjectively.  In  familiar  discourse,  ber  frequently 
takes  the  place  of  a  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person, 
particularly  when  emphasized : 

This  mountain  is  not  as  high  Sttefer  23erg  ift  ntcfyt  (o  Ijod)  tt)ie 

as  that  one  jener 

I  do  not  want  that  one  3)en  raill  id)  nid)t 

He  is  not  my  friend  2)er  iji  nid)t  mem  greunb 

a.  3)ie|er  and  jener  are  never  used  merely  as  determina- 
tives ;  see  the  following  paragraph.  L 

DETERMINATIVES. 

33.  1.  The  determinatives  are  ber  and  berjenige ;  they 
are  almost  interchangeable,  except  that  berjenige,  being 
longer,  can  bear  the  stronger  emphasis.     The  latter  is  de- 


> 


18  RELATIVES. 

clined  as  though  written  in  two  words :  nom.  masc.  ber^ 
jenigc,  fern,  btejenige,  neut.  berjenige,  gen.  masc.  be^jenigen, 
etc. 

2.  These  pronouns  are  used : 

a.  As  antecedents  to  relative  pronouns ;  see  34,  1.  The 
personal  pronouns  of  the  third  person  are  never  used  in 
an  indefinite  sense  as  antecedents  of  relatives  in  place  of 
the  above  determinatives,  as  they  are  in  the  English  he 
who,  they  who,  etc. 

b.  Before  genitiver  and  before  nouns  preceded  by  prep- 
ositions : 

This  house  is  larger  than  that  2>iefeS  $>au§  ift  cjroger  alS  baS  (or 
of  my  father,  but  smaller  baSjenige)  metneS  93ater8,  abeu 
than  that  on  the  hill  ffeiner  ati  ba%  {or  baSjeiiige)  auf 

bem  §iigel 

c.  2)iefer  or  jener  may  be  used  under  such  circumstances 
only  with  a  distinct  demonstrative  force ;  e.  g.  in  the 
above  sentence  the  speaker  might  have  said  jene3  auf  bent 
§fige(,  if  he  had  actually  pointed  at  the  house. 

RELATIVES. 

34.  1.  The  relatives  are  ber  and  toetdjer.  They  are  al- 
most interchangeable,  except  that  trjetcfjcr,  being  longer, 
can  bear  the  stronger  emphasis.  By  means  of  the  deter- 
minatives bcr  and  berjenige,  and  the  relatives  ber  and 
ttetdjer,  the  English  the  one  who,  he  who,  may  be  expressed 
in  four  different  ways : 

a.  ber — ber, 

b.  ber  —  tuetd)er, 

c.  berjenige  —  berf 

d.  berjenige  —  toetcfjer. 


fcELATTVES.  19 

2.  In  the  genitive,  however,  both  singular  and  plural, 

only  ber  can,  as  a  rule,  be  used : 

The   man    whose  house    was      2)er  9ftanu  beffen  $au§  geftern  ab* 
burned  yesterday  gebrcmnt  ift 

a.  A  relative  pronoun  in  the  genitive  case  should  pre- 
cede the  governing  noun : 

The  steeple  on  the  top  of  which      2)er  £liurm,  auf  beffen  ®pifce  @te 
you  see  a  flag  is  more  than  etne  gatjne  fefyen,  ift  iiber300  ^ujj 

300  feet  high  t)od) 

3.  The  pronoun  toer  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  he 
who  and  its  neuter  ttni3  in  that  of  that  which,  when  no 
antecedent  is  expressed : 

He  who  believes  such  things  Ser  foldje  ©adjen  glanbt,  geigt  fefjr 

shows  very  little  intelligence  tr>enig  53erftanb 

I  told  my  friend  what  I  had  3d)  eqaljlte  metnem  greunbe  xva% 

learned  id)  eifafyren  tjatte 

a.  The  neuter  tva§  is  generally  used  for  tt)etd)e3  or  ba$, 
when  the  antecedent  is  an  indefinite  pronoun  or  an  adjec- 
tive used  as  a  noun: 

All  is  not  gold  that  glitters  (58  ift  nid)t  atleS  ©olb  tr>a8  gtan$t 

The  great  things  which  he  has      2)a§  ®roge,  n?a8  er  geleiftet   fyat, 
done  are  recognized  by  all  nrirb  Don  jebermcutn  anerfcmnt 

b.  As  to  whoever,  whatever,  etc.,  see  165,  3. 

4.  The  antecedent  should  always  be  expressed  when  it 

would  naturally  stand  in  a  different  case  from  that  of  the 

relative : 

He  gave  land  to  whoever  wished      (gr  gob  jebem,  ber  fid)  in  ber  (£o(onie 
to  settle  in  the  colony  niebedaffen  ttwUte,  ?anb 

Or  when  it  would  be  governed  by  a  preposition : 
Terrified  at  what  had  happened      (Srjdjrotfen  iiber  ba%  \va%  gefd)et)en 


20  INTERROGATIVES. 

I  am  not  responsible  for  what      3d)  bin  md)t  bafiir  (28, 1)  oerant* 
my  friends  have  done  roortltd),  rociS  nteine  greunbe  ge* 

tfyau  tjaben 

5.  A  relative  pronoun  can  never  be  omitted  in  German 

as  it  often  is  in  English  : 

The  book  I  read  yesterday  was      2)a§  23ud)  ba$  (or  roeldjeS)  id)  ge* 
very  interesting  ftent  la$,  ttmr  fefyr  intereffant 

6.  After  a  relative  pronoun  in  the  nominative  case, 
which  refers  to  a  personal  pronoun  of  the  first  or  second 
person,  the  nominative  of  this  personal  pronoun  is  repeated 
and  the  verb  is  made  to  agree  with  it  in  person  and  num- 
ber: 

You  who  have  deceived  me  2)u  ber  bu  mid)  getciitfd)t  fyaft 

INTBRROGATIVES. 

35.     1.    The   interrogatives  are   U>er  who  (neuter  ttm£ 
what,  unchangeable),  and  lucldjer  which  one : 
Who  are  you  ?  2Ber  finb  ©ie  ? 

What  are  you  doing  there  ?  2Ba8  tt)im  ©ie  ha  ? 

Which  one  of  these  two  horses      SSeldjeS  Don  biefen  beiben  ^Pfcrbcn 
do  you  prefer  ?  giefyen  ©ie  Dor  ? 

2.  Only  tocldjer  is  used  as  an  interrogative  adjective : 

Which  horse  do  you  prefer  ?  2BeId)e8  *Pferb  $te!)en  ©te  Dor? 

With  what  writer  are  you  most      SBeldjeu  ©djnftftetter    fennen  <Ste 
familiar  1  am  beften  ? 

a.  In  rhetorical  questions,  what  a  may  be  translated  by 
roetct)  ein,  toe(d)  remaining  then  uninflected  (see  12) : 
What  a  mountain !  2Beld)  etn  SBerg ! 

I.  What  hind  of  is  generally  expressed  by  facto  fur, 
which  expression  remains  unaffected  by  gender,  number, 
or  case  of  its  noun ;  when  \va$  is  not  preceded  by  a  pre- 


INDEFINITES.  21 

position,  fur  and  the  noun  may  be  separated  from  it  by 
other  elements  of  the  sentence,  subject,  of  course,  to  the 
general  rules  for  the  arrangement  of  the  sentence  (see 
212  ff.) : 

What  kind  of  a  man  is  he !  2Bct§  fur  ein  9Jtami  ift  er,  or  ma«  ift 

er  fiir  em  WHanix  ? 
The   gardener   inquired    with      3)er  ©civtner  fragte,  wit  roa8  fiir 
what    kind    of    flowers   he         SBlumen  er  ben  (Baal  fdjmiicfen 
should  decorate  the  hall  jolle 

INDEFINITES. 

36.     All.     1.  After  all,  bcr  should  not  be  used  except 

with  demonstrative  or  determinative  (32,  33)  force ;  when 

it  is  omitted,  all  should  be  inflected  like  ber ;  when  it  is 

used,  all  may  or  may  not  be  inflected : 

All  talking  was  useless  2tUe8  9teben  tuar  toergebttd) 

All  the  water  in  the  village  was  OTe§  SBaffer  im  2)orfe  mar  tterbor* 

spoiled  ben 

All  the  bridges  were  carried  TOe  Sriicfen  tuareu  com  (Stfe  fort- 

away  by  the  ice  gertffen 

All  the  pictures  which  I  sent  5Ule  (or  aUe  bie,  or  att  bie)  ©ematbe, 

to  the  exnibition  are  sold  bie  id)  auf  bie  9Iu§fteUung  gefanbt 

l)abt,  fmb  Derfauft 

2.  When  used  in  the  sense  of  whole,  entire,  gan#  should 

be  used  : 

All  day  £>en  gangen  £ag 

All  the  year  round  2>a8  gauje  3aljr  Ijtnburrf) 

3.  The  expression  all  of  seems  illogical  from  the  Ger- 
man point  of  view,  since  all  cannot  be  a  part  of  anything, 
hence  the  genitive  cannot  be  used : 

We   could   not   satisfy  all  of  28 ir  fonnfen  [fie]  ntdjt  afle  befrie* 

them  big  en 

All  of  his  relatives  are  opposed  ©eine  $erttmnbten  fmb  atte  {or  aUe 

to  it  fetne  SBerwanbten  fiub)  bagegeu 


22  INDEFINITES. 

37.     Any.     1.  In  interrogative,  negative  and  conditional 
clauses. 

a.  Not  any  should  always  be  rendered  by  fein : 

I  do  not  know  of  any  other      3d)  roeifj  feinen  anbern  SSeg 
road 

Not .  .  .  anybody,  any  one.     SWemanb  (see  47,  2). 

Not .  .  .  anything.     9?tdjt8  (see  47,  2). 

Not .  .  .  anywhere.     9?irgenb3. 

b.  Otherwise,  any  may  be  translated  by  einf  or,  more 

emphatically,  by  irgcnb  cut  or  irgenb  tuetd) ;  before  nouns 

in  the  plural  it  may  be  translated  by  irgenb  lucfdj,  or  be 

left  untranslated ;  before  nouns  denoting  material  it  should 

be  left  untranslated : 

Do   you   know  of   any  good      SBiffen  @ie  emeu  (or  irgenb  riant, 
French  teacher  in  this  town 1  or  irgenb  roeldjen)  gnten  franco* 

fifdjen  £cfyrer  r)ier? 
Did  you  see  any  fine  pictures  ?      §aben  @ie  [irgenb  roeldje]  fd)bne 

23ilber  gejeljen? 
Did  you  buy  any  powder  £aben  @ie  Quitter  gefauft? 

Anybody,  any  one.     [Srgenb]  jcmctnb  (see  52,  2). 
Anything.     [Srgcnb]  etoaS  (see  52,  2). 
Anywhere.     Srgenbtoo. 

2.  =  one  as  well  as  another,  [irgenb]  ein  bettebtger,  jeber 
beltebige ;  =  every,  jeber  : 

Take  any  one  of  these  books         ftimm  [irgenb]  ein  bettebtgeS  toon 

biefen  SBiidjern 
Take  any  {i.  e.,  which  and  as      SRimm  fooiele  Don  biefen  23iicf)em 

manyas,you  desire)  of  these  atg  bir  beliebt 

books 
Anybody  will  tell  you  that  you      3ebermcinn  roirb  bir  fagen,  ba6  bu 

are  mistaken  Unrest  Ijaft 

I  shall  do  anything  to  please      3d)  roerbe  aUeS  ttum  bid)  gu  befrie- 

you  bigen 


INDEFINITES.  23 

You  will  find  such  men  in  any      @old)c  SRenfdjett  tx»irfl  bu  uberatt 
country  ftuben 

38.  Both.  1.  93eibe  is  more  often  used  than  both  (ex- 
cept as  mentioned  below,  2)  and  it  may  frequently  be  em- 
ployed to  render  the  English  two  when  preceded  by  the 
article  or  a  demonstrative : 

The  two  enemies  stood  facing      2)ie  betben  getube  ffonbett  ctnanbev 
each  other  gegeuiiber 

a.  Articles  and  pronouns  are  never  allowed  to  precede 

beibc,  as  they  may  the  English  loth: 

Both  your  sisters  Seine  beiben  ©djroeftem 

Both  these  men  2)teje  betben  banner 

2.  In  both  .  .  .  and  do  not  translate  both,  except  when 
very  emphatic ;  then  use  fott)ol)(  ct(3  [audj] : 

Both  the  officers  and  soldiers         2)ie  Offtciere  unb  bie  (golbaten,  or 

foii>ol)f  bie  Offtciere  al3  [cmd)]  bie 
jSofbaten 

39.  Each,  Every.     Ordinarily,  jeberr  inflected  like  ber: 

Each  one  of  them  paid  a  fine  of  3eber  Don  tfynen  {see  59, 9)  begarjtte 

five  marks  fiinf  Wlart  ©tvafe 

Every   soldier    received    fifty  3eber  ©olbat  err)telt  fiinfetg  $atro- 

cartridges  it  en 

When  no  misunderstanding  can  arise,  beibe  may  be 
used  in  the  sense  of  each  of  two,  and  aUe  in  the  sense  of 
every  one  of  a  number: 

Each  one  had  a  sword  in  his  SBetbe  fatten  @d)tt»erter  in  ben  §an- 

hand  beu 

I  visit  my  native  town  once  3d)  befndje  meine  SBaterftctbt   aUe 

every  year  3al)ve  etnmal 

Everybody.     Scbermann,  uninfected,  except  gen.  -g. 
Everything.     Me3  (see  17,  2  a). 


24  INDEFINITES. 

40.     Either.     \.  =  one  or   the   other,  enter  (see  48,  1), 
ber  etne  [toon  beiben] : 

Give  me  either  of  your  horses       ©eben  <3ie  mtr  ein8  (or  ba&  eine) 

3t)rer  [beiben]  ^ferbe 

2.  =one  as  well  as  the  other,  jeber,  beibe,  jeber  Don  beiben, 
jomolit  ber  etne  ali  [and)]  ber  cmbere: 

I    shall    be    contented   with  3d)  bin  mit  iebem  toon  beiben  ju» 

either  friebett 

On  either  side  stood  trees  %u]  beiben  @eiten  ftanben  23anme 

In  either  case  3n  beiben  fatten 

3.  Not  .  .  .  either,  neither,  leiner  toon  betben,  toeber  ber 

etne  nod)  ber  anbere : 

I  do  not  know  either  of  these      3d)   fenne   feinen    biefer   [beiben] 
men  Sftanner,  or  roeber  ben  etnen  nod) 

ben  anberen  biefer  banner 

4.  For  the  adverbs  either  and  neither,  see  164  and  177. 

41.  Few.     SBentge  is  inflected  like  ber : 
Few  people  SSentge  £eute 

With  few  soldiers  2Jttt  roenigen  ©olbaten 

The  indefinite  article   cannot  be   used   before  toentge 
(see  11) : 

With  a  few  shillings  2Jftt  toenigen  @d)ittingen 

Occasionally,  euttge  faentge  some  few  is  used. 

42.  Less.    SBeniger,  whether  used  as  comparative  of 
IDenig  little,  or  of  tveniQC  few,  remains  uninflected: 

Berlin   has  fewer  inhabitants      Berlin  Ijat  toentger  (5intool)ner  aid 
than  Paris  $ari« 

43.  Little.    1. = small,  adj.  ffein: 

A  little  girl  (Sin  fleineS  Sftabdjen 


INDEFINITES.  25 

2.  =  a  small  quantity,  wenig,  usually  uninflected  : 
I  have  but  little  money  3d)  Ijabe  nitv  nienig  ©etb 

Never  inflect  ein  toenig  a  little : 

With  a  little  wine  9fttt  ein  toenig  5D3ein 

44.  Many.     Ordinarily,  t)tetc : 

Many  persons  33iele  2ftenfd)en 

In  the  singular,  mcmd)  is  used  in  the  sense  of  many  a ; 
it  may  be  followed  by  ein,  in  which  case  it  must  remain 
uninflected  (see  12) ;  or  ein  may  be  omitted,  in  which  case 
tnancf)  is  more  commonly  inflected  like  ber : 

Many  a  fine  horse  Wland)  ein  fdjoneS  $ferb,  or  ma\u 

d)e8  fdjone  $ferb,  or  maud)  fcfyones 
<Pferb 

In  the  plural,  mcutd)  is  inflected  like  ber;  it  then  means 
a  number  of,  implying  less  than  t)tete : 

A  number   of   scholars   have      2Jtond)e  (Mefyrte  Ijaben  bte  9ftd)ttg* 
doubted   the   truth  of   this         feit  biefer  £f)eorie  begroeifelt 
theory 

45.  More.     1.  9ftet)r,  uninflected: 

More  courage  Sftefyr  2Jhit 

With  more  ships  Wlit  metjr  @d)tffen 

2.  One  more—  another,  nod)  ein  : 

Give  me  one  more  slice  of  bread      ©ieb  tnir  nod)  ein  ©tiicf  33rot 
Two  more  ;  many  more  $ftod)  groei ;  nod)  oielc 

But  in  comparisons  and  in  negative  sentences,  rnehr 
should  be  used : 

He  had  two  more  ships  than      (£r  fyatte  groei  <Sd)iffe  tttefjr  al8  fein 

his  enemy  ^einb 

Many  more ;  much  more  SSiclc  meljr;  Did  mefjr 


26  INDEFINITES. 

Also  in  negative  sentences  : 

I  do  not  wish  any  more  bread       3d)  tt)iinfd)e  fetn  23rot  meljr  \r 

46.  Much.  SSiel  is  commonly  uninflected;  it  may, 
however,  be  inflected  like  ber,  and  should  be  so  inflected 
when  used  in  the  sense  of  many  hinds  of: 

You  drink  too  much  water  2)u  tvittfft  gu  Dtel  2Baffer 

We  had  too  much  rain  2Bir  fatten  %\\  Diet  $egen 

With  much  patience  9Jftt  triel  ©ebutb 

Many  kinds  of  wine  grow  bet-      SBieler  2Bem  ttrirb  mit  bem  filter 
ter  with  age  beffer 

(See  the  adverb  much,  176.) 

Neither.     See  40,  3. 

47.  No,  none.     1.  Sein,  inflected  like  em  (see  48,  1): 

Is  there  no  letter  for  me?  None      3ft  fetn  23rief  fiir  mid)  ba?     Reiner 

2.  Not  any,  not  a  when  equal  to  no  should  also  be 
rendered  by  fetn : 

I  have  not  slept  in  a  (or  any)  ©eit  fed)8  Sftonaten  fyabe  id)  in  !ei* 

bed  for  six  months  nem  SBette  gefd)tafeii 
But 

Did  you  not  receive  a  letter  §aben  ©ie  nid)t  einen  SBrief  uon 

from  him  ?  (6Ae  speaker  has  iljm  bef ommen  ? 
in  mind  a  certain  letter) 

Nobody.    Sftiemanb,  inflected  like  jemanb  (see  52). 
Nothing.    9?td)t»r  uninflected  (see  17,  2  a.). 
Nowhere.    SfttrcjenbS. 

48.  One.  1.  The  numeral  adjective  em  is  identical 
with  the  indefinite  article,  hence  its  forms  are  in  the 
nominative  masc.  ettt,  fern,  cittf,  neut.  ettt.  When  used 
pronominally  (i.  e.  without  a  noun),  or  as  a  pure  numeral, 
its  forms  are  masc.  ettter,  fem.  etlte,  neut.  etttS : 


INDEFINITES.  27 

One  friend ;  a  friend  (Sin  greunb 

One  of  my  friends  Cnner  tneiner  greunbe 

One  horse ;  a  horse  Sin^Pferb 

In  the  year  four  hundred  and  3m  3al)re  trierfyunbert  unb  einS 
one 

2.  One,  preceded  by  an  adjective  should  be  left  un- 
translated ;  the  distinctive  endings  of  the  adjective  make 
it  unnecessary : 

This  one  —  that  one  Sttefer  —  jener 

A  new  house  was  built  on  the  (gin  neueS  §cm§  nntrbe  auf  berfelben 

same  spot  where  the  old  one  ©telle  gebaut,  too  ba%  alte  ge- 

had  stood  ftanben  l)atte 

The  only  one  2)er  (bte,  ba§)  einjige 

3.  SRan  is  used  in  the  nominative  as  an  indefinite  pro- 
noun in  the  sense  of  one,  and  also  especially  in  many 
cases  in  which  the  passive  is  used  in  English  (see  94) : 

One  thinks  or  it  is  thought  2Jton  gfaubt 

In  the  other  cases  eincr  (see  48,  1)  should  be  used. 

49.  Other.  1.  9Inbcr,  inflected  like  an  ordinary  ad- 
jective ;  the  indefinite  article  is  never  attached  to  it  : 

The  other  party  2)ie  anbere  ^artei 

In  another  direction  3n  eiiter  anberen  9ftd)tung 

Some  .  .  .  others  2>ie  eineu  . . .  bie  anberen,  or  etnige 

. . .  anbere 
Some  ...  or  other  2)er  eine  ober  anbere,  or  irgenb  ein 

2.  In  expressions  like  one  after  another  the  definite 

article  may  be  used  before  ein  and  should  be  used  before 

anber : 

The   four   brothers  died   one      2)te  toier  S3riiber  ftarben  einer  (or  ber 
after  another  eine)  nad)  bent  anberen 

3.  The  reciprocal  one  another,  each  other  is  to  be  ren- 
dered by  etnauber  or  by  the  reflexive  pronouns ;  see  30,  5. 


28  INDEFINITES. 

In  the  sense  of  one  more,  nod)  ein  should  be  used  (see 
45,2): 

Give  me  another  slice  of  bread      ©tb  mir  nod)  ctn  ©tiicf  SBrot 

50.  Same.  Unless  the  article  is  contracted  with  a  pre- 
ceding preposition,  it  is  written  with  the  various  forms  of 
fetb  in  one  word : 

On  the  same  day  $m  fetben  Xage 

In  the  same  direction  3n  berfelben  $id)tung 

With  the  same  right  9fttt  bemjelben  Wtfytt 

a.  S>erfel6e  is  used  more  often  than  the  English  the  same 
as  a  substitute  for  a  personal  pronoun,  to  avoid  repetition 
or  confusion.     For  an  example  see  187. 

51.  Several.  (Stntge,  or  mefjrere,  inflected  regularly. 
Neither  can  take  the  definite  article ;  the  several  may  be 
rendered  by  bie  berfcfytebenen. 

52.  Some.     1.  =  a  small  quantity,  tin  toenig,  or  etttm3: 
Please  get  me  some  water  93itte  tyolen  @ie  mir  em  roenig  (or 

etroa*)  SBaffcr 

2.  —  one,  a,  einf  or,  more  emphatically,  irgenb  ein: 

Some  Frenchman  mnst  have      (Sin  (or  irgenb  ein)  graitgofe  imifi 
painted  this  picture  biefe§  33Ub  gcmalt  fyaben 

Somebody,  some  one.  Semanb  (gen.  -c8,  dat.  and  ace. 
uninflected,  or  -cm,  -Cit)f  or,  more  emphatically,  irgenb 
jemanb. 

Something.    ©ttt)a§,  (see  17,  2  a.  and  84),  or,  more  em- 
phatically, irgenb  tttocS. 
Sometime.    (Sinmat. 

3.  =  a  few,  several,  etntge,  mefjrere ;  ein  paar : 


INDEFINITES.  29 

Please  get  me  some  books  to  SBitte  fyoten  ©ie  mir  einige  {or  eiu 
read  paav)  S8ilcf)er  mm  £efen 

There  -were  some  Frenchmen  (58  roaren  einige  granjojen  im  £ote( 
at  the  hotel 

Some  .  .  .  others  (£mtge  . .  .  anbere,  or  tie  einen  . . . 

bie  onberen 

Sometimes.    Sftandjmaf. 

4.  =  about,  mtgefafjr: 

There  were  some  thirteen  or  (£8  toaren  imgefafjr  bret$efm  ober 
fourteen  Frenchmen  at  the  toieqeljn  granjofen  im  §ote( 

hotel 
But 

Some  hundreds  of  Frenchmen       (Sinige  t)imbert  gran^ofen 

53.  Such.  1.  ©old)  is  inflected  like  an  ordinary  ad- 
jective, but  when  it  precedes  another  adjective,  it  may 
remain  uninflected,  and  when  it  precedes  the  indefinite 
article  (for  unlike  the  English  such  it  may  also  follow  it, 
see  12),  it  must  remain  uninflected : 

Such  nonsense  ©otcfyer  Unfmn 

Such  people  <2o!d)e  i*eute 

Such  good  news  ©otdje  {or  fold))  gute  9?ad)rtd)ten 

Such  a  book  ©old)  em  {or  eiu  fold) eg)  23ud) 

2.  Before  the  indefinite  article  or  before  an  adjective,  jo 
may  be  used  in  place  of  fold) : 

Such  a  poem  <So  em  ©ebtdjt 

Such  a  great  man  @o  em  groger  SJtemt,  or  em  fo  grofjir 

STOatm 
Such  good  news  8o  gute  ^adjridfteit 

(See  12). 


30  NOMINATIVE. 

Bumbers  anfc  Cases* 

SINGULAR  AND  PLURAL. 

54.  If  each  one  of  several  subjects  of  a  kind  stands  in 
the  same  general  and  special  relation  toward  one,  and 
only  one,  of  a  like  number  of  objects  also  of  a  kind,  the 
object  is  generally  put,  distributively,  in  the  singular, 
while  the  subject  is  put,  collectively,  in  the  plural: 

The  soldiers  presented  arms  2)ie  Ootbaten  prafenttrteu  ba8  ©e* 

tt>el)r  {each  one  only  one  rifle  or 
sword) 

Many  men  lost  their  lives  $iele  Sftenfdjett  Derloreu  ba%  (see  5) 

£ebett 

All  took  off  their  hats  Wt  nafymen  ben  §ut  ab 

We  turned  our  backs  on  him         2Bir  fefyrten  ifym  ben  Sftiitfen  gu 

55.  In  expressing  aggregate  measurement,  masculine 
and  neuter  nouns  are  put  in  the  singular,  feminine  nouns, 
except  SDiarf  mark,  in  the  plural : 

This  room  is  fifteen  feet  long  2)iefe«  3tnimer  ift  fiinfge^n  ftug  tang 

and  thirteen  feet  six  inches  unb  bretgefyrt  gug  fed)$  3°^  brcit 
wide 

I  need  ten  pounds  of  flour  3d)  braudje  gefyn  $funb  2ftel)l 

In  the  German  army  a  com-  3m  beutfdjen  §eeve  t}<\t  eine  Com- 
pany has  two  hundred  and  pagnie  groetfyimbert  unb  futtfgtg 
fifty  men  %Ra\m 

This  book  costs  six  marks  £iefe§  SBud)  foftet  fed)§  Sftarf 
But 

We    marched    twenty    miles  Sir   mavfdjierten   gtt>an$ig  SDtalen 

farther  (/em.)  roeiter 

Similarly,  in  expressing  the  time  of  day,  Uf)r  remains 
unvaried : 

At  ten  o'clock  Um  3ef)n  UI)r;  see  153,  6. 

NOMINATIVE. 

56.  The  nominative  is  used  1)  to  express  the  subject : 
The  bird  sings  2)er  SBogel  fingt 


GENITIVE.  31 

2.  In  the  predicate  with  neuter  verbs  and  with  the 
passive  of  verbs  which  take  two  accusatives  in  the  active 
(see  75) : 

He  became  an  excellent  scholar      C£r  nwrbe  etn  DorjiigUdjer  ©elcljrter 
Maximilian  I.  was  called  the      ^ajrtmilian   bcr  Gh'fte  rourbe   bcr 
last  knight  lefcte  fitter  gcnamtt 

a.  After  tocrben  in  the  sense  of  he  changed  into,  the  con- 
struction explained  in  76,  1  should  be  used : 

The  swan  became  a  beautiful      Ter  ©djroan  ttntrbe  ^n  t\\[tx  fcf)onen 
maiden  3»ungfrau 

GENITIVE. 

57.  The  German  genitive   represents  1)  the  English 

possessive : 

My  father's  house  2fteine§  Waters  §au8 

2.  Many  of  the  relations  expressed  in  English  by  the 
preposition  of: 

The  house  of  my  father  2)a8  #au8  meine§  Waters 

The  king  of  the  country  2)er  $onig  be8  £anbe8 

The  works  of  Shakespeare  3)ie  SBerfe  ©tjafefoeare'S 

Many  of  his  friends  SSiele  feiner  greunbe 

The  singing  of  the  birds  £)er  ©efcmg  ber  $ogel 

The  singing  of  these  songs  2)a8  ©ingen  btefer  £ieber 

58.  Ordinarily,  only  genitives  of  proper  names,  and, 
much  less  frequently,  such  of  nouns  denoting  persons,  are 
placed  before  the  governing  noun ;  in  that  case,  as  in  Eng- 
lish, the  governing  noun  has  no  article : 

Charles*  father  $arl8  $ater 

This  girl's  mother  2)iefe8  SftabdjenS  Gutter,  or,  more 

commonly,    bte    gutter     biefeS 

2ftabdjcn8 

59.  The  following  uses  of  of  require  special  atten- 
tion: 


32  GENITIVE. 

1.  In  formulae  of  rank  or  title,  t)on  is  used : 

The  king  of  England  2)er  $ bnig  oon  ©ngtanb 

The  mayor  of  Berlin  2)er  SBiirgcrmeiftcv  oon  ^Berlin 

2.  A  proper  name  is  never  subordinated  to  a  generic 

term,  but  is  placed  in  apposition : 

The  city  of  Rome  2)ie  @tabt  $om 

He  received  the  name  of  Alex-      ©r  ertjielt  ben  9?amen  SHeranber 
ander 

3.  The  genitive  may  be  used  to  denote  a  quality  or 

characteristic : 

An  American  of  German  de-      ©in  toerifaner  bentfdjer  St&fimft 
scent 

A  few  such  genitives  are  common  in  the  predicate,  after 

neuter  verbs,  and  one  or  two  are  used  adverbially : 

They  were  all  of  one  opinion         ©ie  maren  alle  ciner  Hnjtdjt,  einer 

9fteinung,  eine§  ©tnnes 
We  were  of  good  cheer,  in  good      2£ir   roaren    gnter   SDinge,    guter 

humour  2anne 

He  had  to  return  without  hav-      ©r  mnfete  nnoerridjtetcr  ©adje  (or 

ing  accomplished  anything  2)tnge)  gnriidfeljren 

4.  But  more  often,  a  quality  or  characteristic  is  expres- 
sed by  fcon  with  the  dative;  and  to  express  material,  either 
Don  or  ctu<3  should  be  used: 

A  knife  of  the  finest  steel  ©in  Sfteffer  t>om  fetnften  ©tat)Ie 

A  piece  of  the  proper  length  (Sin  ®tiicf  oon  ber  rid)  tig  en  £cinge 

The  jeweller  made  a  little  box  $>er  ©olbfdjmieb  mad)te  cin  J?  aftdjen 
of  ebony  and  silver  cm$  ©benl)ol$  nnb  @ilber 

a.  From  most  of  the  nouns  denoting  material,  adjectives 
are  derived  which  may  be  used  in  place  of  the  noun  pre- 
ceded by  Don: 

A  shield  of  silver  ©in  filberner  ©djitb 

A  dress  of  black  silk  ©in  jd)tt)argfeibene8  $letb 


GENITIVE. 


33 


5.     To  denote  origin  from,  or  connection  with,  uon  or 
au$  should  be  used : 


He  came  of  a  good  family 


Sr  ftcunmte  an8  gnter  (see  8)  ga* 

milie 
^rofeffor  §efmt)ot£  au8  Berlin  ift 

angefommen 


^rofeffou  $etml)olfc   in  ^Berlin  f)at 
cine  hridjttge  Sntbecfnng  gemadjt 


Professor  Helmholtz  of  Berlin 
has  arrived 
But 

Professor  Helmholtz  of  Berlin 
has  made  an  important  dis- 
covery 

r  6.  After  a  noun  denoting  measure,  definite  or  indefinite, 
the  thing  measured  does  not  generally  stand  in  the  geni- 
tive, but  remains  uninflected :  % 

A  pound  of  gold  (Sin  *Pfunb  ©olb 

A  piece  of  glass  (Sin  @tiicf  ©taS 

A  bottle  of  wine  Sine  Stefdje  2Bein 

A  large  number  of  people  Sine  9ftenge  2eute 

a.  If  the  second  noun  be  preceded  by  an  adjective,  it 
may,  but  need  not,  be  put  in  the  genitive : 

A  pound  of  fine  gold  Sin  sJ3fimb  feinen  ©otbe§ 

7.  In  familiar  discourse,  Don  with  the  dative  is  quite 

frequently  used  for  the  genitive : 

Many  of  our  soldiers  SBiele  toon  nnferen  ©otbaten,  for  the 

more  dignified  oiete  unferer  <®oU 
baten 
S)te  fdjonfte  Don  alien  (see  23) 

2>ie  Umgegenb  con  Berlin 
Sin  greunb  Don  tnetnem  $ater,  for 
the  more  dignified   ein  greunb 
meineS  SaterS 

a.  This  must  be  done  when,  for  rhetorical  reasons,  the 
genitive  is  to  be  separated  from  the  governing  noun  or 
pronoun : 


The  most  beautiful  woman  of 

all 
The  vicinity  of  Berlin 
A  friend  of  my  father's  {see 

below,  13) 


34  GENITIVE. 

Of  his  friends  some  believed      $on   feinen  greunben    ijielten  tf)n 
him  innocent,  some  guilty  etnige  fiir  fd|itlbig,  anbere  fie  un= 

fdjulbig. 

b.  As  a  rule,  fcon  with  the  dative  should  be  substituted 

for  a  partitive  genitive  of  a  relative  pronoun : 

I  met  ten  soldiers,  five  of  whom      3d)  begegnete   $el)n  @olbaten,  t»on 
were  wounded  benen  fiinf    (34,  2  a)    tterronnbet 

roaren 
But 
I  met  a  company  of  soldiers      3d)  begegnete  etne  (Sompagnie  @ol-- 
whose  captain  was  wounded  baten,  (see  above,  6)  beren   (pos- 

sessive genitive)  £>auptmanit  tter= 
ttmnbet  roar 

8.  In  dates  the  name  of  the  month  follows  the  ordinal 
numeral  without  sign  of  inflection  : 

The  fourth  of  July  £)cr  merte  3nii 

(See  80,  1). 

9.  The  genitives  of  personal  pronouns  should  not  be 
used  except  when  dependent  on  certain  verbs  and  adjec- 
tives requiring  a  genitive  for  an  object  (61,  62) ;  otherwise 
uon  should  be  used : 

I  remember  you  3d)  erinnere  mid)  eurer 

But 

One  of  you  (Shier  r»on  end) 

Some  of  them  (Stnige  Don  ifynen 

10.  Instead  of  a  genitive,  Don  with  the  dative,  or  some 
other  construction,  should  be  used,  whenever  neither  the 
ending  of  the  word  itself,  nor  that  of  any  qualifying  word 
before  it,  would  mark  it  as  a  genitive : 

The  children  of  men  who  have  2)ie  $inber  uon  2JJatmern  bie  fiir  tin* 

died  for  their  country  SSaterlanb  geftorben  ftnb 

I  remember  him  3d)  erinnere  mid)  fetner 

But 

I  remember  nothing  3d)  erinnere  mid)  an  nid)t8 


GENITIVE.  35 

11.  The  construction  of  one  genitive  depending  on  an- 
other should  ordinarily  be  avoided.  This  may  be  done  in 
various  ways,  especially  by  the  use  of  Don,  with  the  dative, 
or  by  that  of  an  adjective : 

The  rumor  of  Macbeth's  wicked  2)a8  ©enid)t  Don  2Kacbetf)3  bofen 
deeds  Xfjaten,  rather  than  ba$  ©eriidjt 

ber  bofen  £b,aten  ^JJtecbettjS 

Every  part  of  the  king's  do-  3eber  ^Begirt  be8  foniglidjen  ©e* 
minion  bteteS 

12.  Very  often  a  compound  noun  may  be  used  instead 
of  a  noun  with  a  dependent  genitive : 

The  minister  of  war  2)er  $rieggminifter 

A  manufacturer  of  cigars  Sin  Qugarrenfabrifcuit 

13.  The  so-called  "double  possessive"  should  be  ren- 
dered by  the  simple  genitive : 

A  friend  of  my  father's  (Sin  grcunb  meineg  SBaterS 

A  friend  of  mine  (Sin  greunb  Don  mir  (see  above,  9), 

or,  better,  einer  (see  48, 1)  meinev 

greunbe 

14.  Whenever  of  is  synonymous  with  about,  it  should 
be  translated  by  uon  (with  dat.)  or  iiber  (with  ace.) : 

We  spoke  of  him  2Bir  fprad)en  Don  tfjtn,  or  iiber  ifjn 

This  chapter  treats  of  Frede-  £)iefe8  $ctpttel  fyanbelt  Oon  grtebrid) 
rick  the  Great  bem  ©rogen 

60.  The  genitive  is  used  to  denote  time,  generally  more 
or  less  indefinite,  in  certain  fixed  expressions : 

In  the  morning  [2)e«]  2Jtorgen8 

In  the  evening  [3)e£]  3Ibenb§ 

At  night  [3)e$]  9hd)t8  (irregular,  from  bie 

Madjt) 
On  Sunday  [Def|  ©onntagS  ;  similarly  [be$] 

2ftontag«,  etc. 


36  GENITIVE. 

One  (or  some)  day  (SineS  £age3  ;  similarly  one  fore- 

noon, etneS  SBormittagS,  etc. 
One  (or  some)  morning  (SineS  SftorgenS 

One  (or  some)  evening  (SineS  2lbenb8 

a.  Instead  of  this  genitive  a  suitable  preposition  may, 
of  course,  be  used : 

In  the  morning  31m  SRorgen 

In  the  evening  s#m  3lbenb 

In  the  night  3n  ber  9£ad)t 

&.  Definite  time  is  expressed  by  the  accusative  or  by  a 

preposition  (see  80,  1) : 

On  the  evening  before  his  de-      2)en  (or  am)  2tbenb  Dor  feiner  %h» 
parture  reife 

61.  A  number  of  adjectives  take  a  genitive  as  a  comple- 
ment :  he  was  worthy  of  this  distinction  er  Wax  biefer  2lu3~ 
jeirf)mtng  Umrbtg.     The  most  common  of  them  are : 

bebiirftig  needing  funbig  knowing 

bemuftt  conscious  ntiibe  tired 

eingebenf  mindful,  also  tmetn*  fatt  sated;  tired 

gebenf  jdjulbig  guilty,  also  unftfjulbig 

fafjig,  capable,  also  unfal}ig  fidjev  sure 

frol)  glad  teittjaftig  partaking 

geraaljr  aware  t)erbcid)tig  suspected 

getotj}  sure  tterlnfiig  losing 

geroofyit  accustomed  uotl  full 

tnnc  (properly  an  adverb)  aware,  roert  worthy,  also  unroert 

particularly  inne  roerben  be-  toitrbig  worthy,  also  unroiirbig 

come  aware  iibevbriifftg  weary,  disgusted 

a.  Some  of  these  adjectives  admit  also  of  other  con- 
structions and  these  constructions  must  be  used  in  the 
cases  stated  59,  10;  see  Appendix  A. 

62.  A  number  of  verbs  take  a  genitive  as  an  object. 


GENITIVE.  37 

1.  Some  verbs  take  a  genitive  as  a  direct  object ;  most  of 
them  also  admit  of  other  constructions  (see  Appendix  B) 
and  these  constructions  must  be  used  in  the  cases  stated 
59, 10.     The  most  common  of  them  are : 

ad)tert  heed  gebenfen  remember,  mention 

bcburfen  need  gentejjen  enjoy 

begefyren  desire  tjarren  wait  for 

brand) en  need  Pffegen  take  care  of 

evmcuigeln  be  in  want  of  fcbonen  spare 
ertoaf)neu  mention 

Thus: 

He  remembered   the   services  (Sr  gebadhte  ber  2)ienfief  bie  ber  grofic 

which  the   great  statesman  ©taatsmann   feinem   SBaterlanbe 

had  rendered  to  his  country  geleiftet  fyatte 

This    passage   requires   some  2>iefe  ©telle  bebarf  roeiterer  (Srfla= 

further  explanation  rung 

Spare  him  @d)one  feiner 

2.  As  in  English,  a  number  of  verbs  take  a  genitive  in 

addition   to  a  direct  object  in  the  accusative.     Usually 

the  direct  object  is  a  person,  the  remoter  object,  in  the 

genitive,  a  thing : 

They  convicted  him  of  murder      <2>te  iiberfiibrten  if)it  be§  9ftorbe8 
I  assured  him  of  my  personal      3d)  t>erfid)ertc  it)n  metner  perfon* 
respect  Udjen  ©odjadjtung 

In  the  passive  construction,  the  accusative,  of  course, 

becomes  a  nominative,  the  genitive  remains : 

He  was  deprived  of    his  in-      (£r  rourbe  feineS  (SinfhiffeS  beraubt 
fluence 

Such  verbs  are  those  of  accusing,  convicting,  convincing, 

depriving,  admonishing,  assuring  and  a  few  others : 

anffagen  accuse  entbinben  release 

berauben  deprive  enttjeben  deliver,  remove 

befdjulbigen  accuse  entlaffen  discharge,  dismiss 


38  I)ATIVE. 

entfefeen  depose  iiberfyeben  relieve 

enttoofjnen  disaccustom  toerftdjent  assure 

freijprecfjrn,  loSfpredjen  acquit  anirbigert  consider  worthy 

iiberfufyren,  iiberraeifen  convict  getfyen  accuse 

3.  A  number  of  verbs,  reflexive  in  German,  but  corres- 
ponding in  meaning  to  English  common  transitive  or  neu- 
ter verbs,  may  take  a  genitive  as  an  object  in  addition  to 
their  regular  reflexive  object: 

I  remember  the  passage  per-  3d)  ertttnere  mid)  bcr  ©telle  ganj 

fectly  well  genait 

He  was  ashamed  of  his  conduct  (£r  fdjdmte  fid)  fetneS  23etragen$ 

He  boasted  of  his  knowledge  (Sr  riitjmte  fid)  fritter  tfemttnig  be« 

of  French  grattgofifdjeu 

Such  verbs  are,  among  others : 

ftd)  amteljnten  take  an  interest  in  ftd)  entfmnen  remember 

ftdj  bebtenen  make  use  ftd)  erbarmen  take  pity  on 

fid)  befletftigen  (befletften)  apply  ftd)  erimtent  remember 

one's  self  fid)  erroefyren  resist 

ftd)  bentadjtigen  take  possession  fid)  erfreuen  be  glad,  enjoy 

ftd)  entau&ertt  get  rid  ftd)  freuen  rejoice 

fid)  etttljaUen  abstain  fid)  riifjmen  boast 

ftd)  enttebigen  get  rid  fid)  fdjdmen  be  ashamed 

fid)  eutfdjlagett  part  with  ftd)  roetgent  refuse 

a.  Some  of  these  verbs  admit  also  of  other  constructions 
(see  Appendix  B),  and  these  constructions  must  be  used 
in  the  cases  stated  59,  10. 

DATIVE. 

63,  The  indirect  object  is  expressed  in  English  either 
by  the  simple  objective  case :  he  gave  the  driver  the 
money ;  or,  whenever  it  does  not  immediately  follow  the 
verb,  by  means  of  the  preposition  to :  he  gave  the  money 
to  tM  driver.  In  German  the  dative  is  used  in  either 
case,  as  its  distinctive  endings  allow  it  to  take  any  posi- 


DATIVE.  39 

tion  in  the  sentence  without  injury  to  the  sense :  er  gab 
bent  jiutjdjcr  ba$  @elb,  or  er  gab  ba$  ©elb  bem  Sutler. 

a.  Be  careful  not  to  mistake  the  indirect  object  for  the 
direct  or  vice  versa.  In  doubtful  cases  try  to  put  to  be- 
fore the  object ;  if  you  can  do  so,  either  by  a  re-arrange- 
ment of  the  sentence  or  otherwise,  it  is  the  indirect  ob- 
ject and  should  be  translated  by  the  German  dative. 

b.  Whenever  it  is  possible  to  dispense  with  to,  either  by 
a  re-arrangement  of  the  sentence  or  otherwise,  the  simple 
dative  should  be  used  in  German : 

He  lent  his  pencil  to  his  neigh-  (£r   liel)    feinem    9iad)baru    feincn 

bor  =  he  lent  his  neighbor  93feiftift 

his  pencil 

He  showed  his  house  to  his  (Sr  geigte  feinen  neuen  greunben  feiu 

new  friends  =  he  showed  his  §au§ 

new  friends  his  house 

The   king  gave  [to]  him  his  2>er  $onig  gab  ifym  feine  $rone  unb 

crown  and  his  sword  jein  <&d}mxt 

c.  Whenever  it  is  not  possible  to  dispense  with  to, 
either  by  a  re-arrangement  of  the  sentence,  or  otherwise, 
a  suitable  preposition  should  be  used ;  see  199. 

64.  In  English  the  indirect  object  of  an  active  verb  is 
often  made  the  subject  of  a  passive  verb ;  this  cannot  be 
c(one  in  German  and  the  dative  must  remain  a  dative : 

The  king  gave  him  permission  Der  $omg  gab  tfym  (Srlaubuife  = 

=  he  was  given  permission  iljm  rourbe  t)om  ,f  om'g  (Srtanbuig 

by  the  king  gcgeben 

He  did  as  the  general  had  com-  Sr  ttjat  ttrie  iljm  ber  ©enerat  befof)* 

manded  him  =  he  did  as  he  leu  fyatte  =  er  tt)at  Wit  ifmt  noit 

had  been  commanded  by  the  bem  ©eneral  befofyfen  ttiorben  Wax 
general 

He  was  told  (§3  ttmvbe  iljm  gefagt 

As  I  was  told  Sie  ntir  gefagt  rourbe  (29, 1  d). 


40  DATIVE. 

65.  The  following  verbs,  corresponding  to  English  tran- 
sitive verbs  (83),  are  regarded  as  intransitive  in  German 
and  take,  therefore,  a  dative  as  their  sole  object : 

cmtttJortrn  answer  gefaflnt  please 

b:gegncn  meet  fyelfcn  help 

bcmfcn  thank  nal)en {also  jtdj  nafyevn)  approach 

bicnen  serve  ratett  advise 

broken  threaten  fdjaben  injure 

fcljleit  be  wanting,  ail  -  fdjmeidjeln  flatter 

fo!gen  follow  -  trouen  trust - 

gefyordjen  obey  trouen  defy 

66.  A  number  of  verbs  take  a  dative  of  the  person  and 
an  accusative  of  the  thing,  the  latter  often  a  neuter  pro- 
noun: 

He  has  given  me  permission  (£r  fyat  e§  mir  erlaubt,  lit.  'he  has 

permitted  it  to  me ' 

The  accusative  may  be  replaced  by  an  infinitive  with 

gil,  or  by  a  subordinate  clause  introduced  by  bctfc : 

He   commanded   him   to   be      (gr  gebot  (befarjl)  ifjm  ©tilljdjtneigen, 
silent  or  fttll  gu  fd)tt>etgen,  or  baft  cr  ftill 

fdjtneigen  folle 
Such  verbs  are : 

befefylen,  gebteten  order,    bctnfen,  cerbcmfen  he  indebted 

for,  erlauben  permit,  fcergeben,  uerjeifjen  pardon,  forgive. 

67.  The  dative  may  be  used  after  verbs  denoting  deliv- 
ering, sending,  transmitting,  writing,  etc.,  but  a  preposi- 
tion is  often  used  for  greater  emphasis : 

The  courier  delivered  the  des-      3)er  Courier  iibergab  bie  2>epefdjen 
patches  to  the  ambassador  bem  ©efanbten,  or  an  ben  (Sefanb* 

ten;  see  199>  1  b. 

68.  After  fagen  say,  511,  with  the  dative,  should  be  used 
when  the  words  actually  said  are  quoted  or  referred  to ; 


DATIVE. 


41 


when  merely  their  general  meaning  is  of  importance,  the 
simple  dative  is  sufficient : 

(§r  fagte  git  feinem  33ruber:  „idj  ttuH 
anftatt  beiner  f)ingel)en" 

(Sr  fagte  tt)m,  er  roiirbe  fytngeljen 

3d)  fyaht  biefe  SBorte  nie  gu  ifym  ge* 
fagt 

3d)  l)abe  e«  bir  gefagt 


He  said  to  his  brother :  "I  will 

go  in  your  place" 
He  said  to  him  he  would  go 
I  have  never  said  these  words 

to  him 
I  told  you  so 


69.  After  verbs  of  removal  the  dative  is  used  to  express 

the  English  from  : 

He  stole  my  watch  from  me  dx  flaf)l  tntr  bie  (mcine)  lU)r 

The  policeman  took  the  pistol      2>er  ^otigift  ncu)m  U)m  bie  ^tftofe 
away  from  him  to  eg  . 

70.  The  dative  is  used  after  many  verbs  compounded 

(see  130)  with  ctt>,  an,  auf,  au£,  bei,  ein,  entgegen,   nadj, 

unter,  uor,  timber,  jit  and  the  inseparable  prefix  ent~ : 

Let  us  go  to  meet  him  ?agt  un§  ifjm  entgegengefyen 

The  ambassador  submitted  the      3)er  ©efanbte  unterbreitetc  btn  33e- 


report  to  the  king 

The  youth  resisted  all  tempta- 
tions 

I  have  complied  with  his  wish 


ridjt  bem  $omge 
3)er  3ungUng  hnberftcmb  alien  SSer- 

fudjungen 
34  bin  feinem  SBnnfdje  nad)gefom* 
men      N 
See  Appendix  B. 

71.  The  dative  often  takes  the  place  of  an  English  pos- 
sessive genitive  or  possessive  adjective  qualifying  a  noun 
which  is  then  usually  preceded  by  the  definite  article : 


He  has  broken  his  arm 

He  hurled  a  stone  at  the  head 

of  his  enemy 
He  threw  himself  at  the  feet 

of  the  angel 
The  town  was  decorated  in  his 

honor 


dx  Ijctt  ftd)  ben  $rm  gebrodjen 

(£v  ujctrf  feinem  getnbe  einen  (Stein 

an  ben  $opf 
dx  marf  ftd)  bem  (Snget  gu  giifjen 

3)te  @tabt  Wax  if)tn  gu  ©Ijien  ge- 
fdjmiicft 


x 


42  ACCUSATIVE. 

72.  The  dative  may  often  be  used  after  a  transitive 
verb  accompanied  by  a  direct  object,  to  express  the  Eng- 
lish for  ("  dative  of  interest ") : 

He  bought  a  horse  for  his  son      (£r  faufte  feinem  ©o^ne  em  $ferb 

a.  This  dative  ("of  interest"),  particularly  of  personal 
pronouns,  is  often  used  with  weakened  force  when  it  is 
not  absolutely  essential  to  the  context : 

I  have  bought  a  house  3d)  fyctbe  mir  em  §cmS  gefcmft 

The  king  took  a  wife  3)er  $ onig  nafym  fief)  erne  grau 

73.  The  dative  is  used  with  many  adjectives  the  English 

equivalents  of  which  are  followed  by  to  (see  Appendix  A; 

also  231,  2  and  3) : 

He  remained  faithful  to  her  (§r  blieb  tf)r  treu 

The  weather  was  favorable  to      2)a8  Setter  mar  unferem  Untentetj* 
our  undertaking  men  giinftig 

ACCUSATIVE. 

74.  The  accusative  is  used,  as  in  English,  to  express  the 
direct  object : 

She  wrote  a  letter  ©ie  fdjrieb  eiuen  53rief 

75.  The  verbs  of  naming,  calling,  etc.,  take  two  accusa- 
tives in  the  active  and  two  nominatives  in  the  passive 
voice : 

He  called  me  his  friend  (£r  naunte    mid)    f  eiuen  greunb; 

see  56,  2 

76.  1.  The  verbs  of  choosing,  electing,  appointing,  etc., 
which  in  English  take  two  accusatives,  take  only  one  in 
German,  namely  the  direct  object;  the  other  accusative 
(the  factitive  predicate)  must  be  translated  by  the  prepo- 
sition ju  with  the  noun  in  the  dative,  preceded  in  the 


ACCUSATIVE.  43 

singular  by  the  article,  which  is  always  contracted  with 
the  preposition,  or  by  a  possessive  adjective  : 

The  people  elected  him  presi-  £>a8  SBolf  ermcUjlte  il)n  gum  $rafU 

dent  benteit 

The  king  appointed  him  his  2)er  $ bnig  erucmnte  ifyn  gu  feinem 

counsellor  Sftatgeber 

Similarly  in  the  passive  : 

He  was  chosen  leader  Gsr  murbe  gum  giit)rcr  ermafylt 

2.  With  the  verbs  of   considering,  declaring,  etc.,  the 

factitive  predicate  is  expressed  by  means  of   a (3  or  fur 

with  the  accusative : 

He  regarded  it  as  a  disgrace  <£x  fal)  e«  aU  (or  fiir)  eiuc  @d)anbe 

an 

In  the  passive,  the  nominative   is  used  after  ate,  the 

accusative  after  fur : 

He  was  considered  an  honest      (£r  umrbe  al$  eiu  et)rlid)er  9ftann  (or 
man  fiir  einen  eljrlidjen  2ftann)  ange* 

fefyett 

77.  Setjren  teach,  takes  two  accusatives  : 

He  taught  me  French  Grr  lefyrte  mid)  granjbftfdj 

78.  A  few  adjectives  which  formerly  took  a  genitive, 

may  now  take  an  accusative,  more  commonly  that  of  a 

pronoun : 

I  have  had  enough  of  it  3d)  bin  e8  (originally  a  genitive) 

(art 
I  am  contented  with  it  3d)  bin  e8  gufrteben 

I  am  tired  of  this  work  3d)  bin  btefe  Arbeit  miibe 

79.  1.  The  accusative  is  used  to  denote  measure  : 

The  piece  of  steel  was  one  foot      3>a§  ©tiicf  @tat)l  {see  59,  6)  mar 
and  six  inches  long  and  one  einen  ^n6  unb  fed)8  5°^  (see  55) 

inch  thick  lang  unb  einen  3°H  Met 


44  ACCUSATIVE. 

The  ticket  cost  one  thaler  2)a8  billet  foftete  einen  Scaler 

That  fellow  is  not  worth  2)er  $erl  ift  feinen  ©djug  ^ufocr 
powder  and  shot  tnert 

2.  Similarly  the  accusative  is  often  used  after  verbs  of 
motion  to  denote  the  distance  or  the  extent  of  the  motion, 
or  the  way,  particularly  when  the  verb  is  qualified  by  one 
of  the  adverbs  batjer,  batjin,  enttang  along,  Ijerab,  fytnab 
down,  I)craufr  Ijinauf  up,  fjerunter,  Jjhuinter  down,  rjtnburclj 
through  (130—134) : 

He  had  to  ride  five  miles  be-  (Sr  mufete  fiinf  3fteiieu  reiteit,  el)e  er 

fore  he  met  any  one  irgenb  jemanbem  begegnete 

We  marched  along  a  tedious  Sir  $ogen  ettte  langttetltge  (Strafie 

road  bafyin 

The   stone   rolled   down  the  £)er  ©tern  rollte  ben  33erg  fyinab 

mountain 

He  could  hardly  ascend  the  (Sr  fonitte  faum  Me  Xxtppe  fytnauf* 

stairs  ftetgen 

a.  Sometimes,  a  verb  of  motion  may  be  understood, 

without  being  expressed : 

Along  the  road  we  noticed  2>en  2Beg  enttang  bemerften  unr 
many  signs  of  the  enemy's  t»iete  $ln$etd)en  t>on  ber  glud)t  be$ 
flight  getnbeS 

80.  1.  While  more  or  less  indefinite  time  may  be  ex- 
pressed by  the  genitive  (see  60),  definite  time  is  generally 
expressed  by  the  accusative ;  instead  of  the  accusative,  a 
suitable  preposition  may  often  be  used : 

He  was   at    my   house    this      2)tefen  Sftorgen  (or  fyeute  Sftorgenj 

morning  Wax  er  bei  nttr 

I  shall  go  to  Berlin  next  week,  9Md)fte  2Sod)e,  ben  erften  SJccirg  (or 
the  first  of  March  am  erften  9)?ar$)    gefye   id)  nad) 

Berlin 
Cambridge,  October  21, 1891  (£ambrtbge,  ben  21.  (pronounce  tin* 

unb^nangtgften)    October    1891  ; 
see  59,  6 


TRANSITIVES   AND   INTRANSITIVES.  45 

2.  Duration  of  time  is  also  expressed  by  the  accus- 
ative (see  166,  I,  6) : 

He  slept  the  whole  night  dx  fd)Uef  bte  ganje  9?atf)t 

We  were  on  the  ocean  for  five      2Bir   roaren   fitnf  2Bod)cn  cmf  ber 
weeks  ©ee 

a.  Such  an  accusative  is  often  re-enforced  by  an  adverb 

following  it : 

He  had  eaten  nothing  for  three      (5r  Ijatte  brei  £age  lemg  {or  fjinbuvcf)) 
days  md)t8  gegeffen 

81.  The  accusative  is  sometimes  used  absolutely, 
when  qualified  by  a  past  participle  or  by  an  adverbial 
phrase : 

He  entered  the  room  with  his      2)ctt  §ut  in  ber  §anb  trat  er  tn8 

hat  in  his  hand  gimmer 

At  the  table  sat  a  man,  his      %m  £tfcf)e  fag  ein  SJcantt,  ben  $opf 
head  resting  on  his  hands  in  bie  §finbe  geftufct 


IDerbs, 


f 


82.  A  verb  must  agree  in  person  and  number  with  its 
logical  subject : 

Three  persons  are  standing  in  2)rei   ^erfonen   ftcfyen   t)or   eurem 

front  of  your  house  §aufe 

There  are  three  persons  stand-  (£$  fteljen  (see  192,  3)  brei  ^erfonen 

ing  in  front  of  your  house  Dor  eurem  §au[e 

a.  If  the  subject  is  a  collective  noun,  the  same  rules 
should  be  observed  that  apply  to  pronouns.     See  26. 

TRANSITIVES  AND  INTRANSITIVES. 

83.  The  German,  unlike  the  English,  has  only  very 
few  verbs  which  may  be  used  both  transitively  and  in- 
transitively, e.  g.,  brenneu  burn;  as  a  rule,  the  two  classes 


46  IMPERSONALS. 

must  be  carefully  kept  apart :  to  watch,  as  an  intransitive 
verb,  is  umdjen,  as  a  transitive,  betoadjen. 

a.  The  most  important  verbs  that  are  intransitive  in 
German  and  correspond  in  meaning  to  English  transitives 
are  given  in  65. 

b.  An  English  intransitive  verb  which  has  no  precise 
intransitive  equivalent  in  German,  should  be  rendered  by 
the  reflexive: 

He  turned  round  dx  buefyte  ftdj  urn 

c.  The  prefix  6e-  may  be  prefixed  to  many  intransitive 
and  some  reflexive  verbs  to  take  the  place  of  a  preposition 
like  auf,  ii6er,  on,  upon,  about,  etc.,  and  thus  change  an  in- 
transitive into  a  transitive:  ffagen  moan,  beflagen  bemoan; 
fdjretben  write,  6efc£)rei6en  write  on  or  about,  describe;  fid) 
ttmubern  wonder,  6ettmnbent  (wonder  at),  admire. 

IMPERSONALS. 

84.  A  verb  having  for  its  subject  the  indefinite  e3 
(29,  2)  is  called  an  impersonal  verb.  Some  verbs,  by 
virtue  of  their  meanings,  are  more  commonly  used  as  im- 
personate ;  others  may  be  used  as  personals  or  impersonals ; 
others,  again,  are  ordinarily  personal. 

1.  The  verbs  expressing  the  most  common  phenomena 

of  nature  are  generally  impersonal:    it  rains  e3  regnet; 

similarly : 

blifeen  lighten  fdjneteu  snow 

bonnern  thunder  ftiirmen  storm 

tjagetn  hail  nieljen  blow 

2.  A  number  of  words  admit  of  a  personal  or  im- 
personal construction  without  material  difference  in  mean- 


IMPERSONALS.  47 

ing;  in  the  impersonal  construction,  however,  the  indefinite 
q$  is  generally  omitted  when  any  other  element  of  the 
sentence  precedes  the  verb : 

He  was  hungry  ((£r  mar  fjungrig,  or)  er  fyungerte,  or 

e8  fyungerte  it)n,  or  itjn  Ijungerte 

I  dreamed  last  night  that  he  3d)  traumte  le£te  9tad)t,  baft  er  tot 
was  dead  fei,  or  e8  traumte  mir  tc,  or  mir 

traumte  jc 

a.  Some  of  these  verbs,  when  used  as  impersonals,  take 

an  accusative  as  an  object : 

I  am  hungry  (58  fjungert  mid);  see  above 

I  am  thirsty  (58  biirftet  mid) 

I  am  cold  (58  frier t  mid) 

I  grieve  (58  jammert  mid) 

I  long  for  (58  geliiftet  mid)  {with  gen.  or  with 

nad)  and  dat.) 

b.  Others  take  a  dative  : 

I  am  afraid  of  him  (58  graut  mir  Dor  ifmt;  {rejieonvely ■, 

id)  graue  mid)  t»or  ifym) 

3.  The  indefinite  e3  may  be  used  to  express  the  un- 
known subject  of  any  verb : 

Something  rustled  among  the      (58  rafijctte  in  ben  trocfenen  331at* 

dry  leaves,  or  there  was  a  tern 

rustling  etc. 
There  is  a  knock,  or  somebody      ($8  flopft 

is  knocking 

In  this  case,  e£  must  be  retained  when  some  other 
element  of  the  sentence  precedes  the  verb  : 
Suddenly  there  was  a  knock         sJ$loyid)  ffopfte  e8 

4.  Of  intransitive  verbs  (including  transitive  verbs  used 
like  intransitives,  without  a  direct  object)  an  impersonal 
passive  may  be  formed,  expressing,  without  reference  to 
an  agent,  that  a  certain  act  is  performed : 


48  AUXILIARIES. 

There  was   playing   and  dan-       (§8  ttmrbe  gefpielt  unb  gefwtgen 

cing 
There  was  much  laughter  (S3  nntrbe  Die!  gefadjt 

Much  assistance  was  rendered      (§8  nntrbe  il)m  Diet  gefyolfen 

[to]  him 

a.  When  any  other  element  of  the  sentence  precedes 

the  verb,  e3  must  be  omitted : 

Smoking  is  not  permitted  in      (§8  barf  in  biefem  3intmer  ntd)t  Qe* 
this  room  raud)t  toerben,  or  in  biejem  j&ixa* 

mer  barf  nid)t  geraudjt   tnerben 
(See  29,  1  d) 

AUXILIARIES. 

85.  The  verb  t£)Uit  do  should  not  be  used  as  an 
auxiliary,  nor,  unless  accompanied  by  an  object,  as  a 
substitute  for  the  principal  verb : 

Do  you  sing?    No,  I  do  not  ©tngen@ie?    -ftetn,  id)  ftnge  ntdjt 

I  finished  my  work  this  morn-  3d)  tjabe  tjeuteSftorgen  meine  Arbeit 

ing;  did  you,  too?     Yes,  I  ooEcubet;  tjabcn  ©ie  e§  (see  29, 

did  1  d)  aud)  getfyan?    3a,  id)  autf) 

86.  The  auxiliaries  fjctben,  fein  and  toerbett  are  not  used 
in  answers  to  questions  or  in  emphatic  affirmations,  with- 
out the  important  object,  predicate  or  adverb  previously 
expressed  or  a  word  representing  them : 

Did  you  not  have  a  copy  of  fatten  ©ie  nidjt  em  (Sremplar  Don 

Goethe's    Faust   with    you?  ©oetlje'S  gcmft  bei  fidj?    3a,  id) 

Yes,  I  did  Ijatte  eing 

Were   you   in  Paris   at   that  SSaren    ©ic    bamalS    in   *Pari$? 

time?    No,  I  was  not  Sftein,  id)  mar  nid)t  ba 

He  claims  that  I  have  not  paid  (Sr  bcfjcmptet,  bag  id)  bicje  SRedjnung 

this  bill,  but  I  have  nod)  ntdjt  bejafyft  l)abe ;  id)  tjabz 

e3  aber  bod)  getfyan 


* 


FUTURE    AND   CONDITIONAL.  49 

PERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT. 

87.  1.  The  perfect  and  pluperfect  tenses  are  formed  by- 
means  of  the  auxiliary  t)aben,  as  in  English  by  means  of 
have : 

I  have  read  your  letter  3d)  fjabe  31jren  SBrtef  gelefen 

It  had  snowed  <S8  fjatte  gefdjneit 

2.  But  intransitive  verbs,  expressing  motion  from  one 
place  to  another,  or  transition  from  one  condition  to 
another,  usually  take  fctn  as  auxiliary,  instead  of  fjabert : 

He  has  arrived,  landed,  depart-  (§r  ift  angefommen,  gelanbet,  abge» 

ed,  died  retft,  geftorben 

He  has  slept  (Sr  fyat  gefdjlafen 

But 

He  has  fallen  asleep  (§r  ift  eittflejdjlafen 

a.  Here  belongs  also  gclingen  turn  out  as  desired,  usually 
translated  by  means  of  succeed  : 

The  attempt  was  successful  2)er  SBerfud)  gelang 

I  have  succeeded  in  it  (§3  ift  mir  gelungen 

The  prisoner  had  succeeded  in  (£§  mar  bent  ©efangenen  gelungen 
opening  the  door  bie  £f)iir  311  offnen;  see  128,  3  b. 

Also  mtgftngeti : 

He  has  failed  in  the  attempt  Xer  SBerfudj  ift  il)m  migtungen 

3.  ©ctll  be  and  btctbcit  remain  also  take  fetit  as  auxiliary, 

instead  of  (jabcn : 

I  have  already  been  there  3d)  bin  fdjon  bagetuefen 

He  had  remained  at  home  (Sr  mar  311  $au%  gebltebeu  t 

f 

FUTURE   AND    CONDITIONAL.  ' 

88.  Never  express  the  pure  future  or  conditional  by 
foUen  or  toolkit;  see  104  and  105, 


50  FUTURE    AND    CONDITIONAL. 

89.  1.  The  future  is  expressed  by  the  present  of  tuerben 

and  the  present  infinitive : 

I  shall  come  3d)  roerbe  fommen 

He  will  come  (§r  nrirb  fommen 

He  will  be  sent  away  (Sr  miib  meggefdjicft  merben 

a.  In  indirect  discourse  (see  114-115)  the  conditional 
(see  90, 1)  may  be  used,  instead  of  the  future  subjunctive : 

He  said  that  he  would  write      (£r  fagte,  bafe  er  oft  jdjretben  roerbe, 

often  or  nriirbe 

I  was  told  my  request  would      Sftan  fagte  mir,  meine  23ttte  roerbe 

be  refused  {or  umrbe)  mir  abgefdjtagen  roer- 

ben 

2.  The  future  perfect  is  expressed  by  the  same  forms  of 

tuerben  and  the  perfect  infinitive : 

He  will  then  have  finished  his      3>ann  nrirb  er  feine  Arbeit  beenbet 
work  fyaben 

a.  In  indirect  discourse  (see  114-115)  the  conditional 
perfect  (see  90,  2)  may  be  used,  instead  of  the  future  per- 
fect subjunctive : 

He  wrote  that,by  next  Monday,      (Sr  fdjrieb,  baft  er  ba§  23nd)  am  nad) 
he  would  have  read  the  book  ften  Sftontag  burdjgetefen  tjaben 

through  roevbe,  or  roiirbe 

90.  1.  The  conditional  is  expressed  by  the  preterit 
subjunctive  of  uierbcn  and  the  infinitive : 

He  would  go  with  us,  if  he  (5r  nriirbe  nut  uu8  gefyen,  menn  er 

could  fonnte 

He  would  be  sent  away,  if  he  (§r  roiirbe  fortgefd)icft  roerben,  tnemt 

did  it  again  er  e8  nrieber  t^dte 

a.  Instead  of  the  conditional,  the  preterit  subjunctive 

may  be  used  (see  117,  2) : 

(§r  gtnge  mit  mtS,  instead  oftx  nriirbe  mit  nn«  gefyen 

(£r  nmrbe  fortgefd)icft,  instead  of  er  nriirbe  fortgefdjicft  rcerben 


PASSIVE.  51 

2.  The  conditional  perfect  is  expressed  by  the  same 
forms  of  ftetbett  and  the  perfect  infinitive: 

He  would  have  done  it  if  he  G?r  roiirbe  e«  getfjan  Ijaben,  roenn  er 

had  been  able  e«  gefonnt  t)citte 

He  would  have  been  sent  away  (Sr  roiirbe  fortge)d)tcft  toorben  fetn, 

if  he  had  done  it  again  tuenn  er  e8  uneber  getljan  Ijatte 

a.  Instead  of  the   conditional  perfect,  the   pluperfect 

subjunctive  may  be  used  (see  117,  2) : 

(£x  fjtitte  e$  getfjan,  instead  o/ev  roiirbe  c«  getljan  Ijaben 

(Sr  mare  fortgefdjtcft  roorben,  instead  of  er  nriirbe  fortgefdjicft  roorben  fein 

PASSIVE. 

91.  The  passive  is  formed  by  means  of  the  auxiliary 
ttjerbcn  and  the  past  participle  of  the  principal  verb.  The 
auxiliary  should  stand  in  the  same  tense  in  which  the 
principal  verb  would  stand  in  the  active  voice ;  in  doubtful 
cases  it  is  well,  therefore,  to  change  the  construction  into 
the  active,  to  ascertain  what  tense  should  be  used.     Thus  : 

Active.  Passive. 

Present. 
He  builds  the  house  The  house  is  [being]  built  by  him 

(Sr  baut  ba%  §au«  2)a8  §au3  roirb  toon  itjm  gebaut 

Preterit. 
He  built  the  house  The  house  was  [being]  built  by  him 

(§r  baute  ba$  §au3  2)a8  §aug  rourbe  oon  if)m  gebaut 

Perfect. 
He  has  built  the  house    .  The  house  has  been  built  by  him 

(Sr  fyat  ba$  $au%  gebaut  $a«  §au8  ift  toon  if)tn   gebaut 

roorben 
Pluperfect. 
He  had  built  the  house  The  house  had  been  built  by  him 

(§r  batte  ba&  §au3  gebaut  2>a8  $au%  mar  Don  ifym  gebaut 

roorben 
Future. 
He  will  build  the  house  The  house  will  be  built  by  him 

(£r  roirb  ba8  §au§  bauen  2)a8  $au&  roirb  oon  U)m  gebaut 

roerben 


52  PASSIVE. 

Future  Perfect. 
He  will  have  built  the  house  The  house  will  have  been  built  by 

him 
(Srnrirbba8£an§  gebaut  Ijaben      2)a§  §au8  roirb  oott  ifjm  gebaut 

luorbeit  (etn 

a.  Notice  that  the  forms  is  being  built,  was  being  built, 
etc.,  are  to  be  rendered  by  the  simple  passive :  tturb  gebaut, 
umrbe  gebaut,  etc. ;  see  124,  3  b. 

92.  As  the  meaning  of  Herbert  is  to  become,  the  above 
forms  of  the  passive  can  only  be  used  when  a  becoming 
or,  in  other  words,  a  change  in  condition,  an  occurrence,  is 
to  be  expressed.  Whenever  not  so  much  the  change  in 
condition,  but  rather  the  new  condition  itself  is  to  be 
emphasized,  either  as  resulting  from  the  change  or,  for  its 
own  sake,  as  a  permanent  condition,  then  the  auxiliary 
feirt  should  be  used,  as  in  English  to  be : 

Occurrence.  Condition. 

Fishes  are  caught  in  nets  or      He  is  caught  (i.  e.,  he  has  been 

with  hooks  caught) 

gtfdje  roerben  in  cJ?e§en  ober  nut      <£v  ift  gefangen 

2Ittge(f)afeu  gefangen 

The  fire  was  extinguished  by  When  the  engine  arrived,  the  fire 

the  occupants  of  the  house  was  already  extinguished 

£)a§  geuer  nmrbe  Don  ben  23e*  2U§  bte  generfpri^e  anfam,  mar  \>a% 

rooljuern  be8  §aufe§  getofdjt  gener  fdjon  gelbfdjt 

When  we  reached  the  ship,  the  When  we  reached  the  ship,  the 

sails    were    hoisted  (=  the  sails  were  already  hoisted 
sailors  hoisted  the  sails) 

2U8  ttrir  ba$   @djiff   erretdjten,  2U8  onr  ba%  ©djiff  erretdjten,  toaren 

rourben  bie  @egel  aufge^ogen  bte  ®egel  fdjon  aufgejogen 

She  was  received  by  her  maid-      She  was  beautiful  and  was  dressed 
ens  and  dressed  in  magni-  like  a  queen 

ficent  garments 


PASSIVE.  53 

©ie  rourbe  oon  iljren  3>ungfranen      ©ie  roar  fd)5n  unb  mar  nrie  eine 
empfangen   unb   in   prad)tige         $onigin  gefleibet 
©eintinber  gefleibet 

The  bridge  will  be  blown  up  Before  you  can  prevent  it,   the 

to-morrow  bridge  will  be  blown  up 

2ftorgen  nrirb  Me  33rucfe  geforengt  (Stye  <Sie  e8  uedjtnbern  fonnen,  nrirb 

toerben  bie  SBriitfe  getyrengt  fein 

93.  Do  not  use  the  passive  unless  you  wish  to 
emphasize  the  object  as  acted  upon,  rather  than  the  agent 
as  acting : 

Luther  translated    the   Bible  gutter  uberfe^te  bie  SBibet  in§  3)eut* 

into  German  so  that  it  could  jcfye,  jo  baft  ba$  gange  SBotf   fie 

be  read  by  the  whole  people  lefen  fonnte  unb  nid)t   nur   bie 

and  not  only  by  the  clergy  ©eifUid)feit 

The  active  voice  should  be  used  here,  because  the  people  are  evidently 
thought  of  as  readers  of  the  Bible,  rather  than  the  Bible,  for  its  own  sake, 
as  being  read  ;  but : 

The  general  was  killed  by  a  S)er  ©eneral  rourbe  Don  einer  $a* 
cannon  ball  nonenfugel  getotet 

a.  When  only  the  act,  but  not  the  agent  is  to  be 
emphasized,  the  impersonal  passive  may  be  used ;  see  84,  4. 

94.  The  English  passive  may  often  be  rendered  by  the 

indefinite  pronoun  man  and  the  active: 

It  is  thought  Tlan  glauot 

The  books  were  shown  to  him       &ie  53iid)er  rcnrben  il)m  gegeigt,  or 

man  geigte  iljm  bie  33iid)er 

a.  This  should  always  be  done  when  an  infinitive  pre- 
ceded by  to  is  dependent  on  a  passive  verb,  and  it  may 
then  be  necessary  to  substitute  a  subordinate  clause  for 
the  infinitive : 

He  was  heard  to  exclaim  SERan  fyorte  Urn  auSrufen 

He  was  seen  to  fall  to  the  Sftan  fab,  ifyn  gu  33oben  fatten,  or  man 
ground  faf),  nrie  er  gu  SBoben  pel. 


54  MODAL    AUXILIARIES. 

He  was  thought  to  be  insane  Sftcm  gtcmbte,  bag  er    ttmfynftnttig 

fei;  see  122 

95.  Sometimes  an  intransitive  verb  may  be  used  to 
translate  the  English  passive  when  no  agent  is  men- 
tioned : 

Seven  horses  were  burnt  ©teben  ^Sferbe  oerbrannten 

MODAL    AUXILIARIES. 

96.  The  German  modal  auxiliaries  biirfeu  be  allowed  to 
(dare),  f ontten  be  able  to  (can),  mogcn  like  to  (may),  muffen  be 
compelled  to  (must),  follen  be  obliged  to  (shall),  tootlen  wish 
to  (will)  are  much  more  extensively  used  than  the  English 
can,  may,  etb.,  because  they  have  infinitives  and  parti- 
ciples, and  can,  therefore,  form  compound  tenses,  while 
their  English  equivalents  are  defective  to  that  extent : 

I  can  read  3d)  famt  lefen 

I  have  been  able  to  read  3d)  fyctbe  lefen  Ibnnen 

I  shall  be  able  to  read  3dj  tnerbe  lefen  fonnen,  etc. 

(See  119,  2  b.) 

97.  The  modal  auxiliaries  may  be  used  as  independent 

verbs  with  neuter  pronouns  as  objects : 

He  is  not  allowed  to  do  that  (Sr  barf  ba§  nid)t  tfyuit 

She  will  be  compelled  to  do  it        @ie  ttnrb  e§  tlnin  muffen 

Or  with  adverbs  of  place,  when  a  verb  of  motion  is 
understood  (see  135). 

He  cannot  get  out  (§r  fann  nid)t  IjerauS 

And  fonnen,  mogeu  and  tooKen,  when  used  in  certain 
senses,  may  take  nouns  or  pronouns  as  objects ;  see  101,  5, 
102,  2,  105,  4. 

98.  When  a  modal  auxiliary  in  the  perfect  or  plu- 
perfect is  accompanied  by  an  infinitive,  its  past  participle 
assumes  the  form  of  an  infinitive : 


MODAL   AUXILIARIES.  55 

He  has  wanted  it  (5r  fjat  e8  getooflt 

He  has  wanted  to  do  it  dx  l)at  e8  tfytm  rooHen 

She  has  been  compelled  to  do  it      @ie  t)at  e$  tluxn  muff  en 

a.  The  same  is  true  of  fjetfccn  command,  Ijelfen  Mp, 
l)5ren  hear,  laffen  Ze/,  cawse,  fefyen  see;  see  119,  3: 

He  has  helped  me  to  carry  out      (§r  f)at  mir  meinen  $tan  auSftitjrcn 

my  plan  fjetfen 

I  have  heard  her  sing  3d)  l)abe  fte  ftngen  t)5ren 

We  have  let  him  depart  SSir    Ijaben    if)n    abreifen    laffen; 

see  120 

99.  The  possession  of  a  past  participjp  enables  the 
German  modal  auxiliaries  to  form  pluperfects  and  pluper- 
fect subjectives : 

He  had  been  able  to  come  (Sr  Ijatte  fommen  fonnen 

He  would  have  been  able  to      (5r  fydtte  fommen  fonnen 

come,  for   which    the   more 

common  he  could  have  come 
He  should  (or  ought  to)  have      G?r  fycitte  fommen  fotten 

come 

100.  $iirfctt.  1.  Stirfen  means  now  be  allowed  to, 
have  a  right  to ;  dare  should  be  translated  by  ftmgen  (see 
119,4):   * 

All   students   are    allowed   to      Me  <2>tubenten  biirfen  bie  33ibftotf)ef 

make  use  of  the  library  benu^en 

The  citizens  did  not  dare  refuse      £>ie  S31trger  roagten  e3    (29,   Id) 
the  general's  demands  nid)t,  bie  f^orberungen  be8  ©ene* 

rats  abmfdjlagen 

2.  Hence  biirfen  should  be  used  to  express  may,  when 
used  in  the  sense  of  be  allowed  to,  have  a  right  to: 

The  doctor  said  I  might  walk      3)er  3)oftor  fagte,  id)  biirfte  eine 
for  half  an  hour  fydbe  @tunbe  fpajieren  gefyen 

3.  It  should  be  used  for  muff  en,  when  must  not  is 
equivalent  to  be  not  allowed  to,  ought  not  to : 


56  MODAL   AUXILIARIES. 

I  must  not  go  out  after  dark  3d)   barf    nad)    ©onnemmtergang 

ntd)t  auggefjen 

4.  It  may  be  used,  particularly  in  the  preterit  sub- 
junctive (see  117),  to  make  a  cautious  statement : 

You  are  right,  I  dare  say  <B\e  biirften  tool)!  $ed)t  fyaben 

5.  SSagen  biirfen  is  not  an  uncommon  pleonasm  : 

May  I  [venture  to]  offer. you      2)cirf  id)  eg  toagen,  Sljnen  mcinc 
my  company  ?  23eglettung  onjubieten? 

101.     $iittttett.     1.  Gormen  corresponds  to  the  English 

can : 

He  cannot  read  nor  write  (Sr  fcttm  tt»eber  tefcrt  nod)  fdjretben 

He  could  not  be  present  (§r  fonnte  nid)t  cuiroefenb  jeiu 

2.  Ordinarily,  also  be  able  to  should  be  rendered  by 
fonnen ;  the  circumlocutions  fal)tg  fctn,  im  @tanbe  fetit 
should  be  reserved  for  occasions  where  they  are  needed 
for  the  sake  of  variety: 

He  has  been  unable  to  get  per-  (gr   licit   feme   (Srtctubnig    erfyatten 

mission  fonnen 

She  will  be  unable  to  leave  the  €ne  ttnrb  fed)8  Sodden    tang  ba% 

house  for  six  weeks  £au§  nid)t  oevlafjen  fonnen 

3.  Stomtcn  is  used  to  express  an  absolute  possibility  : 
He  could  come  if  he  would  (§r  fonnte  fommeit  mean  er  rooflte 

a.  To  express  a  possibility  as  conceded  by  the  writer  or 

speaker,  either  fonnen  or  mogen  may  be  used,  the  former 

being  perhaps  more  common  in  the  ordinary  language, 

especially  in  the  present  tense: 

He  may  come  at  three  o'clock  ($r  fann  nm  brei  Ul)r  ober  urn  fteben 

or  at  seven  o'clock  Ufjv  fomuien 

You  may  be  right  2)n  fannft  {or  magft)  $edjt  fjaben 

It  might  embarrass  her  (gg  fonnte  fte  in  ^Berlegenljett  brlngen 


MODAL     AUXILIARIES.  57 

4.  Sonnen  is  used,  even  more  often  than  the  English 
can,  in  the  sense  of  be  allowed  to,  may : 

You  can  go  now  ©ic  fonnen  jefct  gefyen 

5.  In  the  spoken  language,  fonnen  is  often  used  in  the 
sense  of  know,  in  speaking  of  a  science  or  a  language  : 

He  knows  French  very  well  (5r  Fcmit  fefyr  gut  grangofifdj 

6.  Sonnen  should  never  be  confounded  with  fennen 
know.  As  between  fennen  and  ttnffen,  both  meaning  know, 
it  may  be  said  that  id  iff  en  is  used  more  particularly  of 
facts,  fennen  of  persons  and  things,  so  that  the  latter 
may  be  said  to  be  synonymous  with  be  acquainted  with : 

I  know  him  well  3d)  fenne  tfyu  gut 

I  know  who  he  is  3d)  roetfe,  roer  er  ift 

*   I  know  his  house  (i  e.,  I  know      3d)  roeig  fetn  §ctu8 

where  he  lives) 
I  know  his  house  (i.  e.,  I  have      3d)  fenne  fetn  §au8 

been  in  it  and  know  how  it 

is  arranged,  etc.) 

102.  SRogen,  1.  SDWgett  may  be  used  to  express  a 
possibility  as  conceded  by  the  writer  or  speaker ;  in  this 
sense  it  interchanges  with  fonnen  ;  see  101,  3  a. 

2.  It  may  be  used,  as  a  transitive  verb,  in  the  sense  of 

like  and,  with  an  infinitive,  in  the  sense  of  like  to,  care  to : 

She  did  not  like  him  @ie  mod)te  ifui  nid)t 

I  do  not  care  to  see  him  now  34  mag  iljn  jefct  uidjt  fel)en 

He  did  not  like  to  ride  with* us,  (§r  modjte  md)t  tnit  un8  reiten,  tneit 

because  his  horse  was  some-  fetu  s#ferb  etttmS  fafym  toav 

what  lame 

a.  In  this  sense,  mogen  is  often  strengthened  by  gern 
(see  186,  1  a),  especially  in  the  preterit  subjunctive  used 
with  the  force  of  a  conditional  (see  117,  2) : 


58  MODAL    AUXILIARIES. 

I  should  like  to  spend  a  year      3cf)  mbd)te  gem  ein  3al)r  in  3nbten 
in  India  nibringen 

3.  The  subjunctive  of  tnogen  is  used  in  independent 
optative  sentences ;  see  112,  2  and  3. 

4.  In  dependent  clauses,  the  use  of  mogen  is  much  more 
restricted  than  that  of  may  in  English,  the  subjunctive  of 
the  principal  verb  being  ordinarily  used  to  convey  the 
same  meaning,  while  in  some  cases  even  the  indicative 
may  be  used : 

I  hope  you  may  find  your  fam-  3d)  fjoffe,  ©ie  toerben  3l)re  gamilie 

ily  well  gefunb  antreffen 

I  fear  that  he  may  have  mis-  3d)  fiirdjte,  baft  er  meine  Sttbfuijt 

understood  my  intention  mifperftanbeit  tjabe,  or  fyat 

I  repeated  the  explanation  in  3d)  ttneberfyotte  bie  (Srflarung,  ba* 

order  that  everybody  might  mit  jebermamt  biefelbe  genau  oer* 

clearly  understand  it  ftiinbe,  or  t)crftel)cn  mod)te 

He  always  feared   lest  some  Q?r  fitrdjtete   immer,    bag   jemanb 

one  should  inquire  into  his  Jetner  ©efd)td)te  nad)forfd)e 
history 

103.     1.  Stiffen.     Must  should  be  rendered  by  miiffen  : 
All  men  must  die  2ttle  Sftenfdjen  miiffen  fterben 

You  must  excuse  me  ©te  miiffen  mid)  entfcfyutbtgen 

2.  Be  compelled  to,  be  forced  to,  be  obliged  to  may  also, 
in  most  cases,  be  rendered  by  miiffen : 

I  was  compelled  to  use  vio-  3d)  muftte  ©eroatt  gebraudjen 

lence 

Napoleon  had  been  forced  to  9?afcoleon    Ijatte     fid)    $urii(f$ief)eu 

retreat  miiffen 

a.  Of  course,  ge^xmngen  toerbcn  (or  fein,  see  92)  be  com- 
pelled, may  also  be  used,  and  it  should  be  used  when  the 
agent  is  expressed : 

The  stranger  was  compelled  by      2)er  ftrembe  nmrbe  toon  ben  $8iir» 
the  citizens  to  leave  the  town  geru  ge^uungen,  bie  @tabt  fogleid) 

at  once  gu  tjerlaffen 


MODAL    AUXILIARIES.  59 

3.  Have  to  may  be  translated  literally,  but  it  will  often 
be  better  to  use  miiffen  : 

His  father  had  to  pay  the  bill        ©ein  SBater  tjatte  bie  Sftecfymmg  gu 

begatjten,  or  muftte  bie  SRedjnung 
be$al)(en 

4.  When  miiffen  is  accompanied  by  a  negative,  it  usu- 
ally  means  not  be  compelled  to  ;  must  not  in  the  sense  of 
be  not  allowed  to,  ought  not  to,  should,  as  a  rule,  be  ren- 
dered by  biirfen ;  see  100,  3. 

104.  Solicit.  1.  ©often  should  never  be  used  to  ex- 
press the  pure  future  or  conditional ;  see  88-90. 

2.  Otherwise ;  the  forms  of  shall  should  be  rendered  by 

those  of  foflen : 

Thou  shalt  not  kill  £>u  foHft  ntd)t  toten 

He  should  go  to  Karlsbad  dx  folltc  ttad)  ftarlSbab  gefjett 

You  should  have  come  sooner        2)u   Ijatteft   friifyer  fommen  foflen, 

see  99 

3.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  of  fatten  should  be  used 
for  ought  to  with  a  present  infinitive,  and  the  pluperfect 
subjunctive  for  ought  to  witha  perfect  infinitive : 

He  ought  to  stay  at  home  and  (gr  fottte  gu  §aufe  bleiben  unb  ftu* 

study  bieren 

You  ought  to  have  paid  him  2)u  fwtteft  ifyn  foglcicf)  begafyten  fot» 

at  once  ten,  see  99 

4.  ©otten  should  be  used  to  translate  the  forms  of  to  be 
when  followed  by  an  infinitive  with  to,  unless  pure  futu- 
rity is  to  be  expressed : 

I  am  to  receive  ten  thousand  3d)  jofl  getjn  temfenb  Tlaxt  has  3al)v 

marks  a  year  erfjalten 

The  ship  was  to  sail  to-day,  $5a8  @cf)tff   jollte  fyeute  abfafyren, 

but  the  captain  has  fallen  aber  ber  ^apitan  tft  fefyr  franf 

very  sick  geroorben 


60  TENSES. 

5.  The  present  tense  of  foUen  may  be  used,  when  no 
misunderstanding  can  arise,  in  the  sense  of  he  said  to : 

The  Czar  is  said  to  contemplate  2)er  (£gar  foil  eine  Sftetfe  nad)  tyaxiS 

a  journey  to  Paris  beabftd)*ttgen 

Dr.  Faust  is  said  to  have  lived  Dr.    gauft   foil    in    (Srfurt    gelebt 

in  Erfurt  tyaben 

105.  SBoffeit.  1-  SSoIIcn  should  never  be  used  to  ex- 
press the  pure  future  of  conditional ;  see  88-90. 

2.  Nor  should  tooHen  ever  be  used,  like  the  English 

would,  in  the  sense  of  was  (or  were)  wont  to : 

Every  evening  she  would  sit      3eben  $benb  fag  fte  am  lifer  mtb 
on  the  shore  and  gaze  upon         faf)  auf8  Sfteer  fyinaug 
the  ocean 

3.  It  is  used  in  the  sense  of  he  willing  to,  desire  to,  wish 
to,  want  to  : 

The  doctor  would  not  {L  e.,was  S)ev?lqt  iDolIte  Don  ber  armen  grau 

not  willing  to)  accept  any  feine  23e$af)Uuig  anneljmen 
pay  from  the  poor  woman 

I  wanted  to  come,  but  I  could  3d)  tuollte  fommen,  aber  id)  fonntc 

not  nidjt 

a.   In  the  sense  of  desire  t%  gem  is  often  added  to  tool* 

len  (see  186,  1  a) : 

He   desired    to    complete   his      (Sr  ttottte  feine  ©tubien  gem  be* 
studies  enben 

4.  SSoHen  is  also  used,  as  a  transitive  verb,  in  the  sense 
of  desire,  want  to  have  : 

The  child  wanted  the  moon  2)a8  $inb  rootlte  ben  9ftonb  [fyaben] 

TENSES. 

106.  1.  The  present  tense  is  used,  for  the  English  per- 
fect, to  express  an  action  or  condition  which  began  in  the 
past  and  still  continues  at  the  present  time  : 


TENSES.  61 

I  have  been  working  on  this      3d)  arbeite  fdjon  brei  3afjre  an  Me* 
book  for  three  years  fern  33ud)e 

2.  Similarly,  the  preterit  is  used,  for  the  English  pluper- 
fect, to  express  an  action  or  condition  which,  having  com- 
menced previous  to  a  specified  time  in  the  past,  still  con- 
tinued at  that  time : 

I  had  been  in  Paris  for  three      3d)  mar  fctt  brei  Sftonaten  in  $art«, 
months/ when  the  war  broke         aU  ber  $rieg  au§brac^ 
out 

107.  1.  As  in  English,  the  present  tense  is  often  used, 

for  the  preterit,  in  lively  narration  : 

Without  a  moment's  hesitation  Ol)ne  etnen  5utgenblicf  gu  g'ogern, 

he   rushes  through   smoke  eitt  er  burd)  9?aud)  unb  gfammen 

and  flames  up  the  narrow  bie  enge  £reppe  l)iuauf,  britf)t  bie 

stairs,  bursts  open  the  door,  Xl)iiv  auf,  ergretft  ba§$tub,  mid* 

seizes  the  child,  wraps  it  in  a  elt  e§  in  eine  SBettbecfe,  tragt  e8 

blanket,  carries  it  down  the  auf  bemfelben  gefal)r(id)en  SSege 

same  dangerous  path,   and  fyinunter  unb  itbergibt  e8  feiner 

hands  it  to  his  mother,  who  t>or  greube  ftummeu  Gutter 
is  speechless  with  joy 

2.  It  is  also  used  in  giving  a  brief  account  of  a  story,  a 

poem,  or  a  drama ;  and,  in  that  case,  it  is  of  importance 

to  be  consistent  and  not  fall  into  the  use  of  the  preterit 

after  the  present  has  once  been  used : 

In  the  second   scene,  Arkas,  3u   ber    gtueiteu    ©cene    erfdjeint 

the  king's  messenger,  appears  $rfa8,  ber  23ote  be*  $ontg§,  unb 

and  announces  to  the  priest-  melbet  ber  ^rieftertn  ba%  £eran= 

ess  the  approach  of  Thoas  nafyen  beS  £l)oa3  (see  3  b)  unb 

and  his  army  fetneS  £eere8 

108.  The  present  tense,  more  frequently  than  in  Eng- 
lish, is  used  instead  of  the  future,  provided  that  no  mis- 
understanding can  arise  : 


62  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I  shall  depart  for  Munich  to-  3d)  reife  morgen  nad)  2ftiindjen  ab 

morrow 

We  shall  build  (are  going  to  Md)ftc$  3at)r  bauen  ttrir  etn  neueS 

build)  a  new  house  next  year  §cm$ 

If  you  will  come  with  me,  I  SSenn  bu  mit  mir  fommji,  gebe  id) 

shall  give  you  the  money  Mr  ba%  ©elb 

a.  This  is  particularly  often  done  in  the  passive : 
Whoever  moves  will  be  shot  SSer  fid)  riiljrt  ttnrb  erfdjoffen 

b.  The  present  may,  therefore,  be  used  to  express  a 
very  decided  command : 

You  go  at  once  to  your  room         S)u  gefyft  fogleid)  auf  betn  3immer 

109.  The  future  and  the  future  perfect  are  often  used  to 
express  that  which  probably  is,  or  has  been : 

Who  can  it  be  ?  It  is  probably  2Ber  fann  e8  fein  ?    (£8  nurb  mein 

my  brother  33rnber  fein 

He   has  probably  landed  by  G?r  toirb  je^t  [rodjtidjetnUd)]  fdjon 

this  time  getanbet  fein 

110.  Instead  of  the  preterit,  the  perfect  is  very  fre- 
quently used  in  ordinary  conversation,  less  frequently  in 
the  written  language : 

Last  year  I  was  in  Europe  '  S^teS  3af)r  bin  id)  in  (Snropa  ge* 

roejen 
Thiers  died  Sept.  4, 1877  Xl)ter8  tfl  am  4.  (September  1877 

geftorben 

a.  In  continued  narration,  however,  the  preterit  is  the 
rule. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

111.  The  subjunctive  is  used,  if  the  writer  or  speaker 
wishes  to  represent  something  not  as  a  fact,  or  as  certain, 
but  as  possible,  conditional,  desirable,  or  as  said  or  be- 
lieved by  another  person,    But  the  subjective  character, 


SUBJUNCTIVE.  63 

which  may  be  given  to  a  statement  by  the  use  of  the  sub- 
junctive, may  be  given  to  it  also  by  other  means,  e.  g.,  by 
the  use  of  certain  particles  or  modal  auxiliaries,  as  is  often 
done  in  English,  so  that  the  use  of  the  subjunctive,  par- 
ticularly in  independent  clauses,  is  thus  comparatively 
limited. 

Optative  Subjunctive. 

112.  The  subjunctive  is  used  to  express  a  wish  or  in- 
tention. 

A.     In  Independent  Sentences. 

1.  The  use  of   the  present  subjunctive  is  ordinarily 
limited  to  certain  fixed  expressions : 

God  be  praised  ©elobt  fei  @ott 

May  God  grant  ©ebe  ©ott 

Let  it  be  thus  <&o  fei  e§ 

2.  The  present  subjunctive  of  mogen  is  commonly  used 

to  express  a  wish  conceived  as  capable  of  realization  : 

May  the  new  year  bring  you      Sftoge  bir  i>a8  neue  3af)r  nid)t8  aU 
nothing  but  joy  and  happi-         @lucf  uub  greube  bringeit 
ness 

3.  The  preterit  subjunctive,  usually  accompanied  by  a 

particle  like  bod)  or  rtur,  is  used  to  express  a  wish  not 

realized  at  the  present  time : 

Would  that  he  might  come  $ame  er  bod) 

I  wish  it  would  stop  raining         §orte  e8  bod)  auf  gu  regnen 

a.  The  preterit  subjunctive  of  mogen  may  also  be  used, 

without  materially  changing  the  sense : 

Would  that  he  were  silent  Wlodjte  er  bodj  fcfyroetgen,  for  the 

simpler  fdjnricge  er  bod) 

4.  The  pluperfect  subjunctive,  usually  accompanied  by 
bod)  or  nur,  is  used  to  express  a  wish  not  realized  at  a 


64  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

time  in  the  past  when  its  realization  would  have'  been  de- 
sirable : 

Would  that  I  had  seen  him  £citte  td)  itjn  bodj  gefefyen 

If  he  had  only  arrived  at  the      2Bcire  er  bod)  (nur,  bod)  nur)  gur 
right  time  redjten  3cit  gefommen 

B.     In  Dependent  Clauses. 
113.    1.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  dependent  clauses 
after   verbs    of  wishing,  intending,  'permitting  and  their 
opposites  : 

I  desire  that  my  books  shall      3d)  rcitufdje,  baft  man  mir  meine 

be  returned  to  me  33iid)cr  juriicfjeube 

He  intended  that  his  brother      (Sr  beabjidjtigte,  baft  jein    SBruber 
should  receive  this  letter  biejen  SBrtef  erfyiette,  or  ertjalten 

follte 
He  had  not  permitted  his  son      (§r   tjatte   nid)t   ertaubt,   baft  jein 

to  go  to  America  ©ofyn  nad)  toerifa  gtnge 

He   feared    that    his    friend      (Sr  fiivdjtete,  baft  jein  grennb  ftitrbe, 
might  die  or  fterben  modjte 

2.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  final  clauses  to  express 
intention,  purpose,  etc. : 

Luther  translated   the  Bible  gutter    iiberfe^tc    bic    SBibel    tn$ 

into  German,  so   that  the  2)eutfd)e,  \o  bag  ba$  55olf  fie  lefen 

people  might  be  able  to  read  fonnte  unb  nid)t  nur  bie  ©eift- 

it  and  not  only  the  clergy  lidjfett 

3.  If,  however,  that  which  is  expressed  in  the  final 
clause  is  not  to  be  represented  as  intended,  or  is  to  be 
represented  not  only  as  intended  but  as  actually  accom- 
plished, the  indicative  should  be  used : 

The  fog  was  so  dense,  that  the  2)er  9?ebel  War  fo  bicfyt,   baft  ber 

captain   could    not   see  the  $apttcin    ba$    2id)t    nidjt    feljen 

light  fonute 

He  stepped  nearer,  so  that  he  (§r  tvat  na!)er,  fo  baft  er  ba%  ©lib 

could  (was  able  to)  see  the  beffer  fefyen  fonute 

picture  better 


SUBJUNCTIVE.  65 

4  The  indicative  may  also  be  used  after  verbs  of  wish- 
ing and  commanding,  if  the  wish  or  command  are  to  be 
very  emphatic  or  are  conceived  as  certain  to  be  fulfilled  : 

I  want  you  to  take  this  letter  3d)  njimfdje,  baft  bit  biefett  23rief 
to  the  post  auf  bte  $oft  trogfl 

Subjunctive  in  Indirect  Discourse. 

114.  1.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  substantive  clauses 
dependent  on  verbs  of  thinking,  saying,  inquiring,  search- 
ing, investigating,  etc. : 

He  believes  that  he  is  sick  <£v  glanbt,  bag  er  tranf  fet    " 

He  said  that  he  would  soon  ($r  fagte,  bag  er  balb  $uritcffef)ren 

come  back  n?erbe 

He  asked  (he  wished  to  know)  Hv  fragte  (er  roottte  ttrtffen),  ttne  idj 

how  I  had  slept  gejd)lafen  tjabe 

2.  If,  however,  the  truth  of  the  statement  is  not  to 
be  questioned,  or  is  to  be  affirmed  with  a  considerable  de- 
gree of  certainty,  the  indicative  should  be  used : 

I  believe  that  you  are  right  3d)  gfoitbe,  baft  bit  rcdjt  fjaft 

He  knew  that  his  father  had  (£r  nmfjte,  bag  jein  $ater  angefom- 

arrived  men  toax 

Ask  your  brother  himself,  if  grage  betnen  33ruber  nur  felbft,  ob 

he  did  not  see  it  (i.  e.,  I  know  er  e8  ntd)t  gejeljeit  tjat 

he  did  see  it) 

115.  After  verbs  of  saying  and  thinking,  a  clause, 
which  stands  for  a  direct  object,  may  be  introduced  by 
baft,  in  which  case  the  verb  naturally  stands  at  the  end  of 
the  clause  (see  236) ;  or  it  may  be  left  formally  indepen- 
dent, while  logically  dependent,  in  which  case  the  verb,  as 
regularly  in  independent  sentences,  occupies  the  second 
place  (see  214) ;  the  rules  for  moods  and  tenses  in  indi- 
rect discourse  (see  116)  apply  in  either  case : 


66 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


He  said  [that]  he  had  seen  the 
emperor 


The  accused  claimed  that  he 
was  innocent 


(£r  fagte,  baft  er  ben  $aifer  gefefyen 
fjtitte,  or  er  fagte,  er  Ijatte  ben 
Jfaifer  gefeljen 
2)er  Slngeffagte  beljanptete,  baft  er 
unfdjulbig  roare,  or  er  mare  un* 
fdjulbtg. 
116.  1.  In  English,  in  changing  from  the  direct  to  the 
indirect  discourse,  the  present  tense  is  changed  to  the 
preterit ;  in  German,  the  best  usage  requires  the  present 
tense  of  the  direct  discourse  to  be  retained  also  in  the 
indirect  discourse : 


Direct 
He  said :  "  I  am  sick.  *' 
(5r  fagte :  „3d)  bin  franf" 

He    asked  him:    "Have   you 
seen  my  brother?" 
<§r  fragte  i^n:  „§aft  bu  mei* 
nen  33ruber  gefeljcn?" 

He  thought:    "He  will  forget 
it" 

(Sr  Dadjte :  „(Sr  nrirb  e«  Der- 
geffen" 


Indirect. 
He  said  that  he  was  sick 
(Sr  fagte,  baft  er  franf  fei 

He  asked  him,  if  he  had  seen  his 
brother 

(Sr  fragte  if)n,  ob  er  feinen  33ruber 
gefefjen  fyabe 

He  thought  [that]  he  would  forget 
it 

(Sr   bad^te,   baft  er  e8  oergeffen 
toerbe,  or  er  toerbe  e8  toergeffen; 


see  115 
2.  In  the  spoken  language,  however,  the  preterit  is 
quite  generally  substituted  for  the  present,  as  in  English ; 
and  this  is  also  often  done  in  the  written  language,  espe- 
cially when  the  form  of  the  verb  is  the  same  in  the 
present  subjunctive  as  in  the  present  indicative : 

They  said :    "  We  have   seen      <2He  fagten :    „2£tr  fyabett  ifyn  ge= 

feljen" 

©ie  fagten,  baft  fte  ilnt  gefeljen  l)at* 
ten,  instead  of  Ijaben,  which 
would  be  identical  with  the  pre- 
sent indicative 

(£r  fagte,  baft  er  franf  ware,  for  fei 


him" 
They  said  that  they  had  seen 
him 


He  said  that  he  was  sick 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


67 


a.  Similarly,  as  the  preterit  subjunctive  tofirbe  may  be 
used  for  the  present  subjunctive  nmber  so  for  the  future 
subjunctive  id)  toerbe  tf)im  we  may  substitute  what  is  or- 
dinarily called  a  conditional  (see  90),  id)  toiirbe  tljim : 

He  said  that  he  would  do  it  (Sr  fagte,  baft  er  e$  tljim  ttmrbe,/or 

roerbe 

Potential  Subjunctive. 

117.  The  preterit  subjunctive  is  used  to  denote  that 
which,  under  certain  circumstances,  might  be  : 

It  might  be  possible,  but .  . .  (g«  roare  roof)!  mogltd),  aber  . . . 

2.  Hence  the  preterit  subjunctive  may  be  used  in 
hypothetical  clauses,  instead  of  the  conditional,  and  the 
pluperfect  subjunctive  instead  of  the  perfect  conditional: 

(5r  ginge  mit  unS,  (instead  of  er 
roiirbe  mit  un8  getjen)  roenn  cr 
fotutte 

(Sr  Ijatte  e$  getfjan  (instead  of  cr 
rourbe  e$  getfyan  Ijaben),  roenn  cr 
gefonnt  i)dttc 

<£v  roare  gefommen  (instead  of  cr 
roiirbe  gefommen  fein),  roenn  e8 
nic^t  gercgnet  Ijcitte 

118.  1.  The  subjunctive  is  used  to  express  conditions 
which  are  not  realized : 


He  would  go  with  us,  if  he 
could 

He  would  have  done  it  if  he 
had  been  able 

He  would  have  come  if  it  had 
not  rained 


If  he  were  my  friend,  he  would 
not  say  this  of  me 


If   he  would    only   come,  all 

would  be  well 
I  should  have  come  sooner  if  I 

had  known  it 


SScnn  cr  tncin  greunb  roare,  (o*- 
roare  er  tnein  5?reunb,  see  235,  2) 
fo  {see  140)  roiirbe  er  bieS  uidjt 
toon  mtrfagen 

SSenn  er  nur  fame  (or  fame  er  mir), 
fo  roare  attes  gut 

3d)  roare  friifjer  gefommen,  roenn  id) 
e8  geroufct  ijatte,  or  Ijatte  id)  e8 
geroufjt 


68  INFINITIVE. 

2.  Hence  the  subjunctive  should  always  be  used  after 

aU  toentt,  ctfe  ob  as  if,  as  though : 

He  looked  as  though  he  had      (§r  fa!)  au8,  al§  ob  er  au8  bem  ©rabe 
risen  from  the  grave  cmferftanben  retire,  or  al«  tt)dre  ev 

au%  bem  ©vabe  auferftanben 

INFINITIVE. 

119.  1.  Infinitives  are  preceded  by  their  complements 
(see  231,  1).  When  the  preposition  ju  is  used,  it  always 
stands  immediately  before  the  infinitive. 

2.  As  a  rule,  the  preposition  §u  is  used  before  an  infini- 
tive in  the  same  cases  in  which  to  is  used  in  English. 

a.  When  to  is  equal  to  in  order  to,  it  should  ordinarily 

be  rendered  by   urn  .  .  .  %uf  the  unt  preceding  the  other 

complements  of  the  infinitive  : 

He   went  to  Paris  to  study      Q?r  gtng  nad)  granfreitf),  urn  franco* 
French  history  ftfdje  ©ejd)id)te  gu  ftubieren 

b.  Never  use  JU  before  an  infinitive  dependent  on  a 

modal  auxiliary,  not  even  when  the  modal  auxiliary  is 

employed  to  render  an  English  circumlocution  requiring 

the  use  of  to : 

I  cannot  do  it  3dj  fcmn  eS  nttfjt  tfymi 

He  will  not  be  able  to  do  it  (£r  roirb  e$  nid)t  tfyim  fonnen 

We  must  do  it  SBir  miiffen  e8  tf)un 

We  have  been  compelled  to  Sir  fyaben  e§  tf)im  miiffen 
do  it 

c.  Unlike  the  English  to,  git  must  be  repeated  before 

each  of  several  infinitives : 

The  teacher  gave  us  a  poem  to      S)er  £efyrer   gab   un8   ein  ©ebitfjt 
copy  and  learn  by  heart  abgitfdjveiben  unb  auSmenbtg  $u 

lenten 


INFINITIVE.  69 

3.  The  infinitive  without  ju  is  used  after  finbert  find, 

\xi\jitn  feel,  Ijcifcm  command,  fjelfen  help,  fjorett  hear,  laffeit 

let,  cause,  Icfjrcn  teach,  Icrncn  learn,  fefyeit  see  : 

I  saw  her  sitting  at  the  window  3d)  faf)  fte  am  gettfter  ft£en 

The  boy  learned  to  read  $)er  $nabe  lentte  tefen 

He  ordered  me  to  be  silent  (Sr  Ijiefi  mid)  [till  jdjtueigen 

The  colonel  let  the  men  rest  £)er  Oberft  Ueg  bte  ©olbaten  jum 
(caused ...  to  rest)  two  hours  ©tuuben  ruf)en 

4.  Contrary  to  English  usage,  ^u  should  be  used  before 

an  infinitive  after  UMijen  dare,  and  bvaudjen  need: 

He  did  not  dare  say  a  word  (Sr  magte  leiu  2Bort  $u  reben 

You  need  not  trouble  yourself      @ic  bvaudjen  ftd)  md)t  gu  bemitljeii 

120.  1.  When  Ijorcn  hear,  fefjcu  see,  fitfjlen  /e^,  laffen 
fe£,  cawse,  (jctfecn,  6efel)len,  gebieten  command,  are  followed 
by  an  infinitive,  the  object  which  expresses  who  is  heard, 
seen,  etc.,  or  to  whom  a  command  is  given,  may  be  omitted 
in  German  without  changing  the  rest  of  the  sentence, 
while  in  English  a  passive  construction  must  be  used : 

The  king  ordered  the  architect  2)cr  ^oittg  befall  bem  2lrd)iteften, 

to  build  him  a  castle  on  the  iljm  eiu  ©djfog  auf  bem  33erge  gu 

mountain  beaten 

The  king  ordered  a  castle  to  $)ev  $omg  befaf)f,  tl)m  ettt  ©djfojj 

be   built   for   him    on    the  auf  bem  SBcrge  $u  bauen 

mountain 

a.    When   have  with   an  infinitive  or  past  participle 

means  cause,  order,  command,  it  should  be  rendered  by 

laffen,  fyeifcen,  fcfeljlen  or  gebieten: 

I  had  him  repeat  the  story  3d)  Uefj  iljn  bte  ©efd)td)te  roieber* 

l)o(en 
The  Sultan  had  fifteen  of  the      25er  ©iritan  (teg  funfgeljn  ber  ©e* 
prisoners  beheaded  fangencu  entljanpten 

2.  It  may,  therefore,  be  said,  that  after  the  above  verbs, 


70  INFINITIVE. 

a  past  participle  or  a  passive  infinitive  should  be  trans- 
lated by  an  active  infinitive  (without  jit  before  the  verbs 
mentioned  119,  3) : 

I  have  heard  this  story  told  a      3d)  Ijabe  biefe  ©efd)id)te  fd)on  oft 

good  many  times  ergatyen  fyoren 

Charlemagne  caused  the  old      #arl  berOrofee  Uegbic  alten£elben* 

heroic  poems  to  be  collected  licber  fammeln 

The  captain  ordered  the  sails  2)er  $apitcin  Ueg  bie  ©egel  auf= 
to  be  hoisted  gietjen 

3.  The  active  infinitive  may  then  be  said  to  have  pas- 
sive force,  for  its  logical  subject  may  be  expressed,  as 
after  the  finite  forms  of  the  passive,  by  lion  with  the 
dative : 

The  king  had  a  castle  built  on  £>er  $ontg  Ueg  fief)  Don  feinem  SBau* 
the  mountain  by  his  archi-  meifter  eiu  @d)lo§  aitf  bem  23erge 
tect  bauen 

4.  The  active  infinitive  should  also  be  used  in  the  pre- 
dicate after  fein  be : 

There  was  nothing  to  be  done      (§8  roar  nid)t8  gu  tfyuu 

a.  Attributively,  however,  the  gerundive  should  be 
used,  which  is  in  form  identical  with  an  inflected  present 
participle  preceded  by  gu : 

This  poem  is  to  be  learned  by  3)iefeS    ©ebicfyt    ifl    au$tt>enbtg    git 

heart  lenten 

-  But 

The  poem  to  be  learned  (or  3>a«  gu  lernenbe  ©ebtdjt  ift  gtemlicf) 

which  is  to  be  learned)   is  tang 

quite  long 

The  difficulties  to  be  overcome  2>ie  gu  uberttrinbenben  @d)ttriertg* 

were  very  great  feiten  tnaren  feljr  grog 

121.  With  the  following  verbs  the  infinitive  without  gu 
is  used  in  certain  fixed  expressions,  in  place  of  various 
English  constructions : 


PARTICIPLES. 


71 


fasten  ride  (in  a  vehicle) 
reiten  ride  (on  horseback) 
gefyen  go,  walk 


bleibcn  remain  ftefyenbtetb en  remain  standing,  halt 

ftfcen  bleiben  remain  sitting 
Uegen  bleiben  remain  lying 
foajieren  fafyren  ride  for  pleasure 
tya^teren  reiten  ride  for  pleasure 
(pajieren  gel) en  walk  for  pleasure 
fdjfafen  gefjen  go  to  bed 
ftfdjen  gefjen  go  a-fishing 
jagen  geljen  go  a-hunting 
etc. 

122.  The  English  construction  of  an  accusative  with  an 
infinitive  (the  latter  preceded  by  to)  cannot  be  imitated  in 
German,  but  a  subordinate  clause  introduced  by  a  suitable 
conjunction  should  be  substituted : 

He  knew  himself  to  be  guilty       (gr  ttmgte,  bag  er  fcfyulbtg  tt)ar 


I  want  you  to  go  away  now 
He  declared  it  to  be  a  false- 
hood 

Similarly : 

He  sent  it  for  his  wife  to  look 
at 


3d)  roiinjdje,  baft  bu  nun  fartqefyft 
(Sr  erfltirte,  baft  e8  einc  Sitge  fei, 

or  er  erf  (arte,  e8  fei  eiue  2itge; 

see  114,  1 

(Sr  fanbte  e8,  batnlt  feine  grau  es 
fid)  aujatje;  see  113,  2 


PARTICIPLES. 

123.  Participles,  being  verbal  adjectives,  are  inflected, 
and  admit  of  comparison,  just  like  common  adjectives 
(see  17-23) ;  they  are  generally  preceded  by  their  comple- 
ments (231,  2-4). 

124.  The  use  of  participles  is  more  limited  in  German 
than  in  English. 

1.  Participles  may  be  used  attributively : 

A  standing  army  Sin  ftefjenbeS  §eer 

A  wandering  minstrel  (gin     fafyrenber     (or    nianbentber) 

©anger 
A  respected  citizen  (gin  geadjteter  93iirger 

A  wounded  soldier  (gin  oertounbeter  @olbat 


Y2  PARTICIPLES. 

2.  Participles  may  be  used  substantively  : 

A  traveller  (Sin  SKeifenber 

Something  glittering  (StroaS  ©Icm^enbeS 

Those  assembled  2)te  $erfammetten 

The  wounded  3Me  £oten 

3.  a.  Only  past  participles  can  be  used  predicatively  : 

The  door  was  locked  2>te  £f)iir  roar  Derfdjloffen 

He  had  lost  his  watch  (Sr  fyatte  feme  Ufyr  toerloren 

The  mother  had  died  2)ie  Gutter  raar  geftorben 

6.  Present  participles  cannot  be  used  in  the  predicate, 

but  a  finite  verb  should  be  substituted : 

She  was  sitting  at  the  window      ©ie  fag  am  genfter 
I  was  just  going  to  leave  for      3d)  roollte   ebeu   nad)  SBertin  ah* 
Berlin  reifett 

c.  A  limited  number  of  present  participles  are  no  longer 

felt  as  such,  but  as  common  adjectives,  and  they  may 

therefore  be  used  predicatively  and  adverbially : 

He  is  absent  (Sr  ift  abroefenb 

She  sang  charmingly  @te  fang  ret^enb 

Such  are,  among  others,  antoefenb  present,  bebeutenb 
important,  betreffenb  concerned. 

4.  a.  Participles  may  be  used  appositively : 

She  sat  weeping  by  the  bed-  ©ie  fag  roeinenb  am  23ette  iljrer 

side  of  her  mother  gutter 

He  entered  the  room  in  silence  @d)roetgenb  trat  er  in  ba$  ^imvan 

Pierced  by  an  arrow  he  sank  $on  einem  sJ3fetfe  getroffeti  fan!  er 

to  the  ground  gu  23oben 

b.  This  use  of  a  participle,  however,  is  not  permitted  in 
the  numerous  cases  in  which  an  important  limitation  of  a 
noun  is  to  be  expressed.  The  participle  should  then  be 
used  attributively,  before  the  noun,  preceded  by  its  own 


PARTICIPLES. 


73 


qualifiers,  (see  231,  2) ;  or  else  a  relative  clause  should  be 
substituted : 


The  book  lying  on  the  table 
was  a  Greek  grammar 


The  candidate  receiving  the 
largest  number  of  votes  is 
elected 

I  prefer  an  edition  of  Moliere's 
works  printed  in  France 


2)a8  auf  bem  £iftf)e  Uegenbe  S8ud) 
wax  etne  griedufcfye  ©rammatif, 
or  ba%  23ud),  ba&  auf  bem  £ifd)e 
tag,  2C. 

2>er  bie  meifkn  ©ttmmen  erfjaltenbe 
(Sanbtbat  (or  berjenige  (Eanbibat, 
tueltfjer  bie  meiften  @timmen  er* 
ffiU,)  ift  erroar^lt 

3d)  ^ie^e  etne  in  granfreid)  gebrucfte 
SluSgabe  Don  SKoltere'S  SSerfen 
(or  eine  $lii8gabe  toon  . . .,  bie  in 
granfreid)  gebrucft  ift,)  Dor 

c.  A  present  participle  should  not,  ordinarily,  be  used 
to  express  an  idea  as  important  as,  or  more  important 
than,  that  expressed  by  the  finite  verb,  but  a  coordinate 
verb  should  be  used  instead  of  the  participle : 

He  sat  at  his  desk  all  day,      (Sr  fa6  ben  gan;;en  £ag  an  feinem 

writing  letters  $nlte  unb  fdjrteb  SBriefe 

He   stood    on  the    mountain,      (§f  ftanb  auf  bem  Serge  unb  fal)  in8 
looking  down  into  the  valley         £t)al  l)iniutter 

125.  Present  participles  should  not  be  used  in  German 
to  express  adverbial  relations  of  time,  cause,  or  manner. 
Various  substitutions  afe  possible. 

1.  An  adverbial  clause  introduced  by  a  suitable  con- 
junction (see  142  ff:) : 


Returning  from  his  walk,  he 
was  surprised  to  see  light  in 
his  study 

Not  finding  his  friend  at  home, 
he  went  away  again 

Having  arrived  at  night,  he 
had  not  noticed  the  dirty 
appearance  of  the  hotel 


3U«  er  uon  feinem  @£a$iergange  gu* 
riicffefyrte,  roar  er  iiberrafdjt,  Vid)t 
in  feinem  ©tubtergimmer  gu  fetjen 

Site  (or  ba)  er  fetnen  greunb  ntd)t 
gu  §aufe  fanb,  ging  er  roicber  fort 

£>a  (or  metl)  er  in  ber  9?ad)t  ange- 
fommen  roar,  tjatte  er  ba§  fdjmu^ 
ige  2ui$fel)en  be8  §otel8  md}t 
bemertt 


74  PARTICIPLES. 

Having  finished  his  work,  he  Cobalt  er  feine  Arbeit  oottcnbet 
went  away  again  fyatte,  eilte  er  ttueber  batton 

He  left  the  hotel,  pretending  dv  Derltefe  ba%  §otel,  inbem  er  oor« 
that  he  would  soon  return  gab,  balb  guriicfferjren  gu  tnotlen 

Trying  to  excuse  herself,  she  Snbem  (or  rocifyrenb)  fie  fid)  $u  ent* 
only  made  the  matter  worse         jdmtbtgen  fudjte,  madjte   fie  bie 

&ad)t  nur  nod)  jdjUmmer 

a.  When  for  a  present  participle,  referring  to  a  noun 
which  is  the  subject  of  the  sentence,  a  subordinate  clause 
is  thus  substituted,  this  subordinate  clause  should  gener- 
ally stand  first  in  the  sentence,  and  the  noun  should  be 
made  its  subject,  while  a  pronoun  should  be  used  as  the 
subject  of  the  principal  clause  (see  244) : 

Casting  a  last  glance  at  the  Snbem  ber  fitter  bem  £cuife  fetner 

house  of  his  ancestors,  the  $(l)nen  eiuen  le^ten  SBttcf  jjntrmrf, 

knight   mounted    his  horse  beftieg  er  fein  $ferb  nub  rttt  ba* 

and  rode  away  toon 

2.  Sometimes,  a  relative  clause  may  be  substituted : 

The  count,  believing  that  his  2)er  ©raf,  mefd)er  gfaubte,  bafe  fein 

servant  had  been  murdered  2)tener  auf  feiuen  23efet)l  ermoubet 

at  his  command,  was  fright-  morben  fei,  erfdjraf,  al8  er  ifm 

ened  when  he  saw  him  ap-  fommeu  fal) 
proaching 

3.  Sometimes,  a  suitable  adjective  may  be  found : 

They  marched  back,  rejoicing  @te  marfdjterten  guriid,  frolj  u'ber 
over  their  victory  ifjreu  ©ieg 

4.  Sometimes,  a  suitable  noun  preceded  by  a  preposition 

may  be  substituted : 

I  took  the  book  intending  to  3d)  naljm  ba%  33udj  in  ber  $bfi(f)t, 
return  it  within  a  week  e$  in  etner  2Bod)e  gururfgujenben 

5.  In  a  few  cases  the  infinitive  should  be  used  instead 
of  the  participle ;  see  121. 


VERBAL   NOUNS   IN   -ING.  75 

6.  After  fommen  come,  the  manner  of  motion  is  not  ex- 
pressed, as  in  English,  by  the  present  participle,  but  by 
the  past  participle : 

The  prince  came  galloping  along      2)er  $rinfl  tarn  bafyer  galoppicrt 
A  swan  came  swimming  up  to      (Sin  @d)rocm  tarn  auf  bte  Sungfrau 
the  maiden  gugefd)tuommen 

126.  Although  past  participles  are  more  frequently 
used  in  German  to  express  adverbial  relations  than  pre- 
sent participles,  yet  they  cannot  be  used  with  the  same 
freedom  as  in  English,  and  it  will  often  seem  best  to  make 
substitutions  for  them  similar  to  those  just  indicated  for 
present  participles. 

VERBAL   NOUNS   IN  -/NO. 

127.  In  English,  a  confusion  has  arisen  between  the 
present  participles  and  the  verbal  nouns  in  -ing,  in  con- 
sequence of  which  it  is  in  some  cases  difficult  to  say 
whether  we  have  to  do  with  a  true  present  participle  or  a 
verbal  noun.  For  our  purpose,  it  has  seemed  best  to  dis- 
cuss in  the  previous  paragraphs  all  those  cases  in  which 
we  clearly  have  to  do  with  present  participles,  and  clas- 
sify all  others  as  verbal  nouns. 

128.  English  verbal  nouns  in  -ing  should  under  no  cir- 
cumstances be  translated  by  German  present  participles. 
The  various  ways  of  rendering  them  are  the  following: 

1.  By  a  verbal  noun  without  suffix  : 

The  fighting  lasted  until  even-      £)er  $antp[  bauerte  bis  gum  Stbenb 

ing 
We  heard  the  singing  distinctly      2Bir  Ijorten  ben  ©efang  beutltd) 

2.  If  no  suitable  noun  without  suffix  is  in  common  use, 
a  neuter  verbal  noun  in  -eit  (often  called  "  an  infinitive 


76  VERBAL   NOUNS   IN   -M0. 

used  as  a  noun"),  or  a  feminine  verbal  noun  in  -UttJJ, 
should  be  used.  Feminines  in  -Hllg,  however,  are  not 
formed  from  all  verbal  stems,  and  when  formed,  they 
often  have  special  meanings,  denoting,  for  instance,  the 
result  of  the  act,  rather  than  the  act  itself;  caution 
should,  therefore,  be  exercised  in  their  use.  The  neuters 
in  —en  may  be  used  with  greater  freedom. 

I  prefer  rowing  to  sailing  3d)  gtefje  ba%  {see  4,  2)  SKnbem  bem 

<Segeln  tior 

Smoking  is  not  allowed  in  this  3n  biefem  ^tmmer  ifi  ba$  $andjen 
room  toerboten 

I  use  spectacles  for  (or  in)  3d)  gebrcmdje  eine  Grille  gum  (or 
reading  beim)  £cfen 

The  landing  of  the  pilgrims  2)te  £ctnbnng  ber  ^ilger 

The  signing  of  the  treaty  2>ie  llntev$etd)nung  be§  SBertrageS 

a.  If  such  a  noun  is  qualified  by  another  noun,  the  lat- 
ter must  always  stand  in  the  genitive  case : 

The  singing  of  such  songs  £)a$  ©tngen  jotdjer  Steber 

Feeding  the  animals  is  for-  £a§  giitteru  ber  £l)iere  ift  toerboten 
bidden 

b.  With  the  preposition  gu,  a  neuter  verbal  noun  in  -en 
may  often  be  used  to  render  an  English  infinitive  with  to, 
and  this  construction  should,  as  a  rule,  be  used,  when 
the  infinitive  has  no  adjunct,  or  is  accompanied  only  by  a 
direct  object: 

He  gave    him    a   drawing  to  (Sr  gab  U)m  eine  3e^nuufl    5um 

copy  dopteren 

He  left  his  coat  in  the  sun  to  dx  Ueg  fetnen  Sftocf  in  ber  (Sonne 

dry  ^nm  £rocfnen 

I  had  no  time  to  read  his  long  3d)  tjatte  fetne  3eit  jum  2efen  fetnen 

letter  langen   SBrtefeS,   or  letne  3^ 

fetnen  (angen  33rief  gu  lefen 

c.  In  many  cases,  a  compound  may  then  be  formed  of 
the  verbal  noun  and  its  adjunct : 


VERBAL   NOUNS   IN  -ING.  77 

Letter  writing,  the  writing  of  2)a§  23riefefd)retbett 

letters 

The  work  of  cutting  trees  2)ie  Arbeit  be8  33ciiimef  aliens 

The  habit  of  smoking  tobacco  3)ie  ©erootjntyeit  be3  £abacfraud)en§ 

3.  A  verbal  noun  in  -ing  used  in  the  manner  of  a  direct 
object  after  certain  verbs  should  be  translated  by  an  in- 
finitive with  gu : 

He  ceased  playing  (Sr  fjorte  auf,  git  fpielen 

He  began  reading  the  letter  C?r  fing  an,  ben  23itef  gu  Tefeit 

He  remembered  having  heard  dv  erttmerte  fid),  biefe  SBemerfung 
this  remark  before  jdjou  friil)ei  gcfyort  gu  fjabeit 

a.  An  infinitive  with  5U  may  frequently  be  anticipated, 

either  as  object  or  as  subject,  by  the  impersonal  c3  (29, 

Id): 

I  enjoyed  looking  at  the  pict-      (S§  mad)te  mir  2>ergniigen,  bic  33it- 
ures  bcr  311  betradjteu 

b.  Here  may  be  mentioned  the  construction  of  the  im- 
personal gcltngcn  (see  87,  2  a): 

He  succeeded    in   translating      Q?$  gefong  tl)m,  bie  @tette  ridjtig  gu 
the  passage  correctly  iibevfefcen 

4.  A  verbal  noun  in  the  genitive  case  may  usually  be 
translated  by  an  infinitive  with  ju : 

He  took  the  money  with  the  (Sr  naljm  ba%  ©elb  in  bcr  2tbftd)t,  e« 

intention  of  returning  it  guritcf jucrftattcn 

In  the  hope  of  being  able  to  3n  ber  §offnung,  biefe  @iimme  auf* 

raise  this  sum  bringen  jit  fomteii 

He  accused  me  of  having  stolen  ($r  befrfjufbigte  mid),  iljm  bie  Uljr 

his  watch  geftoljlen  gu  tyabeu 

a.  But  adjectives  and  verbs  which,  although  followed 
in  English  by  of,  do  not  take  a  genitive  in  German,  but 
require  some  preposition  (see  Appendix,  A  and  B),  should 
be  treated  according  to  6,  below. 


78  VERBAL   NOUNS   IN   -WG. 

5.  When  a  verbal  noun  in  -dng  preceded  by  a  preposi- 
tion expresses  an  adverbial  relation  of  time,  cause  or 
manner,  applying  to  the  sentence  in  general,  it  should 
generally  be  expanded  into  a  subordinate  clause,  intro- 
duced by  a  suitable  conjunction  : 

After  reading  the  letter,  he  put  9?ad)bem  cr  ben  SBrief  getefen  fyatte, 

it  into  his  pocket  ftccfte  er  il)n  in  tie  £afd)e 

Before  going  to  bed,  I  packed  (Slje  id)  gu  SBette  ging,  patfte  id)  atte 

all  my  things  tttcine  @ad)en  ftujammen 

On  arriving  at  the  castle,  the  %\§  ber  fitter  am  ©djloffe  anfam, 

knight  dismounted  ftieg  er  {see  125,  1  a)  com  ^ferbe 

For  the  conjunctions  which  should  be  used  in  render- 
ing the  various  prepositions,  see  142,  ff. 

a.  Two  prepositions,  however,  viz.  of)ne  without  and  an* 
ftatt  instead,  may  be  followed  by  an  infinitive  with  ju : 

The    witness    spoke   without  £)er  Beitge  tyrad)  oljne  ben  Sdtge* 

looking  at  the  accused  flagten  an^ufdjauen 

Instead  of   writing,  he  went  gn ftatt  gu  fd)retben,  ging  er  felbft 

himself  fyin 

For  the  infinitive  with  jtt,  a  subordinate  clause  intro- 
duced by  bafe  may  be  substituted,  and  this  substitution 
should  take  place  whenever  the  logical  subject  of  the 
verbal  noun  in  -ing  is  not  the  same  as  that  of  the  govern- 
ing verb : 

The  young  man  went  to  Amer-      Tjer  junge  SJtonn  ging  nad)  5Imertfa, 
ica     without     his     father's  ofyne  baft  feiit  SBater  etroaS  ba&on 

knowing  anything  about  it  nmgte 

6.  When  a  verbal  noun  in  -ing  preceded  by  a  preposi- 
tion does  not  express,  as  stated  in  the  previous  paragraph, 
an  adverbial  relation  of  time,  cause  or  manner,  applying 
to  the  sentence  in  general,  but  constitutes  a  necessary 


ADVERBS. 


79 


complement  of  the  predicate,  it  may  generally  be  rendered 
by  an  adverb,  consisting  of  ia  (before  vowels  bar)  and  the 
proper  preposition,  followed  by  the  infinitive  with  ju 
(see  136,  2  b) : 

2)er  $nabe  roar  ftotj  barcmf,  ben 
^rciS  gelDonnen  $u  fjaben 

@ic  beftanb  barauf,  mit  un8  ^u 
gefjeu 

(5r  madjte  (Sinttjanbe  bagegen,  etiten 
33evid)t  iiber  bieje  Slngelegenljeit 
gu  ueroffentltdjen 

(5r  fanb  uiel  ^ergniigen  baran,  feine 
$inber  gu  initerridjten 

a.  For  this  infinitive  with  ^lt,  a  subordinate  clause  in- 
troduced by  baft  may  often  be  substituted,  and  this  should 
be  done  whenever  the  logical  subject  of  the  verbal  noun 
is  not  identical  with  that  of  the  governing  verb : 

He  objected  to  my  publishing  (5r  mad)te  (Sinroenbungen  bagegen, 
an  account  of  it  bag  id)  einen  33ertd)t  bauou  Der* 

offeritlidje 

He  rejoiced  in  his  friend's  ob-  (Sr  freutc  ftrf)  bariiber,  baft  fein 
taining  the  position  greunb  bie  ©telle  crtjteit 


The  boy  was  proud  of  having 

won  the  prize 
She  insisted  upon  going  with 

us 
He  objected  to  publishing  an 

account  of  this  affair 

He    found    great   pleasure  in 
teaching  his  children 


BJwerbs, 

129.  Any  adjective  or  participle  may,  in  its  inflected 
form,  be  used  as  an  adverb;  see  18,  3. 

130.  An  adverb  of  place  or  direction  generally  appears 
as  the  most  direct  complement  of  the  finite  verb.  It 
usually  stands,  therefore,  at  the  end  of  the  sentence  (see 
226): 

I  went  out  the  next  day  3d)  ging  ben  anbern  Sag  au& 


80  ADVERBS. 

In  the  case  of  compound  tenses,  however,  the  infinitive 
or  past  participle  stands  last,  and  in  subordinate  clauses 
the  finite  verb  itself  occupies  that  position;  in  either 
case,  the  adverb  immediately  precedes  the  verb  and  is 
then  prefixed  to  it : 

I  shall  go  out  to-morrow  3d)  tterbe  morgen  au«get)en 

I  had  gone  out  the  day  before       3d)  roar  ben  £ag   corner   cmSge* 

gangen 

If  I  go  out  to-morrow  2Benn  id)  morgen  cutSgelje 

131.  Numerous  combinations  of  verbs  with  simple 
adverbs  of  place  or  direction,  especially  ab,  cm,  auf,  ctu3, 
6ci,  bitrcl),  liber,  urn,  unter,  have  gradually  acquired  special 
or  derived  meanings.  Thus  au^gel)cn  go  out,  when  applied 
to  persons,  is  now  used  only  in  the  sense  of  go  out  of  one's 
house;  au34retcn,  originally  meaning  step  out,  is  now  used 
almost  exclusively  in  the  sense  of  leave  the  ranks,  leave  a 
society ;  bitrdj-gcljen,  originally  meaning  go  through,  now 
means  also  run  away;  bcUftctjen,  originally  meaning  stand 
by,  now  means  aid.  Care  should  therefore  be  exercised 
in  the  use  of  these  simple  adverbs  of  place,  and  more  fre- 
quently compound  adverbs,  containing  a  demonstrative 
element  like  ba,  f)er,  or  f)tn,  should  be  substituted  for 
them,  in  the  manner  explained  in  132-134,  especially 
when  for  the  adverb  a  noun  preceded  by  a  preposition 
may  readily  be  substituted.     Thus : 

The  conductor  was  not  in  the      £)er  jfottimftetft  roar  nid)t  tm  2Ba* 

car ;  he  had  gone  out  gen ;  er  roar  fytnauSgegcmgen 

He  stepped  out  (e.  g.  out  of  the      (§r  trat  fyerauS 

room) 
He  went  through  (e.  g.  through      dv  gtug  l)inburd) 

the  city) 
He    stood  by  (e.  g.  near  the      (£x  ftanb  babei  unb  Iadjte 
scene)  and  laughed 


ADVERBS.  81 

132.  In  German,  a  distinction  has  to  be  made  between 
adverbs  of  place  which  express  a  situation,  and  adverbs 
of  direction,  such  as  are  used  after  verbs  of  motion,  a  dis- 
tinction which  is  not  always  made  in  English : 

Where  does  he  live?  SSo  rooljnt  cr? 

He  has  never  been  there  (§r  tft  me  ta  geroefen 

I  shall  remain  here  five  weeks  3d)  roerbe  fitnf  SSodjen  Ijter  bfetben 

Is  he  below?  3ft  er  unten? 

But 

Where  (or  whither)  is  he  going?  2Bof)in  geljt  er  ?  or  2Bo  gefyt  cr  l)in? 

(see  134,  2) 

He  does  not  want  to  go  there  C?r  null  nid)t  bovtljin  gefyen 

She  came  here  five  weeks  ago  (gte  tarn  bor  fitnf  SSodjen  l)terl)er 

He  has  gone  below  G?r  ift  Ijinuntergegangen 

133.  After  verbs  of  motion,  again,  a  distinction  has  to 
be  made,  in  German,  according  as  the  motion  is  from  some 
other  place  toward  the  speaker  (or  toward  the  place  with 
which  he  may  temporarily  identify  himself),  when  an  ad- 
verb compounded  with  f)cr  is  usually  employed,  or  is  away 
from  the  speaker  (or  the  place  with  which  he  may  tem- 
porarily identify  himself),  toward  some  other  place,  when 
an  adverb  compounded  with  (jilt  is  usually  employed. 
2)a,  bovt  there,  Ijier  here,  and  too  where  precede  fjcr  and  Ijtn 
in  such  compounds;  the  other  adverbs  of  place  follow: 

She  is  coming  here  to-morrow  (gie  fommt  morgett  f)ierf)cr 

She  is  going  there  next  week  <gte  gcl)t  nadjfie  2Bod)e  bortljtn 

Go  in;  go  out  ©eftt  |incin;  gefyt  IjtnauS 

Come  in ;  come  out  $ommt  Ijerein;  fommt  fyeranS 

Come  down ;  go  down  tommt  Ijernnter;  geljt  Ijinunter 

For  details  see  Alphabetical  List  of  Adverbs,  etc.,  142  fif. 

134.  1.  Except  the  compounds  of  too,  which  always 
stand  at  the   beginning  of   a  clause,  the   adverbs  com- 


82  ADVERBS. 

pounded  with  t)cr  and  t)in,  like  the  simple  adverbs  of 

place  and  direction  (see  130),  usually  stand,  as  the  most 

direct  qualifiers  of  the  verb,  at  the  end  of  the  clause,  and,  in 

the  cases  in  which  the  verb  itself  stands  at  the  end  of  the 

clause,  they  may  be  prefixed  to  it ;   but  the  latter  is  not 

done  as  regularly  as  with  the  simple  adverbs  of  place, 

and  is  done  least  often  with  the  compounds  of  ba,  bort 

and  Ijier: 

He  has  not  yet  come  out  (£r  ifl  nod)  tttdjt  fjerauggefommen 

I  shall  go  there  next  spring  3d)  toerbe  udd)fieS  gru^a^r  bortt)tn 

reijeu 

2.  2)a,  bort,  l)ter  and  too  may  be  separated  from  fyer  and 
l)in,  the  latter  then  standing,  as  the  most  direct  comple- 
ments of  the  verb,  at  the  end  of  the  clause : 

Where  do  you  come  from?  2Bo    fommfl    bu    tjcr?    or    SSoljer 

fommft  bu? 
Where  are  you  going?  23o  gefyft  b\i  l)iu?  or  2Bol)in  gel)ft 

bu? 

3.  §er  and  Ijin,  and  especially  adverbs  compounded 
with  them,  are  often  used  to  strengthen  adverbial  phrases 
consisting  of  a  noun  (or  pronoun)  preceded  by  a  prepo- 
sition : 

All  around  the  city  9ftng$  um  bie  ©tabt  Ijerum 

Far  into  the  country  SBeit  inS  2cmb  Ijinein 

Out  into  the  field  2luf$  getb  l)tnau8 

He  drew  his  sword  from  its  dx  §og  ba%  <2>d)tt>ert  cm8  ber  ©d)etbe 

sheath  IjerauS 

The  flower-pot  fell  from  the  2)er  SBlumentopf  fteloonbergenfter* 

window-sill  into  the  street  ban!  auf  bie  ©trafje  fyinab 

See  172,  I,  2,  and  182.  II,  2. 

135.  Adverbs  compounded  with  I)er  or  I) in,  as  well  as 
nouns  preceded  by  such  prepositions  as  express  direction, 


ADVERBS.  83 

may  in  themselves  imply  motion ;   unless,  therefore,  it  is 

important  that  the  manner  of  motion  should  be  stated, 

an  infinitive  or  past  participle  of  a  verb  of  motion  may  be 

omitted ;  this  omission  is  particularly  common  after  the 

modal  auxiliaries  (see  97) : 

He  could  not  get  across  (Sr  fonnte  nid)t  fyiniiber 

His  mother  would  like  to  go  ©erne  Gutter  modjte  gern  gu  ifym 

to  him 

He  has  gone  to  Australia  (Sr  ift  nad)  SluftraUen 

136.  Numerous  demonstrative,  relative  and  interroga- 
tive adverbs  are  formed  by  prefixing  the  adverbs  bet,  Ijicr, 
ioof  (before  vowels  bar,  toor)  to  various  prepositions  :  ba* 
tnit,  Ijtermtt,  toomit;  barunter,  Ijterunter,  luorunter;  bagegen, 
{jtergegen,  toogegen,  etc.  These  are  much  more  frequently 
used  than  their  English  equivalents  therewith,  herewith, 
wherewith,  etc. 

1.  They  are  used  in  place  of  pronouns  governed  by 
prepositions  and  referring  to  things,  not  persons ;   see  28. 

2.  The  compounds  of  bet  are  used  to  place  a  subordinate 
clause  introduced  by  baf$,  or  an  infinitive  with  ju,  in  the 
same  adverbial  relation  to  the  governing  verb  in  which  a 
noun  preceded  by  the  corresponding  preposition  would 
stand  :  er  bcftcf)t  auf  unfever  foforttgen  9titdfef)r  he  insists 
on  our  immediate  return ;  cr  beftcfjt  barauf,  ba$  fair  f ofort 
^liriicffctjrcn  (lit.,  ■  he  insists  on  this :  that  we  return  at 
once')  he  insists  on  our  returning  at  once;  er  6eftef)t 
barauf,  f ofort  jurfidEjitfcfjvcn  (lit.,  'he  insists  on  this:  to 
return  at  once ')  he  insists  on  returning  at  once.  The 
compounds  of  ba  are,  therefore,  especially  used  : 

a.  When  the  governing  verb  requires  to  be  construed 
with  a  preposition  (see  Appendix  B) : 


84 


ADVERBS. 


The  ministry  urgently  demand- 
ed the  dissolution  of  Parlia- 
ment 

The  ministry  urgently  demand- 
ed that  the  king  should  dis- 
solve Parliament 

I  reminded  him  of  his  promise 

I  reminded  him  that  he  had 
promised  to  send  me  his  la- 
test book 


3)a8  2ftinijlerium  brang  auf  2Iuf- 
lofung  be8  s#arlamentc8 

2)a8  2ftiutftertum  brang  barauf,  ba6 

ber  $onig  ba8  ^arlament  auflofen 

fofle 
3d)  erimxerte  tfyn  an  fein  $erfpred)en 
3d)  erinncrte  iljn  baran,  baft  cr  toer- 

fpvodjeu  l)atte,  mir  fein  neueftes 

$3ud)  ^u  fdjtden 


A  number  of  verbs,  especially  such  as  denote  a  state  or 
expression  of  feeling  or  emotion,  may  directly  govern  a 
clause  introduced  by  t>ctf3,  but  it  is  better  to  interpose  a 
suitable  compound  of  ba  : 

2>er  ©efangene   beflagte  fid)  fiber 

fd)led)te  23el)anbutng 
2)er  ©efangene  beflagte  ftd)  [bar» 

fiber],   baft  er  fd)led)t  beljanbelt 

foorben  fei 
2)er  anne  $erl  war  fefyr  banfbar 

[bafiir],  bag  mir  il)n  befudjteu 
3d)  felme  nitct)  fbanad)],  metne  §ei* 

mat  ttriebergufefyen 


The  prisoner  complained  of  ill- 
treatment 

The  prisoner  complained  that 
he  had  been  ill-treated 


The  poor  fellow  was  very  grate- 
ful that  we  came  to  see  him 

I  long  to  see  my  native  place 
again 

6.  To  render  the  English  construction  of  a  verbal  noun 
in  -ing  preceded  by  a  preposition  (see  128,  6) : 

We  are  proud  of  being  Ger-      Sffitr  ftnb  ftotg  baranf  (see  Appendix 


mans 

I  am  contented  with  your  hav- 
ing tried  it  once 

I  have  thought  of  going  to  an- 
other university  next  winter 


B),  3)eutfd)e  gu  fein 
3d)  bin  bamit  gufrieben,  baft  bn  e8 

einmat  toerjudjt  tjaft 
3d)  t)abe   baran  gebad)t,   nadjften 

SBinter  auf  etne  anbere  Uni&erfttat 

in  ge^en 


PREPOSITIONS.  85 

prepositions. 

137.     1.   Prepositions  governing  the  Genitive: 

anftatt  or  flatt  instead  of  urn  . . .  NriUen  for  the  sake  of 

aufcerljalb  outside  of  mibefcfjabet  without  injury  to,  not- 

bieffettS  on  this  side  of  withstanding 

fjalber  for  the  sake  of  unfent,  umuett  not  far  from 

jenfettS  on  the  other  side  of  ungeadjtet  notwithstanding 

innerljafb  within  unterftalb  below 

fraft  by  virtue  of  oermoge  by  means  of 

Icings  along  uermittelft,  mittetfi  by  means  of 

lcwt  according  to  rofiljrenb  during 

oberljdb  above  ujcgen  on  account  of 

trofc  in  spite  of  gufolge  in  accordance  with 

2.  Prepositions  governing  the  Dative: 

cw8  out  of,  from  ncid)  after,  according  to 

auger  except,  beside  nadjft  next  to 

bei  near,  with,  by,  at  nebft,  famntt  together  with 

btnnen  within  (of  time)  feit  since 

gtetd)  like  t)on  from,  of,  by 

mit  with  $u  to,  at 

The  following  are  placed  after  their  substantives : 

entgegen  against  gu,  in  the  sense  of  toward,  in  the 

gegeniiber  opposite  to  direction  of 

gemcift  according  to  gufolge  according  to ;  when  placed 

nacf),    usually  placed  after  its  before  its  noun  it  requires  the 

noun  when  meaning  accord-  genitive 

ing  to  gunuber  contrary  to 

3.  Prepositions  governing  the  Accusative : 
bi8  till,  until  oljne  without 

bitvd)  through,  by  urn  about,  around,  at,  for 

fiir  for  tniber  against 

gcgen  against 

4.  The   following  prepositions   govern  the  Accusative  ■ 
when  direction  toward  an  object  or  goal  is  to  be  expressed, 
otherwise  the  Dative : 


86 


PREPOSITIONS. 


an  at,  by,  on 

auf  upon,  on 

Winter  behind 

in  in,  into 

neben  by  the  side  of,  by 

Thus: 

The  fish  was  swimming  in  the 
brook 

The  fish  swam  from  the  brook 
into  the  lake 

The  book  is  lying  on  the  table 

I  have  laid  the  book  on  the 
table 

We  could  see  to  the  very  bot- 
tom of  the  pond 

An  oil-painting  hung  over  his 
desk 

The  branches  of  this  old  tree 
hung  down  over  the  wall  so 
that  he  could  easily  reach 
them 

An  eagle  was  circling  over  the 
lake 

We  rowed  over  the  lake 


fiber  over,  above,  across 
unter  under,  among 
oor  before 
gttrifdjen  between 


2)cr  gifd)  |d)tt>amm  in  bem  93ad)e 

2)er  gifd)  fdjroamm  au8  bem  23ad)e 

in  ben  ©ee 
2)a«  23ud)  liegt  auf  bem  £ifdje 
3d)  f)abe  ba«  33ud)  auf  ben  fclfdj 

getegt 
2Bir  fonnten  bis  auf  ben  ©runb  be$ 

£etd)e8  fefyen 
(Sin  Olgemalbe   l)ing  fiber  feinem 

$ttttt 
3)ic  Sfte  btefeS  alten  23aume8  Ijingen 

fiber  bte  Waiter  fyermeber,  fo  baf? 

er  fie  letdjt  erfaffen  fonnte 

(Sin  Hbler  fretfte  fiber  bem  ©ee 
Sir  ruberten  fiber  ben  ©ee 


a.  When  used  to  express  other  than  strictly  local  or 
temporal  relations,  auf  and  iiber  generally  take  the  accu- 
sative : 


In  this  manner 

A  book  on  the  history  of  the 
Peasants'  War 


Stuf  btefe  SSeife 

(Sin  33ud)  fiber  bte  ©efd)itf)te  be6 
58auernfriege$ 


138.  In  English,  a  preposition  is  sometimes  placed 
after  the  noun  or  pronoun  to  which  it  belongs,  and 
quite  frequently,  particularly  in  familiar  discourse,  it  is 
even  placed  at  the  end  of   the  sentence.      In  German, 


CONJUNCTIONS.  87 

prepositions,  excepting  those  mentioned  in  135,  2,  should 
always  precede  their  nouns  or  pronouns : 

His  garden  he  was  particularly      2luf  (einen  ©arten  war  er  befonberS 

proud  of  ftotj 

I  asked  him  what  they  had      3d)  fvagte  ifnt,  fiber  tt)a8  (or  tt)or* 
quarrelled  about  fiber,  see  28,  2)  fie  ftdj  geftritten 

flatten 
a.   A  simple  adverb  of  place   or  direction,   however, 
forming  with  a  verb  an  idiomatic  expression   (see  131), 
naturally  stands  at  the  end  of  the  sentence : 
He  addressed  him  (5r  rebete  iljtt  an 

He  began  his  work  Qx  fing  fcine  Arbeit  an 

He  promised  it  to  him  (§r  fagte  e8  iljm  gu 

But 
He  said  to  him  dx  fagte  ju  iljm;  see  68 


v 


Conjunctions. 

1.     Co-ordinating  Conjunctions. 

139.  1.  a.  Simple  Connectives :  3l6er,  fonbem  (see  161, 
II)  but,  afletn  but,  benn  for,  nber  or,  entmeber . . .  ober 
either  . . .  or,  toebcr  . . .  noc^  neither . . .  nor.  Most  of  these 
do  not,  as  a  rule,  count  in  determining  the  place  of  the 
finite  verb ;  see  217. 

b.  Adverbial  Conjunctions,  i.  e.  properly  adverbs,  chiefly 
demonstrative,  used  to  establish  a  logical  relation  with 
the  preceding  sentence  or  clause  and  therefore  often  clas- 
sified as  conjunctions;  they  introduce  independent  sen- 
tences, and  should  be  immediately  followed  by  the  per- 
sonal verb  (see  214,  215).     The  most  important  are : 

atfo  therefore  befto  the  with  comparative;  see  191 

aud)  also  bodj,  bennod)  yet,  still,  however 

aufeerbem  besides  folglid)  consequently 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


ba  there,  then 

bann  then 

bafjer,  bafitr,  barum,  begfyatb,  beg* 

It)  eg  en   thence,  therefore,  on 

that  account 
barnad)  thereafter 
barauf  thereupon 
bagegen,  bafjtngegen,  Ijtngegen 

on  the  other  hand 
bemuad),  bemgemaft  accordingly 


inbeffen  meanwhile,  however 

tnttfyin  consequently 

nad)f)er  afterwards 

nod)  still,  yet 

fo  so,  thus,  then 

fonft  else,  otherwise,  generally 

tro^bem  nevertheless 

unterbeffen  meanwhile 

Dielme^r  rather 

Dormer  previously 


2.    Subordinating  Conjunctions. 
2.  These  require  the  finite  verb  to  stand  at  the  end  of 


the  clause  (see  236). 
al8  as,  when,  than 
bettor  before 
big  until 

ba  since,  as,  because 
bcimit  in  order  that 
baft  that,  in  order  that 
el)e  before 
falls  in  case 

tnbem,  inbeg,  inbeffen  while,  as 
je   the  with  comparative ;    see 

191 
nadjbem  after 
nun  now  that 


The  most  important  are : 

ob  if,  whether 

obgteid),  obfd)on,  obtnoljt  although 

feit,  feitbem  since 

jo  as  before  adjectives  or  adverbs, 

see  152,  2  a 
nngeadjtet  notwithstanding 
tnafyrenb  while 
tuenn  if,  when 
toemt  .  .  .  audj,  tnenn  . .  •  gletd), 

menu  . . .  fdjon  although 
met!  because 
ttrie  how,  as 


140.  After  a  temporal  adverbial  clause,  bet  is  often 
used  to  sum  up  the  contents  of  the  clause,  introductory 
to  the  principal  clause  ;  f o  is  used  similarly  after  conces- 
sive and,  occasionally,  after  causal  and  temporal  clauses ; 
in  concessive  clauses,  jo  is  often  strengthened  by  a  follow- 
ing bod) ;  see  221 : 

When  he  saw  the  policeman,      9118  er  ben  ^oligiften  falj,  [ba  or  fo] 
he  ran  away  lief  er  fort 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  89 

If  you  say  this,  you  do  an  in-  SBenn  bu  bag  fagft,   [fo]  tljuft  bu 

justice  to  your  friend  bctncm  5$™unbe  llnved)t 

Although  he  has  never  been  in  Dbgletd)  er  nie  in  3)eutfcf)latib  mar, 

Germany,    [yet]    he   speaks  [fo]    tyrttfjt    cr    bod)    red)t    gut 

German  very  well  2)eutfd) 

141.     Subordinating  conjunctions  require  finite  verbs 
in  German : 

If   in  town    next  Monday,    I  SScnn  td)  nadjften  9flontag  in  brr 

shall  call  on  you  ©tabt  bin,  tocrbe  id)  ©ic  auj* 

fudjen 

Although  still  young,  he  had  Dbgletd)  cr  nod)  jmtg  toar,  fo  rjntte 

acquired  quite  a  reputation  cr  fid)  bod)  jdjon  cincn  giemlidjcn 

as  a  painter  $Ruf  ai8  9ftater  crworbeu 

Since  returning  to  the  city,  I  @citbem  id)  ttucber  in  bcr  @tabt 

have  learned  of  the  death  of  bin,  f)abe  id)  Don  bcm  £obc  ciueS 

an  old  friend  alten  grcimbeS  geljort 

When  finished,  this  building  SBcnn  btcfcS  ©ebciubc  fcrtig  ift,  ttrirb 

will  be  the  largest  in  the  city  e8  ba8  grofjte  in  bcr  <Stabt  fcin 


XEbe  flDost  flmportant  Englisb  B&verbs,  prepo* 

sitions  an&  Conjunctions,  fn  Blpbabetical 

©rber,  witb  tbeir  Oerman  Equivalents, 

142.  In  English,  the  same  word  may  sometimes  be 
used  as  a  preposition,  an  adverb,  and  a  conjunction,  and, 
more  frequently,  the  same  word  may  be  used  in  two  of 
these  three  capacities.  In  German,  this  is  less  often  the 
case.  It  is  therefore  important  to  exercise  care  in  trans- 
lating these  particles,  so  that  a  word  which  is  used  as  a 
conjunction  may  not  be  rendered  by  a  word  which  is  only 
used  as  a  preposition.     Thus : 


90 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


After  the  performance    {Prep.) 
After    the    performance    was 

over  (Conj.) 
Three  hours  after  (Adv.) 

143.     About.   I.  Adv.    1. 
wmtjer  : 

He  ran  about 

There  was  water  all  about 


9?atf)  ber  SBorfteUung 

Wadjbem    bic   SBorfteHung    beenbet 

mar 
S)rei  ©tunben  nadjljer 

=  around,  in  a  circle,  fjcrum, 

<£x  lief  umfjer,  or  Ijerum 
(§3  toar  SSaffer  rings  umfyer 


2.  =  near,  in  ber  Sftafye,  t)ier  l)eutm,  ba  Return : 


He  is  about  here  somewhere 

Whereabout 

His  whereabouts 

He  is  about  again  (=  he  is  in 

this  neighborhood  again) 
(=  he  is  up  again) 


(5r  ift  l)ter  trgenbtoo  in  ber  Waty 

2Bo,  too  Ijentm 

@ein  2litfentl)alt3ort 

(§r  ift  toieber  l)ier  in  ber  Wdty 


(5r  ift  toieber  aitf  ben  SBeinen 
II.  Prep.    1.  =  around,  in  a  circle,  urn,  often  strength- 
ened by  a  following  umfjer,  or  Return  (see  134,  3),  or  by  a 
preceding  rtng3,  or  by  both : 

[9ftug§]  urn  ba&  §ctu$  [Ijerum]  ift 

tin  ©arten 
<£x  lief  urn  ben  23aum  fyerum 


There  is  a  garden  all  about  the 

house 
He  ran  about  the  tree 


2.  =  in  (on)  or  about : 

Books  and  papers  were  scat- 
tered about  the  floor 

The  children  played  about  the 
yard 

3.  =  of,  itfcer : 

He  spoke  about  the  origin  of 
the  Faust  legend 

4.  =  with  reference  to,  concerning,  mit  Skjug  auf  (with 
ace.) : 

I  was  wrong  about  the  year  of      3d)  toar  im  3rrtum  mit  33egug  auf 
his  birth  fein  ©ebitrtsjafyr 


SBitdjer  unb  ^aptere  lagen  gerftreut 

auf  bem  33oben  umfjer 
S)ie  $inber  fjnetten  auf  bem  £ofe 

umljer 


dx  fpradj  fiber  ben  Urfprung   ber 
gauftfage 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


91 


5.  =  nearly,  more  or  less,  ungefafjr  (adv.) : 


He  had  about  a  hundred  men 
It  was  about  3  o'clock 
She  came  about  three  o'clock 
He  is  about  to  leave 


(5r  fyatte  ungefafjr  tymbert  Wlami 
(S3  roar  ungefaljr  3  Ul)r 
©ie  fam  ungefa'ljr  um  brei  U^r 
(5r  if*  im  93egrtffe,  abgureijcn 


144.     Above.     I.  Adv.     Dben;  after  a  verb  of  motion, 
naclj  oben,  or  fjinauf : 


He  is  above 
To  go  above 
Over  and  above 

The  above;    the  above-men- 
tioned 


(§r  ift  oben 

Wad)  oben  (or  Ijinauf)  geljen 

Wodj  obenbrein 

25er  obtge ;  ber  oben  ertoalnate 


II.  Prep.     1.  =  over,  higher  than,  fiber : 

Above  the  level  of  the  sea  fiber  ber  9fteere8oberflad)e 


2.       more  than,  fiber : 
Above  five  thousand 


fiber  fiinftaufenb,  or  meljr  at8  fimf* 
taufenb 


3.  =  beyond,  beside,  aufter : 

Over  and  above  what  his  busi-      9?odj  auger  bem,  toa8  iljm  fetn  @e= 
ness  yields  him  fd)aft  emtragt 


4.  Idioms: 

Above  all  things  (=  first  of  all 

things) 
(=  more  than  all  other  things) 
Be  above  one  (occupy  a  higher 

position) 
Those  above  me 
Be  above  something 
Above  praise 
It  is  above  me 


$or  alien  2)ingen 

fiber  afleS 

fiber  jemanbem  fieljen 

2Mne  SSorgefefcten 
fiber  ettr>a8  erfjaben  fetn 
fiber  atteS  2ob  erfyaben 
2>a$  gefyt  iiber  tnetnen  SBerjianb 


92  ADVERBS,   ETC. 

145.  Across.     I.  Adv.    Srii&en ;  after  a  verb  of  motion, 
Ijeru&er,  fjtnuber  (see  133) : 

He  sailed  across  to  England  (Sr  fegelte  mtf)  (Sngfonb  Ijtmiber 

Come  across  and  visit  me  lomm  Ijeriiber  unb  befucfye  mid) 

II.  Prep.     1.  Denoting  situation,  auf  ber  anberen  @ette, 
jenfett3 : 

The  country  across  the  great      3)a8  £anb  jenfeit  be8  grogen  gluffeS 
river 

2.  Denoting  direction,    after  a  verb  of  motion,*  iiber, 

often  strengthened  by  tjeriikr,  Ijimtber  (see  134,  3) : 

The  bird  flew  across  the  brook      £)er  $ogel  flog  iiber  ben  23adj  Ijin* 

iiber 
We  walked  across  the  bridge        2Sir  gittgeu  iiber  bie  SBriicfe 

3.  =  upon. 

I  come  across  him  once  in  a  3d)  begegne  il)m  gunieifen 

while 

I  came  across  a  difficult  pas-  §eute   Sftorgen   bin   idj   auf    etne 

sage  this  morning  jcr)tt)iertge  <SteEe  geftogen 

146.  After.    I.  Adv.    Sftadjijer,  barauf,  [pater,  fytnterf)cr: 

A  few  hours  after  (Sinige  @tnnben  \pixttx 

Many  years  after  Stfiele  3al)re  uad)f)er 

II.  Prep.     1.  Usually,  nad) : 

After  the  concert  9tad)  bent  (Concert 

After  three  days  Watf)  bret  Sag  en 

One  after  another  (Siner  nacb  bent  anbern,  nadj  em* 

anber 
After  an  old  pattern  Wa&i  einent  atten  SJhifter 

After  all  2)od),  nun  bod),  tro£  aUebem 

2.  =  m  accordance  with,  nadj,  gemaft,  jufolge,  all  three 
usually  following  the  noun. 

3.  Instead  of  using  the  preposition  nad),  the  adverb 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


93 


nctcf)  may  be  added  to  the  verb,  which  then  takes  the 
simple  dative : 

The  artist  has  fashioned  this 

lamp  after  an  old  pattern 
I  rode  after  (i.  e.  followed)  him 

as  rapidly  as  I  could 


2)er  $itnjHer  I)at  biefe  ?ampe  cincm 
alten  3ftufter  nadjgebilbet 

3d)  ritt  if)m  nad)  fo  frf>nett  (see  152, 
2  a)  id)  fonnte 


4.  After,  with  a  verbal  noun  in  -m#,  should  be  ren- 
dered by  a  subordinate  clause  introduced  by  nadjbem  (see 
128,  5): 


After  consulting  a  physician, 
he  decided  to  go  to  Karlsbad 

III.  Conj.    9?atf)bem: 

After  he  had  finished  his  stu- 
dies he  returned  to  America 


sJ?ad)bem  er  einen  $rgt  urn  $at  ge* 
fragt  fiatte,  entfdjlojj  er  fid),  nad) 
$art8bab  311  gefyen 


9?ad)bem  er  feine  ©tubien  beenbig* 
Ijatte,  fel)rtc  er  nad)  2lmerifa  gu* 
rllcf 


147. 

gegen : 


Against     1.  Prep.    Ordinarily,  gegen,  toiber,  tat* 


We  had  to  row  against  the 
current 

He  studied  law  against  his  fa- 
ther's wishes 

He  leaned  against  the  pillar 


2Bir  mugten    gegen    ben    ©trom 

rubem 
(Sr  ftubterte  bie  3?ed)te  gegen  ben 

SSunfrf)   feineS  SBaterS,   or  bent 

2Bunfd)e  feineS  Waters  entgegen 
(Sr  leljnte  ftdt)  gegen  {or  an)  ben 

^feller 

2.  =  in  expectation  of,  looking  forward  to : 

I  warn  you  against  his  treach-  3d)  roarne  ©ie  tjor  feiner  Sreuloftg* 

ery  feit 

I  am  prepared  against  an  at-  3d)  bin  auf  einen  2utgriff  Dorbereitet 

tack 


148.     Ago.     Adv. : 

Many  years  ago 
A  few  minutes  ago 


Bor  otelen  3aljren 
$or  roenigen  2ftinuten 


94  ADVERBS,  ETC. 

A  week  (fortnight)  ago  $or  ad)t  (Dier$el)n)  £agen 

It  is  not  very  long  ago  (gg  ift  nod)  nid)t  langc  \)tx 

It  may  have  been  thirty  years  (g«  mag  nun  breifjig  3af)re  fyei  teitt, 
ago,  when,  etc.  cu%  :c. 

149.  Along.    I.  Adv.   §tn,  baljtn;  l)er,  baf)er  (see  133): 

X^        He  walked    along   buried   in  3n  tiefen  ©ebcmfen  ging  er  baljtn 
J?    ^         thought 

&(     fvHe  came    along   whistling   a  Sin  Sltebdjen  pfetfenb,  !am  cr  baljer 
song 

Take  him  along  with  you  Sftimm  iljit  mit;  see  209.  1  a 

Go  along !  $atf e  bid) !  or  gort  mit  bir ! 

II.  Prep.    Sanger 

Along  the  railroad,  we  saw      ScingS  ber  (Sifenbaljn  faljen  ttrir  oiete 
many  traces  of  the  inunda-         ©puren  ber  Uberfd)tt)emmwtg 
tion 

a.  Instead  of  the  preposition  Iang3,  the  adverb  enttcmg 
may  be  used,  following  either  an  accusative  denoting  way 
or  distance  (see  79,  2),  or  a  noun  dependent  on  a  prepo- 
sition; enticing  is  most  frequently  used  with  verbs  of 
motion : 

We  walked  along  the  bank  of      SSir  gingen  ba&  Ufer  {or  cm  htm 
the  brook  Ufer)  beg  33adje8  entlang 

150.  Although.  Conj.  Dbgteid),  ofifdjon,  obtoot)t,  toerm 
and)  (even  if) ;  and)  is  generally  separated  from  toemt  by 
the  subject,  and  sometimes  also  by  other  elements  of  the 
clause;  in  stately  discourse,  gteid)  and  fdjott  are  often 
separated  by  06 ;  see  140,  220 : 

Although    this    first   attempt  Obgtetd)  ber  erfrc  SSerfndj  (or  oh  ber 

failed,  he  was  not  discour-  erfte  SBerfnd)  gleid))  miglang,  fo 

aged  toerlor  er  bod)  ben  9ftut  nidjt 

Although  he  may  not  like  it,  SBenn  e8  iljm  and)  nid)t  gefaflt,  fo 

he  will  have  to  submit  nurb  er  ftd)  bod)  fiigcn  muff  en 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  95 

151.  Around.     Adv.  and  Prep.     See  About,  143. 

152.  As.     Conj.    1.  In  comparisons,  the  demonstrative 

as,  for  which  so  may  often  be  substituted,  should  always 

be  translated  by  f o : 

As  proud  as  a  king  ©0  ftotg  tt)ic  eiu  ftMg 

As  soon  as  possible  ©obatb  al$  mogtid) 

a.   Of  course,  fo  may  be  omitted  under  the  same  cir- 
cumstances under  which  as  may  be  omitted  in  English : 
Proud  as  a  Spaniard  ©tola  toie  zw  ©panier 

2.  The  relative  as  of  a  comparison  may  be  rendered  by 

ate  or  luie ;   as  a  rule,  luie  refers  to  quality  and  manner, 

and  denotes  similarity ;  ate  refers  to  quantity  and  degree, 

and  denotes  identity : 

As  beautiful  as  a  flower  @o  fd)bn  toie  cine  SBhime 

As  heavy  as  lead  ©o  fdjroer  al8  231ei 

He  was  received  as  it  behooved  G?r  nntrbe  empfangeit,  nne  e8  cincm 

a  king  $otuge  gebiifyrte 

I  read  as  much  as  I  could  3d)  lag  fo  Diet,  al8  id)  !onntc 

a.  After  an  adjective  or  adverb  preceded  by  fo,  the  ate 

or  ftrie  that  would  naturally  introduce  a  following  clause 

of  comparison  may  be  omitted  without  any  other  change 

in  the  clause : 

I  shall  come  as  soon  as  I  can        3d)  oierbe  fommcn  fobalb  [at8]  id) 

fatm 
As  far  as  I  understand  it  ©o  toeit  [tt)ie]  id)  e8  oerjtelje 

b.  Such  clauses,  either  with  or  without  audj  (see  165,  3), 

are  often  used  in  a  concessive  sense : 

As  rich  as  he  is,  (however  rich      @o  retd)  [at$,  or  fine]  er  [audj]  tft, 
he  may  be,)  yet  he  is  not         [fo]  ifi  er  bod)  nidjt  gUitflid) 
happy 

(See  170,  2.) 


96  ADVERBS,   ETC. 

c.  As  if,  as  though  is  aU  tueitn,  aU  06,  or  tote  tocnn ; 

after  al§,  the  usual  substitution  of  the  interrogative  order 

for  the. conjunctions  toenn  or  06  may  be  made  (see  171,  2): 

He  looked  as  if  (as  though)  he  ($r  Jal)  au§,  al8  ob  (or  al§  toenn,  or 
had  been  sick  ttrie  toenn)  er  franf  getoefen  toare 

(see  118,  2),  or  al8  tt?are  er  franf 
getoefen 

3.  J.s,  expressing  identity,  is  always  al$ ;  see  9 : 

They  received  him   as   their  ©ie  entpfmgen  iljn  at$  il)ren  tonig 

king  (£.  e.  he  was  to  be  their 

king) 

As  an  American  (i.  e.  being  an  9H8  teerifaner  ift  er  natMidj  ein 

American)  he  naturally  be-  $nl)anger  ber  repubUfcmifdjen  9te* 

lieves  in  the  republican  form  gierongSform 

of  government 

He  went  into  the  camp  of  the  (Sr  ging  aid  ©piort  tn8  feinbiicfye 

enemy  as  a  spy  £ager 

He  disguised  himself  as  a  sol-  (§:r  toerf leibete  fidj  aid  @o(bat 

dier 

4  The  conjunction  as,  when  used  in  a  purely  temporal 
sense,  and  referring  to  an  individual  act  or  condition  in 
the  past,  is  ctt£,  more  rarely  one : 

As  I  opened  the  door,  I  saw  2U$  (or  toie)  id)  Me  Zt\uv  aufmatfjte, 
him  passing  falj  id)  tf)tt  Doriibergeljen 

5.  When  expressing  cause  (often  combined  with  time), 
as  should  be  translated  by  ba : 

As  he  had  no  money,  he  had  to  2)a  er  f  ein  ©elb  Ijatte,  mugte  er  gu 

stay  at  home  £cwfe  bleiben 

As  the  art  of  printing  was  not  S)a  bie  SBndjbruderfnnft  nodj  nidjt 

yet  invented,    books    were  erfnnben  toar,  fo  toaren  23iid)cv  git 

very  expensive  at  that  time  jener  £tit  fe^r  teuer 

6.  In  the  sense  of  as  soon  as,  as  fast  as,  as  should  be 
rendered  by  fofcalb  (see  2  a),  foune,  or  tote : 


ADVERKS,    ETC.  97 

As  the  printed  sheets  come  ©obctfb  bit  gebrutften  93ogea  au§ 
from  the  press,  they  are  ber  $reffe  fommen,  ttjcrbeu  fie  ge* 
dried  and  folded  trodnet  unb  gefaltet 

7.  According  as,  je  nacljbcm : 

The  prince  generally  granted  2)er  prf*  pflegte  fotdje  ©efucfye  $u 

or  refused  such  requests,  ac-  benriUtgen  ober  gu  tterroeigem,  je 

cording  as  he  was  in  good  or  liadjbem  er  gut  ober  libel  gefaunt 

bad  humor  roar 

153.    At.     Prep.     1.  =  close  ly,  art,  bet : 

At  the  window  %m  genfter 

At  the  table  $m  SHfdje 

At  the  door  %\\  ber  5£ljur 

2.  =  in  or  about,  auf,   particularly  when  speaking  of 

large  buildings,  public  places,  institutions,  and  gatherings : 

At  the  castle  2luf  bem  ©djtoffe,  auf  ber  SBurg 

At  the  city  hall  2Utf  bem  $cttljcmfe 

At  the  post-office  2luf  ber  $oft 

At  the  court-house  9luf  bem  ©erid)t 

At  the  market  5tuf  bem  2Jtartt 

At  the  university  9Utf  ber  Uuiberjttat 

At  the  exhibition  2tuf  ber  2tu§ftetlung 

At  the  synod  Sluf  ber  ©t)nobe 

At  the  ball  5luf  bem  «atte 

3.  at  the  house  of,  bet : 

At  my  friend's  23ei  meinem  greunbe 

4.  Before  names  of  towns,  in,  more  rarely  jit : 
At  Wetzlar  3n  (or  ju)  SSefclar 

5.  =  toward: 

He  rushed  at  him  (gr  fliirjte  ouf  ilm  lo8,  or  auf  ttm  gu 

He  threw  a  stone  at  him  (Sr  roarf  mit  einem  ©teiue  nad)  ifym 

6.  To  express  the  time  of  day,  urn : 


98 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


At  what  time  are  you  coming  ? 


Urn  roietriet  UI)r  (or  um  roetrf)e  3eit, 
more  rarely  gu  roeldjer  gett) 
fommft  bu? 

Um  fteben  Utjr 

Urn  f)db  fteben  Utjr 

Um  ein  SBiertel  [auf]  fiinf 

Um  brei  SBtertel  [auf]  fttnf 

3u  2ftittag,  or  mittagS ;  see  60 
3n  ber  9?acf)t,  or  nad)t8 
3u  ber  2)ammerung 


At  seven  o'clock 
At  half  past  six 
At  a  quarter  past  four 
At  a  quarter  of  five 

But 
At  noon 
At  night 
At  dawn 

7.  After  verbs  denoting  feelings  or  emotions,  iifcer : 

He  wondered  at  the  sight  <§r  rounberte  fict)  itber  ben  $nbUtf 

She  was  grieved  at  his  ingrati-      ©ie  roar  befiimmert  uber  feine  Un* 
tude  ban!bar!eit 

8.  Idioms: 

at  the  age  of  im  2Uter  toon 

at  all  iibertjaupt 

not  at  all  gar  nidjt 

nothing  at  all  gar  ntdjtS 

at  the  beginning  im  (am)  2ln* 

fange,  anfangS,  anfangltd) 
at  church  in  ber  $ird)e 
at  a  command  auf  einen  33efe^l 
at  court  t>or  ©eridtjt 
at  dinner  beim  2ftittageffen 
at  an  end  gu  (Snbe 
at  the  end  am  (Snbe,  gute^t 
at  all  events    auf  jeben  gall, 

jebcnfatts 
at  my  expense  auf  meine  Soften 
at  fault  im  Unredjt 
at  first  guerft 
at  home  gu  $aufe 
at  last  gutefct 
at  least  roentgens 
at  length  gulefct,  enbUd) 
at  liberty  in  greifyeit 


at  most  IjbdjftenS 

at  peace  in  grieben 

at  your  pleasure  nad)  betnem  SBe* 

Iteben 
at  that  price  gu  jeuem  $retfe 
at  the  risk  of  his  life  mit  ©efafyr 

feineS  2eben8  . 
at  the  risk  of  losing  his  friendship 

auf  bie  ©efafyr  l)iu,  feine  greunb* 

frfjaft  gu  berlteren 
at  school  in  ber  ©djute 
at  sea  auf  ©ee,  auf  ber  ©ee,  gur 

©ee 
at  the  theater  im  Sweater 
at  times  juroeilen 
at  any  time  gu  jeber  $eit 
at  no  time  niemalS 
at  supper  beim  Slbenbeffen 
at  table  bet  £tfd)e 

at  that  time  gu  jener  £tit 
at  work  an  ber  Arbeit 


\ 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  99 

154.  Because.     I.  Conj.     SBeil,  bet: 

He  cannot  come,  because  he  is      (Sr  fann  nid)t  lotmnen,  toett  (or  bo) 
sick  er  franf  ijl 

II.  Because  of.    Prep.     SBegen: 

He  could  not  come,  because  of      (5r  fonntc  toegen  be8  SftegenS  nutyt 
the  rain  fommcn 

155.  Before.  I.  Adv.  1.  Of  place,  born ;  after  a  verb 
of  motion,  Dorcm. 

Before  and  behind  $om  unb  tyinten 

2.  Expressing  time,  uortjer,  friitjcr,  efjcr,  fdjon,  fcretfcS: 

He  had  been  there  before  (Sr  War  fdjott  frii^cr  bageroefen 

This  had  never  happened  be-      2)ie8  ttmr  nod)  nte  gefdjeljen 
fore 

II.  Prep.     1.  Usually,  uor: 

Before  the  house  $or  bent  £aufe 

The  servant  stepped  before  him      2)er  3)iener  trat  Dor  tljn 

Before  sunrise  23or  <Sonnenaufgang 

2.  Before  with  a  verbal  noun  in  -m^  should  be  ren- 
dered by  a  subordinate  clause  introduced  by  one  of  the 
conjunctions  named  below;  see  118,  5. 

III.  Conj.    gfje,  uorbem,  bettor : 

He  played  the  violin  before  he      (§r  foiette  btc  ©eige,  elje   er  lefen 
could  read  fonnte 

156.  Behind.  I.  Adv.  §tnten;  when  denoting  direc- 
tion, nad)  fjtnten : 

I  saw  enemies  before  and  be-      3d)  fal)  geinbe  com  unb  Ijinten 

hind  * 

From  behind  $on  Ijinten 

I  sent  a  servant  behind  3d)  fd)icfte  einen  2)iener  ttad)  Ijinten 

He  left  his  wife  behind  (§r  Ueg  fein  SScib  guriicf 

Look  behind  yourself  <2>iel)  bid)  urn 

You  are  still  far  behind  £)u  bift  nod)  IPeit  priid 


iOO  ADVERfcS,   ETC. 

II.  Prep.     1.  §inter: 

The  robber  was  lying  in  wait      £)er   dauber   latterte    Winter   bem 

behind  the  tree  33anme 

He  took  refuge  behind  the  rock      (5r  fliid)tete  ftd)  Winter  ben  gelfen 

2.  Sometimes,  behind  may  be  expressed  by  the  adverb 

mid),  the  verb  then  taking  a  simple  dative  (see  70) : 

She  is  not  behind  her  sister  in      ©ie  fleljt  Ujrer  ©djtueftev  an  gleifj 
industry  nid)t  nad) 

157.  Below.  I.  Adv.  Unten ;  when  expressing  direc- 
tion, narf)  unten,  l)tnunter,  tjerunter  (see  133) : 

You  will  find  Mr.  S.  below  ©ie  merben  £errn  ©.  unten  finben 

The  captain  has  gone  below  S)er  $apitcin  tft  nad)  unten  (or  f)in* 

unter)  gegangen 
Come  below  !  $ommt  Ijerunter ! 

II.  Prep.     Unter: 

Below  the  bridge  Unter  ber  (or  bie,  see  127, 4)  23rMe 

Below  cost  Unter  bem  ^oftenpreife 

Below  his  dignity  Unter  feiner  SBiirbe 

Below  criticism  Unter  aEer  $ritif 

158.  Beside.     Prep.     1.  =  by  the  side  of  neben : 

She  sat  down  beside  her  mother      ©te  je(3te  ftd)  neben  tljre  aflutter 

2.  =  over  and  above,  outside  of  (usually  besides),  aufcer : 

Besides  the  doctor,  there  were      Sluger  bem  $U*gte  roaren  nod)  fiinf 

five  persons  in  the  room  ^erfonen  im  3itnmer 

Nobody  besides  myself  Sftiemanb  auger  mir,   or  ntemanb 

alg  id) 

3.  Beside  (or  besides)  with  a  verbal  noun  in  -ing  should 
be  rendered  by  a  subordinate  clause 'introduced  by  anfter 
bak  (see  128,  5) : 

Besides   refusing   to   pay  the      Stufjerbem  baft  er  fid)  tneigerte,  bie 
bill,  he  also  insulted  me  $ed)nung  &u  beaten,  beleibigte 

er  midj  nod) 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


101 


4.  Figuratively: 
Beside  one's  self  with  rage 


5Iu6er  fid)  t)or  SButf) 


159.  Besides.     I.  Adv.     UberbieS,  aufcerbem : 

Besides,  he  is  my  friend  UberbieS  ift  er  metn  greunb 

Nobody  besides  (i.  e.  nobody      Niemanb  anberS,  jonft  niemanb 
else) 

II.  Prep.     See  Beside,  2,  3. 

160.  Beyond.    I.  Adv.    2)aru6er  l)mcut3,  toetter  (jinau£ : 

He  shot  much  beyond  (5r  fdjog  tt»eit  bariibcr  fyxiaM 

They  live  far  beyond  ©ie  tt)ol)iten  Diel  tt)eiter  fyinauS 

II.  Prep.  1.  =  on  the  other  side  jenfeit§ ;  after  a  verb 
expressing  motion,  iiber,  often  strengthened  by  a  follow- 
ing IjtnctuS  (see  134,  3) : 

Beyond  this  forest  3enfettS  btefeS  SBalbeS,   or  Ijintcr 

biefem  SSalbc 
Beyond  the  sea  3etrjeit§  be$  3fteere8 

He  shot  beyond  the  mark  @r  fdf)og  fiber  ba8  3W  fyinaug 

2.  =  outside  of,  except,  cwfter : 

Beyond  his  nearest  relatives,      Stager  feinen  ncidjften  SBerttmnbten 
nobody  was  admitted  ttmrbe  niemanb  gugelaffen 


3.  Idioms: 

Beyond  belief,  beyond  credit 
Beyond  dispute,  beyond  doubt 

Beyond    description,    beyond 

expression 
That  is  beyond  me 
Beyond  measure 

Beyond  my  reach 
Beyond  recovery 


UngfcmbUd) 

Dime  3tt)eifet,  0tme  alien  Btvttftl, 

ungttjeifefl)aft,  unftreitig 
UnbejdjreibUdj,  unjagUd) 

£>a«  ger)t  iiber  meine  iBegriffc 
Uber  bie  Wlafyn,  iiber  alle  Wlaftm, 

ubermagtg 
Hufcer  meinem  $3eretd)e 
Unrettbar 


102  ADVERBS,   ETC. 

161.  But.    I.  Prep.     1.  =  except,  aitfter,  aU  : 

I  speak  no  language  but  Eng-  3d)  fpredje  nur  (Snglifd),  or  nid)t8 
lish  ate  (SngUfd),    or  feine   ©pradje 

auger  (Suglifd) 

But  for  him,  I  should  have  2Benn  er  nid)t  gettefen  tocire,  tnarc 
fallen  id)  gef alien 

2.  =  only,  nur;  erft  (see  198,  2): 

He  had  but  a  few  pennies  in  (Sr  Ijatte  nur  roentge  pfennig e  in 

his  pocket  ber  Xafdje 

He  had  but  half  finished  his  (Sr  Ijatte  feine  Arbeit  erft  Ijalb  »ol= 

work,  when  he  was  called  lenbet,  at«  er  abgerufen  ttntrbe 

away 

II.  Conj.  Slber,  fonbern.  Two  ideas  absolutely  exclud- 
ing one  another  are  contrasted  by  jonberrt,  hence  fonbern 
can  be  used  only  after  a  negative ;  two  ideas  forming  a 
contrast,  but  not  absolutely  excluding  one  another,  are 
contrasted  by  ctber : 

Not  large,  but  small  -Kid)!  grog,  fonbern  fleiu 

Small,  but  pretty  $Iein,  aber  fyiibfd) 

This  is  not  French,  but  Italian      2)ie8  ift  nidjt  grangbftfd),  fonbern 

StatiattW 
This  is  French,  but  very  poor      2)ie8  ift  gran$oftfd),  aber  fefjr  fd)led)* 
French  tee  granjoftfd) 

162.  By.     I.  Adv.    1.  =  close  by,  hard  by  [bttf)t]  babet, 

[bidjt]  baneben,  [bidjt]  baran : 

He  stood  by  and  laughed  (§r  ftanb  babei  nnb  ladjte 

Those  standing  by  2)ie  Umftefyenben 

2.  =  past :  borbet,  ooruber : 

The  captain  rides  by  every  day      £)er  §auptmann  rette.  jeben  Sag 

Dorbet,  or  fcoriiber 
The  passers-by  2>ie  SBoriibergefyenben 

3. 

By  and  by  9?ad)ften8,  balb,  aUmd^Iig 

By  the  by  2tyropo8,  nebaujer 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  103 

II.  Prep.  1.  =  near  by,  close  by,  by  the  side  of,  bet,  an, 
iteben : 

By  the  bridge  %xi  ber  SBrutfe 

He  sat  by  his  friend  (§r  fag  bei  (or  neben)  feinem  greunbe 

After  a  verb  expressing  motion,  bet  should  not  be  used. 

2.  =  on  or  before : 

It  must  be  finished  by  Monday      (58  mug  am  {or  Dor)  2ftontag  fcrtig 

fein 
He  must  be  back  by  6  o'clock       (5r  mug  urn  {or  oor)  6  Uljr  gurud* 

fein 
By  this  time  he  was  thorough-      (5r  toat  {efct  {or  mtttlerttmle)  tooU* 
ly  tired  pnbig  ermattct 

3.  =  past :  an,  bet . . .  borbet,  tooruber : 

We  sailed  by  a  lighthouse  SBtr  fegelten  an  einem  2eud)tturm 

Doriiber,  or  oorbet  #^. 

4.  =  by  way  of,  fiber :  / 
I  came  by  Strassburg                   3d)  bin  xiber  ©trafibnrg  gefommen 

5.  =  by  means  of,  burd) : 

He  sent  the  letter  by  a  mes-  <£x  fanbte   ben  S3rief   burd)   cincn 

senger  93oten 

The  church  was  destroyed  by  £)ie  $ird)e  ttmrbe  burd)  geuer  ger* 

fire  ftbrt 

By  practice  2)urd)  Ubung 

6.  To  denote  the  agent,  after  a  passive  verb,  Don,  or, 
unless  the  verb  expresses  feeling  or  emotion,  bitrdj;  to 
denote  the  author  of  a  book  or  a  work  of  art,  t)on : 

He  was  esteemed  by  all  who      (5r  ttmrbe  toon  alien,  bie  iljn  tannten, 

knew  him  gead)tet 

The  castle  of  Heidelberg  was      2)a8  §eibetberger  ©djtog  ttmrbe  Don 

destroyed  by  the  French  ben  (or  burd)  bie)  grangofen  ger* 

ftort 
This  poem  is  by  Schiller  3)iefe«  ©ebidjt  ift  Don  @d)iKer 


104  ADVERBS,   ETC. 

7.  =  according  to,  nad) : 

By  my  watch  Wad}  meiner  Uljr 

By  your  description  Wad)  beiner  Mugabe 

8.  To  express  measure  or  number : 

They    sell    chickens    by   the  2Jten  oerfauft  juuge  §iiljuer  nadj 

pound  bem  $fmtb 

By   the   dozen    (i  e.   several  2)u£eubn)eife,  or  \a  Smfceubeu 

dozens) 

By  the  hundred  #uuberttt)etfe,  or  $u  £uuberteu 

,  a.  To  express  a  difference  in  measure  or  number,  use 
urn,  or  simply  the  accusative  (see  79,  1) : 

He  is  older  than  his  sister  by  (§r  ift  [urn]  10  3al)re  alter  al8  feme 

ten  years  ©djtuefter 

We  were  ahead  by  one  boat-  2Bir  toctren   [urn]  eine   33ootlciuge 

length  toorauS 

9.  By,  with  a  verbal  noun  in  -ing,  should  be  rendered 

by  a  subordinate  clause  introduced  by  tnbem  or  baburd) 

ba$  (see  128,  5) : 

He  aroused  the  sympathy  of  (gr  erroedte  bct8  Sftitletb  ber  23iirger, 

the  citizens  by  pretending  to  inbem  {or  baburd)  baft)  er  oorgab 

be  an  old  soldier  er  totire  ein  alter  @olbat 

10.  Idioms: 

•  by  birth  toon  ©eburt  by  means  of  mitteljt 

by  chance  burtf)  3"faH,  gnfcilCig  by  no  means  auf  feinen  gall,  fei* 

by  day  bei  £age,  day  by  day,  neStoegS 

£ag  fiir  Xag  know  by  name  bem  Sftamen  nad) 

by  degrees  aEmafylid)  fennen 

by  experience  an$  (Srfaljrung  by  name  of  tautens 

by  force  mit  ©eroalt  one  by  one  einer  natf)  bem  anberrt 

by  hand  mit  ber  §anb  by  profession  t>ou  SBeruf 

by  heart  auSroeubtg  by  one's  self  fur  ftd) 

by  land  m  Xante  by  trade  Dou  ©etuerbe,  bem  ©e* 

by  letter  briefttd)  merbe  uad) 

little  by  little  aumcifylid)             »  by  way  of    -roeife ;    by  way  of 

by  all  means  auf  jeben  gall,  auf  trial  toerfud)§roeife 

aUe  gaUe,  jebeufalls  by  the  way  beilciuftg 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  105 

163.  Down.    Adv.    Unten  ;  after  a  verb  of  motion,  ijitt- 

itrtter,  fjtnctb,  fjerunter,  fyerab  (see  133) : 

My  sister  is  down  stairs  9fteine  ©d)me(ter  ifl  unten 

She  came  down  stairs  (Sic  fam  fyerunter 

She  came  down  the  stairs  ©ie  fam  bie  Xxtppt  fyerunter 

The    stone    rolled   down  the      2)er  ©tein  rotlte  ben  SBerg  Ijimmter, 
mountain  fyinab 

164.  Either.    I.  Pron.     See  40. 

II.  Conj.     1.  Hither . . .  or,  enttoeber .  ♦ .  ober ;  see  217 : 

I   shall   spend   next  summer  SRadjften  @ommer   roerbe  id)  cut* 

either  in  England  or  in  Nor-  roeber  in  (Sngtanb  obcr  in  9^or* 

way  meg  en  gubrtngen 

Either    you   must  depart   at  (gntroeber  mugt  bu  (or  entroeber,  bu 

once,  or  you  will  arrive  too  mugt)  fogleid)  abreifen,  ober  bu 

late  fommft  (see  108)  gu  tycit  Ijm 

2.  Not . . .  either,  ctud)  mcf)t ; 

It  is  true,  I  cannot  do  it ;  but  G?8  ift  roaljr,  id)  !ann  e8  nidjt  (see 

you  cannot  do  it  either  97),  bu  aber  audi)  nid)t 

Columbus  had  only  three  ships,  (£olumbu8   Ijatte   nur  bret  @d)iffe 

and    not   very   good    ships  unb  nod)  ntd)t  einmal  fe^r  gute 
either 

165.  Ever.    Adv.     1.  =  at  any  time,  je,  jemalS : 
If  you  ever  do  this  again  SSenn  bu  bie§  je  ttueber  t^ufl 

2.  =  at  all  times,  for  ever,  tmmer,  auf  immer,  auf  ettrig : 
Ever  your  friend  Charles  $uf  immer  2)ein  gremtb  $art 

3.  After  an  interrogative  or  relative  pronoun  or  adverb 

(often  -soever),   and),  ctucf)  immer,  and)  nur,  nur  tmmer; 

these  particles  may  immediately  follow  the  pronoun  or 

adverb,  but  more  often  other  words  intervene : 

Whosoever  may  have  said  this      2Ber  Me8  nur  immer  gefagt  fyaben 
was  mistaken  mag,  ijat  ftd)  geirrt 


106  ADVERBS,   ETC. 

Wherever  he  may  be,  I  shall  $5o  er  and)  fein  mag,  idj  toerbe  (see 

find  him  220)  iljn  ftnben 

From  whichever  side  you  may  23on  meldjer  @eite  man  jtdj  auty 

approach     this     wonderful  immer  bie(em  ttmnber&oUen  93ane 

building,  the  impression  is  nafyt,  ber  (Sinbrucf  ift  iibermaitU 

overwhelming  genb 

a.  "With  less  emphasis,  whosoever  may  be  translated  by 
jeber  ber  (or  toetdjer),  a  He  bie  (or  toe(d)e),  whenever  by  jebe^ 
mat  toemt,  wherever  by  uberall  too,  etc. 

J.  For  however  and  ei;er  so,  see  170,  I,  2. 

166.     For.     I.  Prep.     1.  =  in  place  of,  for  the  benefit 

of,  in  favor  of,  fur : 

I  will  pay  for  you  3d)  roW  fiir  bid)  begdjlen 

I  have  spoken  for  you  3d)  Ijabe  fiir  bid)  gefprodjen 

I  am  for  free-trade  3d)  bin  fiir  ben  greifyanbel 

a.  After  a  transitive  verb  accompanied  by  a  direct  ob- 
ject, for  in  this  sense  may  often  be  rendered  by  the  "  da- 
tive of  interest " ;  see  72. 

2.  =  in  exchange  for,  fiirr  um  : 

He  bought  a  pair  of  boots  for  (§r   fcmfte   ein  $aar  ©tiefeftt  fnr 

fifteen  marks  fiinf je^n  Wlaxt 

For  a  low  price  Um  einen  geringen  <PreiS 

For  little  money  Um  toentg  ©elD 

3.  =  as,  ate,  fur,  jit  (see  76) : 

I  learn  for  certain  3d)  l)ore  ctt8  gang  gemig 

I  took  him  for  an  Englishman  3d)  r)ieXt  ilm  fiir  einen  (Sngtcinber 

The  workmen  chose  him  for  5£)ie  2Irbeiter  rocifylten  if)n  311  tljrem 

their  leader  5Xnfiir)rer 

4.  To  denote  aim,  purpose,  toegeu,  fjatber  (following  the 
noun) : 

They  killed  him  for  his  money      ©ie  toteten  ityx  feineS  ©elbeS  tnegen, 

or  Ijalber 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  107 

a.  After  a  verb  expressing  motion,  nai) : 

We  left  for  New  York  in  the  %m  $benb  reiflcn  toir  narf)  9?ett> 

evening  $ort  ab 

She  went  for  a  doctor  ©ie  ging  nad)  cinem  Hr$te 

He  sent  for  his  overcoat  (5r  fdjicf te  nadj  jeinem  fiberrocfe 

5.  To  denote  cause,  reason,  toegen ;  before  nouns  denot- 
ing feeling  or  emotion,  bor : 

The  judge  was  respected  for      2)er   9Ud)ter   ftmrbe   toegen   feiner 
his  honesty  and  his  wisdom  $Kecf)tfd)affenf)eit  unb  feiner  $tug* 

l)cit  gcadjtet 

a.  Before  nouns  denoting  emotions,  nor : 

He  could  hardly  speak  for  joy  (Sr  fonnte  uor  S^ube  faum  fpredjen 

For  pain  SSor  ©Emergen 

For  grief  SSor  Summer 

For  laughing  $or  £ctd)en 

For  pleasure  33or  SBergmigen 

6.  To  denote  time.  A.  Time  elapsed.  Use  the  ac- 
cusative with  or  without  a  strengthening  adverb  (see  80, 
2  and  a) : 

The  Saxons  and  Danes  fought      S)ie  ©adjfen  unb  2)anen  fantyften 
for  many  years  toiele  3al)re  [tyinburd),  or  lang] 

a.  To  denote  the  length  of  time  which  an  action  or 
condition  has,  or  had,  continued,  use  the  same  construc- 
tion as  above,  or  the  preposition  fett;  see  106: 

I  have  been  waiting  here  for      3d)  umrte  l)ter  [feit]  brct  ©tunben 
three  hours 

B.  Time  to  elapse.     Generally  auf : 

I  am  going  to  France  for  six  3d)   gefje   auf  fed)8  SBodjen  nadj 

months  granfreid) 

I  am  going  to  France  for  the  3d)  gefye  nad)  grcmfreidj,  urn  ben 

winter  Winter  bort  ^ubringen 


108 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


7.  For,  with  a  verbal  noun  in  -ing  (see  128,  5),  should 
be  translated  by  a  subordinate  clause  introduced  by  luetl 
or  baf iir  bafy,  in  case  for  expresses  cause,  and  by  um  .  . .  ju 
with  the  infinitive,  or  according  to  128,  2,  in  case  for  ex- 
presses purpose: 


The  ministry  was  criticised  for 
not  taking  immediate  action 

I  have  engaged  a  man  for  pack- 
ing my  books 


8.  Idioms: 

for  all  that  trofc  aUebem 

once  for  all  ein  fur  atte  2ftale 

as  for  me  ma8  mid)  betrifft 

for  example  gum  23eift)iel 

for  ever  auf  immev 

for  fear  of  cm8  gurd)t  t>or 

for  the  future   iu  gufuuft,  gu* 

funftig 
for  good  auf  immer 
for  life   auf  SebeuSgeit,  lebeuS* 

(anglicf) 

II.  Conj.     SDenrt  (see  217) : 

The  king  sent  his  son,  for  he 
himself  was  too  old  and 
feeble 


Tlan  tabelte  ba%  2ftinifterium,  roeit 
(or  bafiir,  baft)  e§  ntdjt  fogleid) 
Sftagregelu  ergriffen  fyatte 

3d)  fyabe  mir  eiueu  Wlaxm  gum  diiu 
patfen  meiner  23ud)er  gemietet, 
or ...  gemietet,  um  metne  23iid)er 
eingupacfen 

for  the  life  of  me  fur  mciu  I'eben 
line  for  line  3eite  fur  geile 
for  the  love  of  him  iljm  gu  £iebe 
it  is  not  for  me  to  judge    eg  ge* 

biiljrt-nur  md)t,  gu  rid)  ten 
for  the  moment  augenblicfftdj 
for  nothing  um  foil  ft 
for  the  present  gegenroartig 
for  the  sake  of  um  . .  ♦  rottten 
for  want  of  ftitf  2ft  angel  on 
for  all  the  world  like  gerabe  rote 


£>er 
bcnn   er 
fdjroad) 


fanbte    jeiuen   ©oljn, 
felbft   roar  gu  alt  uub 


167.     From.    Prep.    1.  Usually  uon,  cm3  (out  of),  often 
strengthened  by  a  suitable  adverb  (see  134,  3) : 


I  once  walked  from  Munich  to 

Vienna 
I  am  from  Vienna 
Farzival  drew  his  sword  from 

its  sheath 
He  fell  from  his  chair 
From  principle 


3d)  biu  eiumal  gu  guge  oon  2ftim= 
djen  nad)  SBien  gegaugeu 

3d)  biu  au§  {more  rarelyoon)  SBSien 

^Sargioal  gog  ba§  ©djroert  an&  ber 
@rf)eibe  [fjeraug] 

(§r  pel  oom  ©ttttye  [fyerunter] 

3lu«  ©ruubfa^ 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  109 

a.  In  the  sense  of  beginning  with,  beginning  at,  from 
should  be  translated  by  bon  ...  an ;  an  may  be  omitted 
before  b\$  to: 

From  Passau  to  Linz  the  roads  SBon   ^affait    [an]    bi§   nad)  £ing 

were  very  good  ttmren  bte  SSege  fetyr  gut 

From    that    time     he    grew  $on  jener  ,3eit  an  ttmrbe  er  ftarfer 
stronger 

From  my  childhood  SSon  meiner  tfinbljeit  an,  or  auf 

2.  =  by,  according  to,  nacf) : 

To  judge  by  his  looks  ©einem  $u8fef)en  nad)  gu  urteiten 

3.  After  verbs  denoting  removal,  the  simple  dative 
should  be  used ;  see  69. 

4.  After  verbs  expressing  concealment,  bor;  after  verbs 
expressing  protection,  bor  or  gegen  : 

She   concealed    her  troubles  ©ie   l>erl)eimtid)te   Hjreit   Summer 

from  her  friends  t)or  ifyren  greunbinneu 

An  umbrella  protects  us  from  2)er  Sftegenjd)trm  fd)u£tun8  toor  bcm 

the  rain  (or  gegen  ben)  Sftegen 

168.  Hardly.     See  Scarcely,  187. 

169.  Hence.  Adv.  1.  =  from  this  point,  [from]  hence, 
bon  bier,  bon  ha : 

Let  us  go  hence  Safjt  un§  Don  I)ier  fortgeljen 

He   sailed   to  Genoa,    [from]    •  (Sr  fufyr  nad)  ©enua,  bon  ba  nad) 
hence  to  Marseilles  2Jterfeitle8 

2.  =  from  this  time  : 

A  week  hence ;  a  year  hence        3n  einer  2Sod)e;  in  einem  3al)re 

3.  =  for  this  reason,  bal)er,  be3f)aI6,  be^toegen : 

He  is  faithful  to  his  friends,      (Sr  bleibt  feinen  grennben  treu,  ba- 
hence  they  are  also  faithful         fyer  ftnb  jte  aud)  iljm  treu 
to  him 


110  ADVERBS,   ETC. 

170.     However.      I.  Adv.     1.   =  in  whatever  manner, 

tote,  tt)ie  and),  ttrie  and)  tmmer,  tote  ctudj  nur,  tote  nur  immer ; 

see  165,  3,  and  220 : 

However  he  may  do  it,  it  will      SSie  er  e§  and)  anfangen  mag,  c§ 

be  a  difficult  piece  of  work  mirb  einc  fd)rotertge  Arbeit  merben 

However  that  may  be  2Bie  bem  and)  fein  mag,  trie  ftdj  ba8 

aud)  uertjatten  mag 

2.  =  tw  whatever  degree,  tote  [aud)],  fo  [aud)] ;  see  165, 

3  and  220: 

However  beautiful  she  was  2Bie  ftf)6n  fte  [aud)]  mar,  or  fo  (djon 

fie  [audj]  roar 
However  diligently  he  studied        @o  fteigig  er  [and)]  ftubterte 

a.  The  same  effect  may  be  produced  by  nod)  fo  ever  so 
much  : 

However  rich  he  may  be,  he  (§r  mag  nod)  fo  retd)  fein,  er  mirb 

will   be  punished  for  this  bod)  fur  biefeS  $erbred)en  beftraft 

crime  merben 

Every  remark,  however  unim-  3ebe  nod)  fo  unmidjtige  S5em  erf  ting 

portant,  was  reported  in  the  ttmrbe  in  ben  Sftorgengeitungen  be* 

morning  papers  rtd)tet 

II.  Conj.  1.  With  much  emphasis,  =  however  that 
may  he,  tote  bem  cmdj  fetn  mag  (see  above,  1, 1),  or  tro|bem, 
tro£  aHebem : 

However,  I  will  pardon  you      £ro£bem  (or  tro^  attebem)  mill  tdj 
once  more  bir  nod)  einmal  Dergeifyen 

2.  With  less  emphasis,  =  but,  bod),  jebod),  aber,  aCeitt ; 
bod)  and  alletit,  in  this  sense,  should  stand  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  clause,  jebod)  and  aber  have  the  same  freedom 
of  position  as  the  English  however : 

He  was,  however,  very  fond  of      (5r  mar  jebodj  ein  grower  Sftufiffiebs 
music  tjaber,  or  bod)  mar  er  ein  grower 

2KuftfUeb^aber 


ADVERBS,    ETC.  Ill 

The  enemy,  however,  did  not      2)odj  fdjien  Utt8  ber  geinb  ntrf^t  gu 
seem  to  notice  us  bemerfen,    or  aUein   ber   geinb 

fd)ien  wis  nidjt  gu  bemerfen 

171.  If.  Conj.  1.  Usually  tuemt,  followed  by  the  im- 
perfect or  pluperfect  subjunctive  when  the  condition  is 
not  realized  (see  118);  the  following  hypothetical  clause 
is  often  introduced  by  f o  (see  140) : 

If  he  comes,  I  shall  go  away  SBenn  er  fommt,  [fo]  gc^c  id)  fort 

If  I  were  rich,  I  should  travel  SSenn  id)  reid)  mare,  [fo]  miirbe  id) 

for  several  years  meljrere  3al)re  reifen 

If  I  had  not  known  him  so  SSenn  id)  tt)n  uidjt  fo  gut  gefannt 

well,  I  should  have  lent  him  Ijcitte,  f  fo]  Ijatte  id)  il)m  ba8  (Mb 

the  money  geliefyen 

2.  Instead  of  toenn  with  the  dependent  order  (see  236), 

the  interrogative  order  is  often  used  to  express  a  condition 

(see  235,  2)  ;  in  that  case,  fo  is  very  regularly  used  at  the 

beginning  of  the  principal  clause : 

$ommt  er,  fo  gelje  idj  fort 
SScire  id)  reid),  fo  miirbe  id)  meljrere  3al)ve  reifeu 
$attt  id)  iljtt  nid)t  fo  gut  gefaunt,  fo  tjatte  id)  ibm  bag  ©elb  gelieljen 
Compare  with  the  sentences  under  1. 

3.  The  conditional  clause  may,  of  course,  follow  the 
hypothetical  clause ;  in  that  case,  however,  the  interroga- 
tive order  is  not  used  except  to  express  a  condition  not 
realized : 

3d)  ge!)e  fort,  meun  er  fommt 

3d)  miirbe  mefyrere  3al)re  reifen,  meun  id)  reid)  mare,  or  mare  idj  reidj 
3d)  fjatte  it)m  ba%  @elb  gegeben,  menu  id)  ifyn  nid)t  fo  gut  gefanut  fyatte, 
or  fyatte  id)  il)n  nid)t  fo  gut  gefanut 

Compare  with  the  sentences  under  1. 

4.  For  as  if  see  152,  2  c. 

5.  In  indirect  questions  both  if  and  whether  should  be 
translated  by  ob : 


112  ADVERBS,   ETC. 

The  general  wished  to  find  out  £>er  ©enerat  nnmfdjte  ju  erfafjren, 
whether  the  enemy  would  ob  ber  geinb  ben  nadtften  Sftorgen 
attack  in  the  morning  or  not         angreifen  roiirbe,  ober  ni(f)t    • 

Ask  that  man  if  he  can  show  gragen  ©ie  ben  9ftann  bort,  ob  er 
us  the  way  to  the  station  un8  ben  2Beg  nadj  bem  23almI)ofe 

geigen  faun 

172.     In.     I.  Adv.     1.  SDrinnen ;  after  a  verb  express- 
ing motion,  Ijtnem,  herein  (see  133) : 

I  called :  u  Come  in  "  3d)  rief:  „§erein" 

She  rushed  in,  in  great  excite-      @ie   ftiirgte   in   grower  Slufregung 

ment  herein 

I  went  in  to  help  him  3d)  ging  I)inetn,  urn  ifym  tfi  fyelfen 

You  were  not  in  (at  home)  S)u  ttmrft  ntd)t  ju  §aufe 

2.  In  certain  familiar  phrases,  ju  .  ,  .  fjeretn,  t)tnein: 
He  came  in  [by]  the  door  G?r  fam  jur  Sljur  fyerein 

II.  Prep.     1.  Usually  in,  contracted  with  bem  to  im : 

in  the  bottle  in  ber  gta(d)e  in  Asia  in  $ften 

in  the  book  im  S8ud)e  in  summer  im  ©ommer 

in  school  in  ber  ©djnle  in  three  weeks  in  bret  SSodjen 

in  Berlin  in  Berlin 

2.  To  express  the  time  of  day,  use  either  the  genitive 

(see  60)  or  cm : 

in  the  morning  am  9ft org  en  in  the  day-time   am  Sage,  or  bei 

in  the  evening  am  5tbenb  Sage 

But 

in  the  night  in  ber  9latf)t,  or  bei  9?adjt 

3.  In  a  language,  auf : 

He  answered  in  German  (§r  antroortete  auf  2>eutfcf) 

What  do  you  call  this  in  Ger-  Sie  nennt  man  (or  roie  l)eif$t)  bie8 

man  ?  2>ing  auf  £>eutjd)  ? 
But 

In  German  there  are  two  de-  3tn  2)eutfd)en  gibt  eS  $roei  2)efUna* 

clensions  tionen 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


113 


4.  In  with  a  verbal  noun  in  -ing  should  be  translated 
by  bet  with  a  verbal  noun  in  -en  (see  128,  2),  or  by  a  sub- 
ordinate clause  introduced  by  a  suitable  conjunction  (see 
128,  5) ;  the  former  construction  should  be  chiefly  used 
when  time  or  an  accompanying  circumstance  is  to  be 
expressed : 

SBeim  Uberfefcen  biefer  furgen  @teUe 
madjte  er  fiinf  gefyler 

2)er  gitrft  bettrieS  feine  $lugl)eit  ba= 
burd),  bag  er  ben  geinb  mit  (Mte 
befyanbette 

in  my  opinion  nadj  meiner  2Injtdjt 

in  press  lmtcr  ber  sJpreffc 

in  print  gebntcft;  not  in  print  (all 

sold)  feergriffen 
in  the  reign  (of)    uuter  ber  9*e« 

gierung 
in  short  !urg 
in  time  (on  time)  gu  renter  ^ett, 

jur  redjten  £tit,  redjtjettig ;  (in 

future)  mit  ber  £eit 
in  times  past,  in  former  times 

friiljer,  eljematS 
in  olden  times    in  (or  nt)  alten 

3etten 
in  truth  roafyrljaftig 
in  this  way    auf  bie(e  (or  fo(d)e) 

SBHfe 


In  translating  this  short  pas- 
sage he  made  five  mistakes 

The  prince  showed  his  wisdom 
in  treating  his  enemies  kind- 
ly 

5.  Idioms: 

in  appearance    bem  2lnfd)eine 

nad) 
in  comparison  im  $ergtetd)e 
in   conclusion     $nm    ©dfjtuffe, 

in  the  country  (not  in  another 

country)  im  £anbe 
in  the  country  (not  in  the  city) 

anf  bem  £anbe 
in  honor  of  the  king   bem  $o* 

ntge  ju  (Sfyren 
in  a  hurry  in  grower  (§ile,  eilig 
be  in  a  hurry  In  grower  (5tle 

fein,  groge  (Site  Ijaben 
in  this  manner    auf  bieje  {or 

fotdje)  SBeife 
there  is  nothing  in  it    e8  ijt 

nidjts  baran 

173.  Instead,  Adv.  and  Instead  of,  Prep.  1.  In  German, 
artftatt  is  used  as  a  preposition  only ;  hence  both  the  ad- 
verb instead  and  the  preposition  instead  of  should  be 
rendered  by  anftatt  with  a  genitive  ;  for  anftatt.  cm  ©telle 
may  be  substituted ; 


114  ADVERBS,   ETC. 

* 

Instead    of    his    father,    his      Anftatt    fetneg   SBaterS    trot   feittc 

mother  entered  the  room  gutter  in«  dimmer 

He  meant  to  take  quinine,  but      C?r  rooUte  (Sfjiiuit   ttefymen,    nafjm 

took  arsenic  instead  aber  anftatt  beffen  (see  32)  2Irfcnif 

His  nephew  could  not  go,  so      ©ein  9?effe  fonnte  nid)t  bingetjen, 

he  sent  a  friend  instead  beSljctlb    fanbte    er   einen   feiner 

greunbe   anftatt   feiner,    or  an 
feiner  ©telle 

2.  After  instead  of,  a  verbal  noun  in  -ing  should  be 

rendered  by  an  infinitive  with  ju ;  see  128,  5  a. 

174.  Into.  Prep.  3n,  often  strengthened  by  a  suit- 
able adverb  (see  134,  3) : 

He  fell  into  the  water  C?r  fiel  in  ba3  Staffer 

This  tavern  fell  into  disrepute  3)iefe8  28irt8l)aii$  tarn  in  iibetit  Sftuf 

The  general  sent  an  officer  into  2)er  ©eneral  fd)icf  te  einen  Offigter 

the  city  to  demand  its  sur-  in  bie  ©tabt  tytnein,  urn  fte  |ttt 

render  Ubergabe  aufguforbem 

175.  Like.    Adv.    Like  may  be  expressed  in  two  ways : 

1.  By  gletcf),  sometimes  called  a  preposition  (see  137,  2), 
properly  an  adjective  in  apposition  and  therefore  unin- 
fected (see  18,  2),  and  governing  a  dative  (see  73),  which 
may  precede  or  follow ;  this  construction  is  more  often 
used  when  the  comparison  has  reference  to  the  subject 
of  the  sentence  than  when  it  has  reference  to  any  other 
part. 

2.  By  tt>ie  as,  which  requires  the  two  elements  of  the 
comparison  to  be  in  the  same  case : 

He  rushed  up  the  stairs  like  a      2Bie  etn  SBaljnfmntger   (or  gletd) 
madman  eiuem   2Baf)nftnnigen,   or  einem 

SBafynfmntgen   gtetd))   ftiirgte  er 
bie  Xvtppt  fyinauf 
He  treated  me  like  a  school-      (5r  befyanbelte  mid)  rate  einen  <^d)ul* 
boy  jungen 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  115 

a.  9Bte  may  be  strengthened  by  a  preceding  ebenfo  or 

gerctbe,  just,  and  the  second  part  of  the  comparison  is  very 

often  introduced  by  fo : 

Like  his  mother,  Goethe  had  2Bie  (or  gerabe  ttrie,  or  ebenfo  tote) 
brown  hair  and  dark  lustrous  jeine  aflutter,  f  o  fyatte  aud)  ©oettje 
eyes  brauneS  £aar  unb   bunflc  fun* 

fclnbe  2tugen 

176.  Much.  Adv.  When  expressing  degree,  not  meas- 
urable quantity,  much,  very  much  should  generally  be 
rendered  by  fef)r,  otherwise  by  rjtct : 

She  was  very  much  grieved  ©te  ttiar  fefyr  befummert 

I  respect  him  very  much  3d)  ad) tc  ifyn  fel)r  [I)od)] 

He  is  much  {I  e.  highly)  re-  (Sr  ift  (et)v  gead^tct 

spected 

He  is  much  (i.  e.  by  many,  or  (Sr  ift  Diet  oerleumbet 

in  many  ways)  maligned 

177.  Neither  [.  . .  nor].    I.  Pron.     See  40. 

II.  Conj.     1.  Neither  .  .  .  nor,  toeber  .  .  .  nod) : 

She  was   neither   industrious  <&ie  war  tueber  fleiftig  nodj  begabt 

nor  talented 

I  am  neither  rich,  nor  have  I  3d)  bin  tucber  reid),  nod)  tjabe  id) 

any  desire  to  become  so  33erlangen  banad),  e8  ju  roerben 

2.  iVb£ .  . .  neither,  not .  .  .  wor,  nirf)t . . .  unb  auti)  mcijt : 

I  did  not  go  to  the  concert  last  3d)  mar  geftern  $benb  nidjt  im 
night,  neither  (nor)  can  I  go  Concert  unb  fyeute  $benb  fann  id) 
to-day  and)  nid)t  Ijingeljen 

178.  Of.    Prep.     See  57  ff. 

179.  Off.    I.  Adv.     1.  =  distant,  toeit  toeg,  entfernt: 

Far  off,  a  great  way  off  SSeit  meg;   tuett  Don  t)ier,  toon  ba, 

Don  bort 

2.  =  away,  after  verbs  of  removal,  toeg,  fort,  bation : 


116  ADVERBS,  ETC. 

He  hurried  off   to  catch  the      (Sr  elite  baoou  (or  fort),  urn  ben 

train  gag  lxl  erreidjen 

He  got  off  with  his  life  (Sr  fam  mi!  bem  Men  baoon 

3.  =  down,  tjtvab,  fyerunter,  fjinab,  l)inunter  (see  133) : 
He  fell  off  and  broke  his  leg         (Sr  ftel  fyerunter  unb  brad)  \>a%  33ein 

4.  Idioms: 

Off  and  on  2lb  nnb  gu;  balb  fo,  balb  fo 

He  is  well  off  (§r  ift  in  gnten  Umftanben 

Everything  went  off  well  2We8  ging  gut  ab,  or  Don  patten 

Take  off  one's  hat  ©einen  §ut  abnefymen 

Take  off  one's  coat,  one's  boots      ©einen  SKotf,  fetne  @tief el  auS^te^en 

I  must  be  off  now  3d)  mug  jefct  fort 

Put  off,  delay  $erfd)ieben,  f)inau8ftf)ieben 

II.    The  preposition  off  should  be  rendered  by  t)onr 

strengthened   by   a   suitable   adjective    or   adverb    from 

among  those  mentioned  above  (see  134,  3) : 

The  tavern  is  a  mile  off  the      2)a§  2Btrt§ljau8  ift  etne  2Mfe  toon 

road  ber  frmbftrage  entfentt 

He  jumped  off  the  horse  (§r  fprang  oom  S-Pferbe  fyerunter 

180.     On.     I.  Adv.     1.  In  phrases  like  to  have  on,  put 

on,  cm  or  auf ;  see  below,  II,  1  and  2 : 

She  had  a  white  dress  on  ©ie  Ijatte  ein  roetgeS  $leib  an 

He  put  his  fur  cap  on  (§r  fe^te  feine  $el$mu&e  auf 

2.  =  forward,  further,  fort,  toeiter,  t)ortoart3: 

They  marched  on  until  it  be-      @ie  marfdjterten  toetter  bi«  e8  bun= 

came  dark  fel  ttntrbe 

I  went  on  reading  3d)  fufyr  fort  gu  lefen 

And  so  on  Unb  fo  roeiter 

From  now  on  $on  je£t  an 

II.  Prep.     1.  =  close  by,  or  touching,  an  object,  cm : 

Cologne  is  on  the  Rhine  MUx  liegt  am  9?I)etn 

The  picture  hangs  on  the  wall      ®a8  23i(b  fyangt  an  ber  Sffianb 

I  knocked  on  the  door  3d)  flopfte  an  bie  £l)ur 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


117 


2.  =  on  top  of,  or  resting  on,  auf : 


The  book  is  lying  on  the  table 
A  stork  has  his  nest  on  the 

roof  of  the  church 
Go  and  lay  this  book  on  my 

desk 


£)a8  SBud)  liegt  auf  bent  %x\6) 
(Sin  ©torcf)  fyat  fein  Sfteft  auf  bem 

2)ad)e  bcr  $ird)e 
©efyen  @ic  l)in  unb  legen  ©ie  bie8 

SButf)  auf  mein  ^ult 


3.  To  denote  time,  an  (see  60) : 

On  Monday  91m  2ftontag 


On  a  fine  morning 
On  the  first  of  April 

4.  =  about,  iiber : 

A  treatise  on  electricity 


2ln  einem  ftf)onen  2ftorgen,  or  eineS 

fdjonen  SttorgenS 
5lm  crfien  Styril 


Sine  Slbljanbumg  fiber  Me  (Slectri* 
cttat 


5.  On  with  a  verbal  noun  in  -ing  should  be  rendered 
by  a  subordinate  clause  introduced  by  a(3 ;  see  128,  5. 

6.  Idioms : 


on  account  [of]  to  eg  en 

on  no  account  unter  f einen  Urn* 

pnben 
on  board  an  SBorb 
call   on   one    (visit)    befudjen, 

(summon)  aufforbern 
on  this  condition   unter  biefer 

SBebtngung 
on  the  contrary  im  (3>egenteU 
on  foot  gu  gug 
on  hand  norratig 
on  the  one  hand   auf  ber  einen 

@eite,  emerjetts 


on  horseback  gu  ^ferbe,  ride  on 

horseback  reiteu 
on  land  auf  bem  £anbe,  am  i'anbe, 

an  ba%  £anb 
on  this  occasion  bei  biefer  ©elegen* 

f)ett 
on  my  part  meinerfeitS 
on  purpose  abftd)tltd),  mit  $bftd)t 
on  shore  auf  bem  i'anbe,  am  2anbe, 

an  ba8  £aub 
on  one  side  auf  ber  eineu  @ette 
on  a  sudden  ^lol^lirf) 
on  these  terms  unter  biefen  33e* 

bingungeu 


181.     Only.     Adv.     1. 

Only  five  miles  from  here 
If  I  had  only  known  it 


SJhtr: 


9htr  funf  9Mlen  non  r)ter 
SBenn  id)  e8  nur  geoutfct  tjattc 


118  ADVERBS,   ETC. 

In  optative  sentences  like  the  last,  the  German  nur  is 
even  more  common  than  the  English  only, 

2.  =  not  yet  more  than,  erft : 

I  had  only  read  a  few  pages  3d)  Ijcttte  erft  tuenige  ©eiten  gelefen, 

when  he  returned  al8  er  juriicffam 

She  was  only  three  years  old  ©ie  to  ax  erft  brei  3al)re  att,  al8 

when  her  mother  died  itjre  gutter  ftarb 

3.  Be  careful  not  to  confound  the  adjective  only  with 

the  adverb  ;  the  former  is  etnjig : 

The  only  reliable  work  on  this      2)ct§  ein^tge  gnoerfafftge  SBerf  fiber 
subject  is  by  a  Frenchman  biefeu  ©egenftaub  ift  toon  einem 

grangofen  gefdjrieben 

182.      Out.      I.  Adv.      1.    Ordinarily,   brazen;    after 

verbs  expressing  motion,  f)tnctil3,  tjerauS  (see  133) : 

Out  on  the  ocean  ©rauften  auf  bem  2fteere 

Out  in  the  fields  S)raugen  auf  ben  gelbern 

He  rushed  out  into  the  street  (§r  filiate  auf  bte  ©trofee  l)inau8 

I  will  call  him  out  3d)  ttriU  iljn  IjerauSrufen 

2.  With  certain  verbs,  in  certain  senses  (see  131),  au£ ; 

likewise  in  certain  idioms : 

Mr.  S.  is  going  out  now  £err  ft  geljt  je£t  au8 

I  was  out  (not  at  home)  3d)  ttmr  cms,  nictjt  gu  §au(e,  auSge* 

gangen 
The  fire  is  out  2)a8  geuer  ift  au8 

School  is  out  S)ie  ©d)ule  ift  auS 

II.  Out  of.    Prep.     1.  =  outside  of,  aufterfyatfc  : 
We  live  three  miles  out  of  the      2Bir  toofmen  brei  SMlen  augerljalb 
city  ber  ©tabt 

2.  After  a  verb  expressing  motion,  out  of  may  be  ex- 
pressed by  au§  .  .  ,  IjercutS,  fjhtauS  (see  133) : 

The  child  fell  out  of  the  car-      2)a8   $tnb   fieX   au§   bem   SBagen 
riage  -  IjerauS 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


119 


a.  In  many  expressions,  however,  jit  .  .  .  f)erau§,  f)tnau£ 

at,  out  . . .  by  should  be 


is  more  common,  and  out  , 
rendered  in  the  same  way : 

We  rode  out  of  the  city 

The  duke  was  driveu  out  of 
the  country 

The  girl  went  out  by  the  back 
door 

I  was  looking  out  of  the  win- 
dow 


2Btr  ritten  gur  ©tabt  IjiuauS 

2)er  §ergog  murbe  gum  Sanbe  Ijut. 

cuts  gejagt 
2>a«  2JMbd)en  giug  gur  §iuterti)ur 

IjtuauS 
3d)  faf)  gum  genfter  I)inau« 


3.  Out  of  =  from,  on  account  of,  a\l$ : 

Out  of  malice  $u8  ©djabeufreube 

Out  of  love  2lu8  £tebe 

4.  To  express  material,  au£ : 

This  bridge  is  built  out  of  steel      £)iefe  SBriicfe  ift  au8  ©taljl  gebaut 

5.  To  be  out  of  (lack)  is  nidjt  metjr  f)a6en : 


I  am  out  of  paper 

6.  Idioms: 

out  of  breath  auger  $tem 
out  of  business  nidjt  mefyr  im 

©efdjcift 
out  of  humor   jd)led)t  gelaunt, 

fd)ied)ter  £aune  {see  59,  3) 
out  of  office  uid)t  mef)r  im  $mt 
out  of  practice  auger  Ubung 


3d)  Ijabe  !eiu  papier  meljr 


out  of  print  Dergriffen 

out  of  sight  — out  of  mind    an% 

ben  $ugen  —  au8  bem  <Bim\ 
out  of  tune  toerftimmt 
out  of  the  way  (secluded)    abge= 

legen,  entlcgen 


I.  Adv.     See  211,  I 
Prep.     1.    =  not  within,    aiifcrljalb ; 


183.  Outside. 
II.    Outside  of. 

see  211,  II,  1. 

2.  =  not  including,  auf]er ;  see  158,  2. 

184.  Over.     I.  Adv.     1.  =  on  the  other  side,  brii&cn  ; 
after  verbs  expressing  motion,  fjcriibcr,  fjimiber  (see  133) : 


120 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


My  father  lives  over  there 
He  is  over  (e.  g.  over  the  river) 
We  sailed  over  to  England 
My  wife  is  coming  over  next 
spring 


Tldn  93ater  tooljnt  bort  briiben 
(§r  ift  briiben 

'2Bir  fegelten  nad)  (Sngtanb  ^iniiber 
SD^eine  ftrau  fomtnt  nacfyfteS  ^rul)* 
jarjr  ^eriiber 


2.  =  past,  Dorbet,  boritber,  au$ : 

®ie  33orftellung  raar  um  gelni  Utjr 
ttoriiber 


The  performance  was  over  at 
ten  o'clock 


3.  =  left,  itbrtg  : 

Fifty  baskets  were  left  over 


gunfgig   $orbe   toctren    iibrig   ge= 
blieben 


4.  =  over  again,  nod)  etnmat : 

We  had  to  do  it  all  over  2Bir  mngten  e8  alleS  nod)  etnmaf 

macfyen 

II.  Prep.  Generally,  After,  often  strengthened,  after 
verbs  expressing  motion,  by  a  following  {jeri'iber,  tjiniiber 
(see  133  and  134,  3) : 


His  father's  portrait  hung  over 

the  sofa 
We  walked  over  the  bridge 

The  horse  came  running  over 

the  bridge 
Over    eighty    members    were 

present 
Frederick  II.  ruled  over  Prussia 

from  1740—1786 
He  mourned  over  this  loss  till 

he  died 
Over  night 


2>as   ©tlbni*   feineg  $ater8   tying 

iiber  bem  ©ofa 
2Bir  gingcn  iiber  bic  23rii(fe  [$in- 

iiber] 
2)a3  ^3ferb   fam   iiber  bte  SBriicfe 

[fyeriiber]  gcrannt 
fiber  acfytgig  2ftitglieber  toaren  an* 

mefenb 
griebrid)  II.  regierte  iiber  ^rengeu 

Don  1740—1786 
(Sr  trauerte  iiber  biefen  SSerlnft  bis 

pi  feinem  SLobe 
Uber  SKadjt 


185.     Past.     I.  Adv.     =  by,  see  162,  I,  2. 
II.  Prep.     1.  =  by,  see  162,  II,  3. 

2.  =  beyond,  mctjr  alS,  iiber  .  .  .  fjtnaug  (see  134,  3) : 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  121 

Your  father  must  be  past  sev-      2>ein  $ater  mug  iiber  (or  meljr  at$) 

enty  fieb^tg  3af)re  alt  feiu 

A  quarter  past  seven  ©in  3>iertel  nad)  fteben;  see  153,  6 

186.     Rather.    Adv.    1.  =  preferably,  tiebcr ;  also  et)er, 

especially  when  followed  by  aV$  than: 

I  had  rather  stay  at  home  3d)  blcibe  Ueber  }U  §aufe 

The  prisoner  said,  he  would  £er  ©efcmgene  fagte,  cr  roiirbe  cljer 

rather  die  than  betray  his  (or  Ueber)  fterben,  a(8  (ein  SBater* 

country  lanb  Derraten 

a.  The  ideas  expressed  in  English  by  like  to,  prefer  toy 

like  best  to  are  most  commonly  expressed  in  German  by 

the  adverbs  gem,  lieber,  am  liebften  (see  102,  2  a,  and  105, 

3  a): 

I  like  to  teach,  but  I  like  bet-      3d)  fefjre  groar  gem,  aber  id)  ftu= 
ter  {or  I  prefer)  to  study,  Mere  nod)  Ueber,  unb  id)  reife  am 

and  I  like  best  to  travel  liebften 

2.  After  a  negative,  efyer  should  be  used : 

The  next  morning  he  was  no      2)en  ncidjften  2ftorgen  ging  eg  ifjm 
better,  rather  worse  nid)t  beffer,  efjer  fdjlimmer 

3.  =  more,  mef)r,  ef)er ;  =  more  correctly,  tueimcfjr: 

He  came  rather  (or  more)  be-      (Sr  fam  meljr,  roeil  ev  mugte,  a(8 

cause  he  must,  than  because  roeil  er  roollte 

he  wished  to  come 
He  is  a  German,  or  rather  an      dx  ift  ein  3)entjdjer,  ober  trietmefyr 

American  of  German  descent         ein  s2lmerifaner  Don  beutfd)er  $b= 

funft 

4.  =  somewhat,  etiua3,  jiemttd),  ganj,  which  are  often 
qualified  by  cigeutltcl)  really  : 

His  account  of  the  matter  was  <2>ein  23erid)t  Don  ber  &atf)e  roar 

rather  amusing  [eigent(id)]  gan$  amiifant 

He  has  rather  good  taste  in  (§r  b,at  jiemlid)  guten  ©efdjmacf  in 

literary  matters  Utterarifdjen  Din  gen 


122  ADVERBS,   ETC. 

5.  The  rather,  urn  fo  meljr,  urn  f o  et)er  (see  191) : 
The  president  felt  compelled      2)er  ^rdfibent  fufytte,  baft  eu  gegen 
to  be  just  to  the  accused,  the         ben  ^Cttgeflagten  geretf)t  fetn  ntiifie, 
rather  because  he  personally         urn  fo  tnefyr,  ba  er  if)n  pevfbnlid) 
disliked  him  nidjt  teiben  mocfjte 

187.  Scarcely.  Adv.  Scarcely,  hardly,  fcuun.  A  fol- 
lowing subordinate  clause,  introduced  by  when,  should  be 
rendered,  in  German,  by  a  principal  clause  introduced  by 
fo  or,  more  rarely,  by  ba  (see  140) : 

He  had  scarcely  (or  scarcely      <£v  l)atte  faum  (or  faum  Ijatte  ev)  ' 
had   he)    given    the    order,         ben  23efel)l  gegeben,  f*>  mar  bev* 
when  it  was  executed  felbe  fdjon  auSgefiifyrt 

188.  Since.     I.  Adv.     1.  =  since  then,  fettbem,  fettljev: 
I  have  not  seen  him  since  3d)  fycibe  tint  fettbem    (or  feittjer) 

uid)t  gejefyen 

2.  =  ago,  Uor  with  the  dative : 

Many  years  since  SBor  trielen  3af)ren 

II.  Prep,    ©cit ;  fcon  .  .  .  an : 

Since  my  childhood  @eit  meiner  $inbf)eit 

Since  the  beginning  $on  2utfang  an 

III.  Conj.  1.  When  used  in  a  purely  temporal  sense, 
since  is  feit  or  fcitbem : 

Since  my  brother  spent  a  year  ©eit   ntein    SBruber    ein  3al)r    in 

in  Germany,  he   has  been  2)eutfd)laub  mar,  interefftert  (see 

much  interested  in  German  106)  ev  ftd)  fefyr  fiir  beutfd)e  $o- 

politics  Ittif 

Since  I  have  lived  in  the  sub-  ©eitbem  id)  in  ber  SBorftabt  tnolme, 

urbs,  I  have  seen  but  little  \)abt  id)  ifjix  nur  toentg  gejefyen 
of  him 

2.  When  since  expresses  cause,  it  should  be  translated 
-by  bet : 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


123 


Since  he  is  my  friend,  I  must 
help  him 

189.     So.      I.  Adv.     1.  To 
generally  f  o : 

I  am  not  so  tired  as  I  was  last 

night 
Will  you  be  so  kind  as  to  lend 

me  your  umbrella  ? 
So  much  the  better 
If  that  is  so,  we  have  no  time 

to  lose 
Is  that  so  1     (Exclamation) 
She  was  so  feeble  that  she  had 

to  be  carried  home 


3)a  cr  mein  ^reimb  ift,  fo  (see  140) 
irnifj  id)  ifym  tjelfen 

denote   manner  or  degree, 


3d)  bin  mdjt  jo  miibe,  al$  id)  gefteru 

Slbenb  mar 
SBotlen  ©te  fo  gut  feht,  mir  3fyren 

$egenfd)irm  m  leitjen  ? 
Urn  fo  beffer  ;  see  191 
28emt  ba&  {or  bem)  fo  ift,  [fo]  Ijabeu 

urir  feine  £tit  gu  berlteren 
<5o?  or  SBirflirf)? 
@ie  roar  fo  fdprad),  bag  man  fie 

nad)  §aufe  tragen  mugte 


2.  To  represent,  without  emphasis,  a  preceding  word  or 
an  idea  previously  expressed,  use  eS  (see  29,  1  c) : 


I  will  telegraph,  if  you  wish 
me  to  do  so 

He  was  always  disagreeable, 
and  became  still  more  so 
when  he  inherited  his  uncle's 
fortune 


3d)  null  tetegrapljieren,  menu  ©ie 
nmnfdien,  baft  id)  e8  time,  or, 
simply,  menu  ®ie  e8  nriutfd)en 

(Sr  mar  immer  ciu  imangenefymer 
XNenfd),  unb  rourbe  e8  nod)  metjr, 
al8  er  feineS  DnfelS  SBermbgeu 
crbte 


II.  Conj.     1.  Coordinating,  =  thus,  therefore,  atfo,  Hub 
fo,  beSl)a(b : 

You  were  not  at'  home,  so  I 
went  away  again 


2)u  marft  ltirfjt  git  §anfe,  unb  fo  (or 
alfo,  besfyalb)  ging  id)  nrieber  fort 


2.  Subordinating,  =  so  that,  fo  baft,   bamit  (see  113,  2 

and  3) : 

I  drew  the  curtain,  so  he  might      3d)  gog  ben  $orf)ang  Dor,  bamit  er 
not  see  me  mid)  nid)t  falje 


190.     That.     Conj.     1.  Ordinarily,  bafc  (see  114  ff.) : 


124 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


I  know  that  he  is  rich 

I  thought  that  you  had  left  for 

Berlin 
I  hope  that  you  will  soon  come 

again 


3d)  roeig,  baft  er  retd)  t|t 

3d)  bad)te,  baft  bu  nad)  ^Berlin  ab* 

gereift  tuarefl 
3d)  Ijoffe,  bag  bu  balb  ttrieber  fom= 

men  nrirft 


2.  [So]  that,  )o  baft ;    [in  order\  that,  jo  bag,  bamit  (see 
113,  2  and  3) : 


4 


I  was  so  surprised  that  I  could 

hardly  speak 
His  father  was  poor,  so  that 

he  could  not  send  the  boy  to 

school 
I  had  to  hurry  [so  or  in  order] 

that  I  might  not    lose  the 

train 


3d)  wax  fo  iiberrafdjt,  baft  idj  faum 

fpredjen  fonnte 
©ein  $ater  wax  arm,  fo  baft  cr  ben 

ftnaben  nidjt  inbte  ©d)ule  fd)ttfen 

fonnte 
3d)  mugte  mid)  eUen,  bamit  id)  ben 

3ug  nid)t  oerfaumte,  or  urn  ben 

3ug  uidjt  $u  oerfanmen 


191.     The.     Adv.     1.  Simple  the,  before  a  comparative, 
urn  fo,  or  bejto  : 

Goethe  sought  to  win  Herder's 

respect,  the  more  so  as  the 

latter  treated  him  somewhat 

contemptuously 
All  the  better 


©oetlje  fitdjte  fid)  (see  72,  a)  £>er= 
berg  2ld)tung  gu  ertnerben,  nm  jo 
mefyr,  a\&  biefer  tf)n  etttrnS  oer= 
dd)t(td)  betjanbette 

&efto  beffer,  or  umfo  beffer 


2.  If  two  clauses  are  connected  by  the  correlatives  the 
.  .  .  the,  ascertain  first  which  of  the  two  is  the  subordi- 
nate, which  the  principal  clause  ;  the  former  should  be 
introduced  by  jc,  the  latter  by  bcfto  or  umfo  ;  when  both 
clauses  are  very  short,  je  .  .  .  je  is  sometimes  used ;  pay 
attention  to  the  order  of  words  (see  221  and  236) : 


The  more  he  learned,  the  more 

modest  he  became 
You  will  like  him  the  better, 

the  longer  you  know  him 
The  sooner,  the  better 


3e  meljr  er  iernte,  befto  bejdjeibener 

mnrbe  er 
(5r  wixb  Mr  urn  jo  mefyr  gefallen,  jc 

longer  bu  ifyit  lennft 
3e  efyer,  je  beffer 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  125 

192.     There.     Adv.     1.  Sort,  with  less  force  ba ;  after 

a  verb  of  motion  (see  132)  bortfyin,  bafytn,  or,  with  less 

force,  simply  t)tn  ;  another  adverb  of  place  never  precedes, 

but  follows,  bort  and  bet  : 

Here  and  there  §ter  unb  bort,  or  fyier  imb  ba 

My  aunt  lives  up  there  Wt'me  Xante  toofynt  bort  (or  ba) 

obert 
I  came  from  there  3d)  fam  Don  bort[fyer],  or  t>on  ba 

[Her] 
I  am  going  there  3d)  gelje  bortfyin,  or  bal)in,  or  Ijin 

a.  After  a  noun,  there  may  be  rendered  by  the  adjec- 
tive borttg : 

The  authorities  there  £>ie  borttcjen  33el)brben 

2.  Compounds  (see  136) : 

thereabouts,   (of  place)  ba  f)er*  therefrom  baoon 

utn,  (of  number)  ungef a fyr  therein  barin 

thereafter  bonad)  thereof  baoon 

thereat  babet,  bariibev;  see  153  thereupon  barcmf 

therefore,  adv.  begtoegen,  bafiir;  therewith  bamit 

conj.  a\\o,  fotglid) 

3.  The  unaccented,  so-called  "  expletive  "  there,  which 
is  used  before  the  verb  when  the  subject  follows,  should 
be  rendered  by  the  impersonal  e3,  followed  by  the  verb, 
which  must  agree  in  number  with  the  logical  subject  fol- 
lowing (see  82  and  223) : 

There  lay  several  open  books  (£8  fagen  tneljrere  aufgefdjfogenc 
on  the  table  23iid)er  ctuf  bem  £ifd)e 

There  followed  two  chapters  (£8  fotgten  gtoei  tfapitet  liber  ft\op> 
on  Klopstock  and  Lessing  ftocf  unb  ^effing 

a.  But  rt  should  be  omitted  whenever  any  other  ele- 
ment of  the  sentence  precedes  the  verb;  there  should 
then  remain  untranslated : 


126 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


Once,  there  came  two  beggars 

to  our  door 
When  he  arrived,  there  were 

many  people  at  the  station 

to  greet  him 
Beside  the  doctor,  there  were 

three  persons  in  the  room 


(Strnnat  famen  (or  e§  famen  eirnnaf) 
groei  Settler  an  unfere  SEtjiire 

2U8  er  aufam,  roaren  triele  £eute  aitf 
bent  33a^nt)ofe,  it)n  ;ut  begriigen 

5tu6er  bem  2)ottor  tnaren  brei  ^er* 
fonen  im  ,3tmmer 


193.  There  is  (there  are)  may  be  translated  by  e3  ift 
(e3  finb),  or  by  e3  gtbt. 

1.  @3  ift,  eS  finb  are  used  as  in  English  there  is,  there 
are,  according  as  the  logical  subject  is  in  the  singular  or 
in  the  plural ;  in  either  case,  e£  should  be  omitted  when 
any  other  element  of  the  sentence  precedes  the  verb : 

There  is  a  vast  difference  be-      (£$  ift   etn  uugefyeurer  Unterfdjteb 


tween  these  two  countries 
There  were,  at  that  time,  many 

fine  pictures  in  this  gallery 
But 
At  that  time,  there  were  many 

fine  pictures  in  this  gallery 


$ttrifrf)en  biefen  beiben  £anbem 
(S8  roaren  gu  Jener  3eit  Dieie  fd)oue 
SBtlber  in  biefer  ©allerie 

3u  jener  £tit  roaren  t»iele  fdjbne 
23ttber  in  biefer  ©aHerie 


2.  In  the  expression  e£  gi6t,  e£  is  consistently  treated 
as  the  grammatical  subject;  it  is  never  omitted,  but 
stands  either  before  or  after  the  verb,  as  the  rules  for  the 
arrangement  of  the  sentence  may  require  (see  222  a) ;  the 
verb  always  remains  in  the  singular,  and  the  logical  sub- 
ject stands  in  the  accusative  as  the  grammatical  object  of 
gibt: 


There  is  a  better  road,  viz. 
along  the  Neckar 

Formerly,  there  were  more  in- 
dependent cities  in  Germany 
than  now 

When  there  were  no  railroads 
and  telegraphs 


(§8  gibt  einen  befferen  2Beg,  nomlid) 

ben  D^ecfor  entlang 
griif)er  gab  e8  mefyr  freie  ©tabte  in 

2)eutfd)lanb  ate  jefct 

Site  e8  nod)  feine  (Sifenbafuien  unb 
Xelegra^en  gab 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  127 

194.  It  is  somewhat  difficult  to  define  the  difference 
between  the  use  of  e£  ift  (e£  ftnb)  and  that  of  e3  gibt. 

1.  In  accordance  with  the  original  meaning  of  the  verb, 

e3  gi6t  is  often  used  to  denote  that  something  is  produced 

by,  or  follows  from,  certain  conditions : 

A  quarrel  ensued  (S§  gab  ©treit 

A  terrible  confusion  was  the      (§8  gab  eine  furd)terud)e  Sernurrmig 
consequence 

2.  On  the  other  hand,  e$  ift  (e3  ftnb)  should  be  used 
when  the  predicate  is  an  adjective  ;  and  when  the  predi- 
cate is  a  past  participle,  fcin  or  iuerben  should  be  used  ac- 
cording to  92 : 

There  were  many  of  my  friends  (S3  roaven  toief e  Don  meincn  ftxtuiu 

present  ben  gegeumartig 

There    were     many    persons  (S$  nmrben  Iriele  ^erfonen  getotet 

killed  or  injured  ober  t)ertt)unbet 

3.  (S3  gibt  is  used  to  denote  the  existence  of  a  subject, 

either  in  general  (when  no  place  is  specified),  or  in  its 

natural  surroundings  : 

There  are  white  elephants  (§8  gibt  toeifce  (Sfepfyanten 

There  are  lions  in  Africa,  but  (58  gibt  i'otnetx  in  $frifa,  abcr  ntdjt 

not  in  Europe  in  Chtropa 

There  are  about  180  millions  G?8   gibt    ungefafjr    180  SJiillioiten 

of    Mohammedans    in    the  2ftot)ammebaner  in  ber  SSett 

world 

There   are    men  who    would  (58  gibt  3ftenfd)en,  bie  ba§>  Inerbicten 

gladly  accept  this  offer  gem  annetjmen  ttntrben 

There    are    flowers    that  eat  (5$  gibt  tinmen,   mld)t  3nfeften 

insects  frcffcn 

There  are  edible  birds'-nests  (S$  gibt  efjbare  SSogehtefter 

4.  @3  ift  (c3  ftnb)  is  used  to  denote  the  accidental  or 
temporary  existence,  in  a  specified  place,  of  a  subject 
which  might  as  naturally  be  in  another  place : 


128  ADVERBS,   ETC. 

There  are  white  elephants  in  (58  ftnb  metfee  (Stepfjanten  in  biefer 

this  menagery  Menagerie 

There  are  fifteen  persons  in  (£%  ftnb  fiinfeetm  ^erfonen  in  biefem 

this  room  3^nimer 

There  are  beautiful  flowers  in  (£$  ftnb  fd)bne  SBuimett  in  biefem 

this  bouquet  ©traufte 

There  is  a  bird's-nest  in  this  (S§   ift    cin    SBogelnejt    in    biefem 

tree  $8ctume 

a.  But  notice  the  common  formula : 
There  was  once  a  man  who,  etc.      (£8  mar  einmal  etn  2Jtann,  ber  *c 

5.  There  are  many  less  definite  cases  in  which  either 
e$  gtbt  or  e3  ift  (c3  ftnb)  should  be  used  according  as  the 
conditions  seem  to  approach  those  stated  under  3  or  those 
stated  under  4.  In  some  cases  the  one  expression  would 
be  nearly  as  correct  as  the  othei. 

195.  While  the  construction  explained  in  192,  3  is 
more  common  than  the  corresponding  English  construc- 
tion with  there,  there  are  on  the  other  hand  numerous 
cases  in  which  there  is  (there  are)  should  not  be  translated 
either  by  e£  ift  (e$  ftnb)  or  e£  gtbt.  More  definite  expres- 
sions are  to  be  preferred,  and  the  student  is  advised  to 
make  use  of  such,  whenever  they  readily  suggest  them- 
selves : 

There  is  a  bridge  across  the      23et  $oln  fiiljrt  (leads)  etne  SBriicfe 

Khine  near  Cologne  iiber  ben  Styeiii 

There  are  twelve  companies  in      Sin    Regiment    Ijat    jlDotf    (£oms 

a  regiment  pagnien 

There  is  Prussic  acid  in  peach-      s.pftrftd)fevne     entljaUen     (contain) 

stones  SBlaufcutre 

In  that  year  there  was  a  great      3n  jenem  Statjre  r)errfcr)te   (ruled, 
famine  .  prevailed)  eine  gro6e§unger*uot 

a.  It  is,  especially,  often  necessary  to  contract  there  is 
(there  are)  with  a  following  relative  clause  into  a  single 
clause : 


ADVERBS,    ETC. 


129 


The  teacher  asked  how  many- 
had  been  in  Germany,  and  it 
appeared  that  there  were 
only  five  of  us,  who  had  ever 
been  there 

196*     Though.     Conj.     1. 
2.   With  less  emphasis,  = 
allein  (see  170,  II,  2) : 

I  have  seen  him  since  he  was 
married,  though  very  rarely 

I  have  paid  the  bill,  though  un- 
willingly 


3)er  i'etyrcr  fragte,  nrie  triete  in 
2)eutfd)lanb  gerocfen  feten,  unb  e8 
getgte  ftd),  bafj  nur  fiinf  uon  wis 
je  ba  gercefen  roaren 


=  although;  see  150. 
hotvever,  bod),  jebod),  aber, 

3d)  fjabe  tfjn  gefeljeu,  feitbem  cr  fid) 
toertjeivatet  l)at,  aber  nur  fetten 

3d)  Ijabe  bte  SKedjnung  begaljtt,  jebod) 
nur  ungern 


3.  For  as  though,  see  152,  2  e. 


197.     Through,  and  Throughout. 
l)inburdj  (see  130  and  131) : 

The  president  will  pass  through 

to-morrow  morning 
If  the  town  is  unoccupied,  we 

are  to  march  through  without 

stopping 


I.  Adv.     1.   2)urd), 


2)er  ^rtijtbent  fommt  morgen  friify 

[f)ier]  burd) 
Senn  bte  ©tabt   unbefe^t   iji,  fo 

fallen  ttrtt  ofyne  un$  aufgufyatten 

burd)tnarfd)ieren,  or  Ijinburd)  mar* 

fdjteren 

a.  2)urd)  forms  with  verbs  both  genuine  and  "sepa- 
rable "  compounds,  sometimes  without  essential  difference 
in  meaning ;  the  genuine  compounds,  however,  are  always 
transitive.     See  below,  II,  1  a. 

2.  Throughout,  in  alien  2)ingen,  in  alien  ©tiiden,  buvtf)- 
cms,  burd)meg : 

The   fellow  acted  throughout      2)er  $erl  Ijanbette  burdjtocg  nne  tin 
like  a  coward  geigling 

II.  Prep.  1.  2)urd),  often  strengthened  by  a  following 
burd)  or  Ijinburct)  (see  134,  3) : 


130 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


The  captain  was  shot  through 

the  arm 
Sigurd    rode    without    fear 

through  the  wall  of  flames 
Through  his  intercession 

a.  The  preposition  through 

the  adverb  burd)  (see  above,  I, 

We  have  run  through  the  whole 
forest 

I  have  sought  through  the 
whole  library 

198.    Till,  Until.    I.  Prep. 

We   had   to    wait    till    seven 

o'clock 
From   morn    till  evening,  till 

midnight 

2.  Not  until,  erft : 
The  mistake  was  not  discovered 
until  the  next  morning 

II.  Conj.     1.  S8t3: 

We  had  to  wait  till  the  carriage 
returned 

b.  Not  until,  jtidjt  efyer  aU 

al3,  erft  iDcnu  (see  205,  II), 

strengthened  by  a  preceding 

have  occurred  repeatedly : 

His  innocence  was  not  dis- 
covered until  he  had  spent 
five  years  in  prison 

He  never  paid  his  debts  till  he 
was  compelled  to  do  so 


£)er  §auptmann  nutrbe  burd)  ben 

Hrm  gefdjoffen 
©igurb  ritt  ofyne  gurdjt  burd)  bic 

glammenmauer  l)tnburd) 
2)urd)  feine  Sermittelung 

may  often  be  rendered  by 

la): 

5£ir  ftub  burd)  beu  gangeu  SSatb  ge= 
laufeu,  or  ttrir  Ijaben  ben  gau^en 
SBatb  burdjlaufen 

3d)  t)abc  bie  gaujc  SBtbUotfjef  burd)* 
fud)t,  or  burd)gejud)t 

1.  93t3,  b\$  ju  (see  199,  4  b)  i 
SSir  mugten  bis  fteben  UI)r  marten 

$om  SIftorgen  bis  pun  $benb,  bis 
SWittentadjt 


2)er  3rrtum  rourbe  erft  ben  ndd)ften 
Sftorgen  entbecft 

3Bir  mugten  marten,  bt«  ber  SBagen 
juriicffam 

bi§,  or,  more  commonly,  erft 
erft  nactjbem ;  erft  may  be 
immer,  if  a  thing  is  said  to 

©cine  Unfd)utb  nutrbe  erft  cutbetft, 
ate  {or  nad)bem)  er  fd)on  fiinf 
3af)re  im  ©efangniffe  gugebrad)t 
Ijatte 

(§r  begaljfte  feine  ©diutben  immer 
erft/  menu  er  ba$u  gegnumgen 
nuirbe 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  131 

199.  To.  Prep.  In  many  cases,  to  marks  the  indirect 
object;  it  should  then  be  rendered  by  the  simple  dative; 
see  63.  When  the  simple  dative  cannot  be  used,  to  should 
be  translated  by  a  preposition. 

1.  Before  nouns  denoting  persons  or  pronouns  referring 
to  them. 

a.  After  intransitive  verbs  always  use  ju : 

I  hastened  to  a  physician  3d)  elite  311  cinem  $rgte 

They  came  to  king  Alfred  as      @te  famen  gu  $onig  2Ufreb  al8  @e* 
ambassadors  fcmbte 

b.  After  verbs  denoting  delivering,  sending,  transmit- 

ting,  writing  etc.  (which  may  also  be  followed  by  a  simple 

dative,  see  67)  use  cm : 

The  courier  delivered  the  dis-      $)er  Courier  iibergab  bie  2)epefd)en 
patches  to  the  ambassador  bem  ©ejanbten,  or  an  ben  ©e* 

fanbten 
The  doctor  wrote  to  me  2)er  S)oftor  fdjrieb  mir,  or  an  mid) 

c.  After  fcnbcu  and  fcfjicfen,  jit  may  be  used  if  a  person 

is  sent: 

The  princess  sent  a  messenger      2)ie  ^rin^efftn  fanbte  etnen  23oten  git 
to  him  ifjm,  or  an  tfyn 

2.  Before  names  of  towns  and  countries  always  use 

nad): 

We  shall  go  to  Italy  2Bir  roerben  nad)  3talien  gefyen 

Napoleon    hastened    back   to      9?aJ>oleon  eitte  nad)  ^ariS  gitriid 
Paris 

3.  Before  other  nouns  denoting  places,  the  rather  in- 
definite mid)  may  be  employed,  but  generally  one  of  the 
more  definite  in,  an  or  auf,  as  the  case  may  be,  should  be 
used : 


132 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


We  went  to  church  this  morn- 
ing 

The  emperor  retired  to  a 
monastery 

The  army  marched  back  to  the 
Rhine 

Hermann  accompanied  Doro- 
thea to  the  spring 

The  maiden  went  to  the  market 

The  pirate  carried  the  princess 
to  a  desert  island 


Sir  gingen  fyeute  9ftorgen  in  Me 

$ird)e,  or  gur  $ird)e;  see  below,  6 
2)er  $aifer  309  ftd)  in  ein  Softer 

guriicf 
2)te  2lrmee  marfdjierte  an  ben  Sftfyeiu 

gurud 
Hermann  begteitete  £)orotl)ea  on  bie 

OueUe 
2)aS  2ftabd)en  giitg  auf  ben  Sftarft 
2>er  ©eerauber  fcfyteppte  bie  $rtif- 

gefftu  auf  eine  nriifte  3ufel 


The  stranger  followed  me  from 
the  hotel  to  the  corner  of 
William  Street 

I  walked  with  difficulty  from 
my  bed  to  the  window 

From  first  to  last 


4.  a.  In  the  sense  of  up  to,  as  far  as,  b\§  should  be 
added  to  the  preposition  by  which  to  would  otherwise  be 
expressed : 

2)er  grembe  folgte  mir  uom  §otel 

bis  an  bie  (or  btS  gur)  (Scfe  ber 

SBityetmjirajje 
(§S  murbe  mir  farmer,  toom  SBette  bis 

an  baS  genfter  gu  getjen 
SBom  erften  bi§  gum  lefeten;  0011  2ln= 

fang  bis  gu  (Snbe 

&.  Before  numerals,  bi3  alone  should  be  used ;  before 
names  of  towns  and  countries,  also  before  the  names  of 
the  months  and  days  of  the  week,  unless  preceded  by  the 
definite  article,  and  in  a  few  fixed  expressions,  6t3  is  suf- 
ficient : 

dv  raudjte  jeben  £ag  fftnf  bis  gelju 

QEigarren 
3d)  arbeitete  jeben  $benb  uon  jicbeu 

bis  elf 
3dj  reifte  mit  meiner  ©djroefter  oon 

bonbon  bis  [nad)]  3)ot>er 
$on  2ftontag  bis  2)onnerftag,  or  com 

$ftontag  bis  gum  2>onnerftag 


He  smoked  from  five  to  ten 

cigars  a  day 
I  studied  from  seven  to  eleven 

every  night 
I  travelled  with  my  sister  from 

London  to  Dover 
From  Monday  to  Thursday 


5.  With  an  infinitive.    See  119  ff. 


ADVERBS,   ETC.  133 

6.  Idioms: 

to  a  ball  auf  einen  53aU  to  school  gur  ©d)ute,  in  bie  ©djule; 

to  bed  gu  SBett  indefinitely,  to  a  school  auf  [eine] 

to  breakfast  gum  griifyftutf  ©dmte 

to  church  gur  $ird)e,  in  bie  $ird)e  to  supper  gum  SIbenbeffen 

to  congress  in  ben  (Eongrefj  to    the  theatre    in   ba%  (or   in$) 

to  dinner  gum  Sftittageffen  Sweater 

to  jail  in  ba%  ©efongniS  to  the  university  gur  Unioerfitcit, 

to  a  meeting  in  eine  (or  gu  einer)  auf  bie  Untoerfitcit;  indefinitely ,  to 

$erfammlung  a  university  auf  [eine]  ilntoer* 

to  parliament  in  ba8  s$avlament  fitcit 
to  a  party  in  eine  ©efellfdjaft 

200.  Toward  (towards).     Prep.      1.    After  a  verb  of 

motion,  jit,  placed  after  its  noun ;   also  auf  .  .  .  ^lt,  nadj 

.  .  .  f)er,  nadj  .  .  .  f)tn  (see  133) : 

We  hastened  toward  the  city  2Bir  eilten  ber  ©tabt  gu 

The  boy  ran  toward  me  2)er  $nabe  eilte  auf  mid)  gu 

The  enemy  retired  toward  the  3)er  geinb  gog  fic^  nad)  ber  93rude 

bridge  f)tn  guriicf 

Toward  the  east  9tad)  Often  f)in,  or  gegen  Often 

2.  To  denote  a  personal  relation,  gegen  : 

He  always  acted  very  friendly      (Sr  geigte  fid)  immer  fetjr  freunbtid) 
toward  me  gegen  mid) 

3.  To  denote  aim,  purpose,  ju  : 

The  professor   gave  me  fifty      2)er  ^rofeffor  gab  mir  fiinfgig  3ftarf 
marks  toward  this  object  gu  biefem  Qm&z 

4.  To  state  a  number  approximately,  gegenr  ungefafjr : 
It  was  toward  five  o'clock  (§8  mar  gegen  (or  ungefafyv)  fiinf  Ul)r 

201.  Under.    I.  Adv.    §tmmter,  barunter ;  with  certain 

verbs,  in  certain  senses  (see  131),  ituter : 

The  fox  tried  to  slip  under  2)er   gud)8   uerfudjte   barunter  gu 

fd)tu:pfen 
The  boat  went  under  2)a8  Soot  ging  unter 


134 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


II.  Prep. 

She   is  the  happiest  creature 

under  the  sun 
The  child  fell  under  the  wheels 

of  the  carriage 
Five  persons  were  buried  under 

the  ruins 


1.  Generally,  unter : 

©te  ift  ba$  glitcf (id)fte  ©efdjopf  unter 

ber  ©onne 
2)a8  $utb  fiei  unter  bie  ftaber  be8 

2Bagen8 
f?iinf  ^erfoueu  rourben  unter  ben 

£riimmern  begrabeu 


2.  Idioms : 

To  take  under  consideration 
Under  date  of  the  21st  inst. 
To  trample  under  foot 
Under  ground 
To  be  under  the  necessity 
Under  pain  of  death 


3n  (ffrmagung  gietjeu 

Unter  bem  21,  b.  WL  (biefes  aflonats) 

Sftit  gitfjen  tteten 

Unter  bem  23oben;  unter  ber  @rbe 

©enotigt  fein 

23et  £obe8ftrafe 


Until.     See  Till,  198. 

Up.     I.  Adv.     1.  To  denote  locality,  oben : 


202. 

203. 

The  hermit  lived  up  on  the 

mountain 
Up  there,  up  yonder 


2)er  (Sinfiebler  tnoljnte  oben  auf  bem 

Serge 
2)a  oben,  bort  oben;  see  192, 1 


2.  After  verbs  of  motion,  Ijtnauf,  Ijerauf  (see  133) ;  in 

certain  idioms  (see  131),  mtf : 

Let  us  go  up 
Do  not  come  up 
The  boy  got  up  at  7  o'clock 
I  was  up  early  this  morning 
I  woke  up  at  midnight 
The  prisoner  walked  up  and 
down  in  his  cell 


£aJ3t  uns  Ijtnaufgefyen 
$ommen  @ie  nidjt  fyerauf 
3)er  tnabe  jtanb  urn  7  Ul)r  auf 
3d)  niar  tynte  9ftorgeu  fdjon  frul)  auf 
3d)  road)te  urn  TOtternadjt  auf 
£)er  ©efangene  ging  in  feiner  3efle 
auf  unb  ab,  or  auf  unb  nieber 


II.  Prep.  The  preposition  up  should  be  expressed  by 
an  accusative  (see  79,  2)  followed  by  (jerauf  or  fyinauf  (see 
133);  to  express  the  goal  of  the  motion,  the  accusative 
may  be  preceded  by  auf,  and  the  adverb  may  be  omitted : 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


135 


We  swam  up  the  river  as  far  as 

the  new  bridge 
Drive  slowly  up  the  hill 

I  climbed  up  a  cherry-tree 


SSir  fdjiucnnmen  ben  gfufj  fyinauf  bt« 
gur  ncucn  SBviicfe 

ftatyren  ©ie  langfam  ben  23erg  I)in* 
auf 

3d)  fletterte  anf  etnen  $irfd)baum 
ttinauf] 

204.  Well.  I.  Adv.  1.  Generally,  tooljl,  gut;  the 
former,  however,  is  so  often  used  as  an  unemphatic  par- 
ticle in  the  senses  of  indeed,  of  course,  I  suppose,  etc., 
that  whenever  there  is  any  emphasis  on  well,  it  should  be 
translated  by  gut,  rcdjt  gut,  feljr  gut,  red)t  tooljt  or  fefyr 
too  1)1 : 


The  boy  speaks  German  well 

I  know  your  friend  well 

I  know  very  well  that  you  were 

at  home 
The  old  woman  scolded  him 

well 

2.  With  the  verb  to  he  : 

She  is  quite  well  again 

That  is  well 

It  is  well  with  him 

It  is  well  for  us  that  you  came 

3.  Idioms: 
as  well  as  fomoljt  aU  and) 
well  done!  feljr  gnt! . 
well  to  do  mofylfyabenb 
well  enough  ju'emltd)  gut 
all  is  well  that  ends  well  (Snbe 

gut,  alle§  gnt 

II.  Interjection.    9?uu,  to  of)  tan : 

Well,  let  us  start  2Bol)lan,  tafjt  un8  aufbredjen 

Well,  how  did  you  sleep  9?un,  tine  fyaft  bu  gefdjlafen 

Well,  then,  begin  9?un  gut,  fattgen  @ie  an 


35er  $nabe  foridjt  gnt  2)eutfd) 
3d)  fenne  beinen  greunb  red)t  gut 
3d)  ttetfj  red)t  gut,  baft  bit  gu  §aufe 

tuarft 
®ic  SHtc  fdjalt  il)n  gnt  (or  titdjttg) 

au8 


©ie  ift  nrieber  ganj  rooljt,  or  gefunb 
2)a«  ift  gut 
<S8  ftefyt  tt)ol)t  tntt  il)m 
@«  ift  gut  fur  un8  (or  e«  ift  ein  ©Uicf 
fiir  unS),  bajj  bit  famft 

and  well  he  might  nub  mit  SKedjt 
well  off  gut  baran 
to  take  a  thing  well  etroaS  gut  auf* 
nefjmen 


136 


ADVERBS,  ETC. 


205.  When.  I.  Adv.  The  interrogative  adverb  when 
is  toctrnt: 

When  did  Goethe  die?  SBatm  ftarb  ©oetlje  ? 

I  was  asked  when   I  should      SJlott  fragtc  mid),  to  cum  id^  abreifen 
depart  roerbe 

II.  Conj.  TT^^ti  should  be  translated  by  aU,  when  re- 
ferring to  an  individual  act  or  condition  in  the  past ;  when 
it  is  equal  to  whenever,  it  should  be  translated  by  luenn  ; 
see  141 : 


When  Correggio  first  saw  Ea- 
phaePs  '  Saint  Cecilia/  he  ex- 
claimed :  "  And  I,  too,  am  a 
painter  " 

When  I  was  in  Paris  (i.  e.  I 
was  there  but  once),  I  often 
went  to  the  theatre 

When  (i.  e.  whenever)  I  was 
absent,  my  younger  brother 
took  my  place 

When  (i.  e.  whenever)  I  go  to 
Europe,  I  never  fail  to  visit 
Munich 

When  you  visit  us  the  next 
time,  you  must  stay  longer 

When  still  very  young,  the 
prince  was  sent  to  England 


2H8  Correggio  mm  erftett  WlaU  9ta= 
pfyaets  ,§eitige  GiacUia'  falj,  rief 
er  cms:  „Unb  id)  bin  and)  ein 
Scaler" 

2118  id)  in  $ari8  roar,  gtng  id)  oft  ins 
Sweater 

SBenn  id)  abtoefenb  roar,  ttaljm  tnetn 
jiingerer  23ruber  nteine  ©telle  ein 

2Benn  id)  nad)  (Suropa  gelje,  oerfeljte 
id)  niemate  2ftiind)en  m  befudjen 

SSenn  ©ie  un8  ba8  nadtfte  Wlal  be* 
fudjen,  miiffett  @te  langer  bleiben 

5118  ber  ^ring  nod)  gang  jimg  mar, 
rourbe  er  nad)  (Snglanb  gefanbt 


206.     Where.     Adv.     1.  3So  ;  =  whither  toofjtn ;  /rom 
where  tvoi)tx  (see  134,  2) : 


Where  do  you  live  ? 

May  I    ask  where    you   are 

going  ? 
Where  does  he  come  from  ? 

2.  Compounds  (see  28,  2) : 


2Bo  rooljtten  ©ie? 

Starf  id)  fragen,  rooljht  @ic  geljen, 

or  roo  ©ie  fytngeljen  ? 
SBoljer  fommt  er,  or  roo  fommt  er 

Ijer?    * 


ADVERBS,   ETC. 


137 


whereabout  too,  too  fjcntm 
whereas  (since),  see  188 ;  (while 

on  the  other  hand)  to(il)renb, 

tooljtngegen 
whereat  toobei,  tooriiber;  see  153 
wherever  too  nur  immer;  see  165 


wherein  toorin 

whereof  toooon,  tooriiber;  see  178 

whereon  tooran,  toorauf;  see  180 

whereto  to  out 

whereupon  tooranf 

wherewith  toomit 


207.    While  (whilst).    Conj.    9Baf)renb ;  see  141 : 


While  I  slept,  the  boat  drifted 

away 
He    is    a    soldier,    while    his 

brother  is  a  physician 
While  in  Paris,  I  learned  of  my 

uncle's  death 


2Scit)renb  id)  fd)tief,  trieb  ba§  S8oot 

baoon 
<£x  if!  <Solbat,  toarjrenb  fein  ©ruber 

Hrjt  ift 
SBa^renb  id)  in  ^aris  roar,  fjorte  id) 

Don  bem  £obe  meineS  Onfels 


208.    Whether.     Conj 

I  doubt  whether  he  will  come 
I  asked  the  doctor  whether  I 
should   continue  the   medi- 
cine or  not 
Whether  or  no,  he  must  yield 


Prep. 


D6: 


3d)  gtoeifle,  ob  er  fommen  toirb 
3d)  frctgtc  ben  5)oftor,  ob  id)  fort= 

fatjren  folle,  bie  2ftebigiu  eingu- 

nerjtnen,  ober  nid)t 
Ob  er  nun  rotH  ober  md)t,  er  mufi 

nad)geben 

:  together  with,  accompanied 


griebrid)   fam   mit   einem  grogen 

§eere 
(Sr  (pielte  mit  feinen  @d)u(fameraben 

33aU 
Wlit  {or  gegen) . .  .  fampfen 


209.     With. 

by,  mit: 

Frederick  came  with  a  great 
army 

He  played  ball  with  his  school- 
mates 

To  fight  with  [or  against)  .  .  . 

a.  With,  accompanied  by  an  unaccented  pronoun,  may- 
be translated  by  mit,  used  adverbially : 

Come  with  us  $ommt  mit 

I  should  like  to  go  with  you  3d)  modjte  gent  mttge^en 

b.  With,  governing  a  noun  followed  by  a  participle  or 
an  adverbial  phrase,  may  be  rendered  by  the  accusative ; 
see  81. 


138  ADVERBS,   ETC. 

2.  =  near,  in  the  house  of,  about  a  person,  6et : 

She  lives  with  her  parents  ©ie  tuofynt  bet  iljren  Csltertt 

I  have  the  account  with  me  3d)  fjabe  bie  Sftedjnnng  bei  mir 

He  has  influence  with  the  mi-  (Sr  tjctt  (Sinflng  bei  bem  2ftintfter 

nister 

It  is  different  with  the  French,  (§3  ift  anberS  bet  ben  granjofen 

(or  in  France) 

3.  To  express  means  or  manner,  tntt : 

I  am  writing  with  your  pen  3dj  fd)reibe  mtt  beiner  geber 

With  pleasure  2ftit  $ergnitgen 

With  great  difficulty  9ftit  grower  Wliity 

With  these  words  he  departed  9fttt  btefen  SSorten  ging  er  fort 

4.  To  express  cause,  t>or ;  after  a  passive  verb,  t>on : 

Mad  with  pain  SSaljnfinntg  Dor  ©d)mergen 

Bowed  down  with  grief  $om  Summer  gebiuft 

5.  =  inspite  of,  bet,  tro| : 

With  all  his  money  he  is  a      S8et  (or  trofe)  all  feinem  ©eibe  ift  er 
poor  man  bod)  em  armer  Wlann 

210.  Within.     I.  Adv.     Snnen,  brinnen;  after  a  verb 

of  motion,  nad)  tnnen,  fjtncin,  herein  (see  133) : 

It  is  warm  and  pleasant  within      3nnen  (or  brinnen)  ift  e§  warm  unb 

an  g  en  e$  m 
He  came  within  (£r  lam  herein 

He  went  within  (§r  ging  Ijinetn 

From  within  $on  tnnen,  t»on  brinnen 

II.  Prep,     3m,  innertjatb ;  of  time,  also  binnett : 
Within  the  church  3n  ber  $ird)e 

Within  certain  limits  3nnert)alb  genriffer  ©renjen 

This  is  not  within  my  power         2)te8  ftel)t  ntd)t  in  meiner  ©eroalt 
Within  three  days  93tnnen  brei  £agen 

211.  Without.  I.  Adv.  Without,  outside  (183),  auften, 
brauften ;  after  a  verb  of  motion,  ttad)  auf$en,  f)inait$,  f)erau3 
(see  133): 


WORD-ORDER.  139 

I  had  to  stand  without,  in  the  3d)  mugte  brcmgen  im  Sftegen  fteljen 

rain 

He  went  without  (5r  ging  IjinauS 

From  without  35on  augeit 

II.  Prep.    1.  =  not  within,  au^erf)a!6 : 
Without  the  gates  of  the  city        Slufjerfjatb  bev  ©tabttljore 

2.  =  not  withy  oI)itc  (see  10) : 

The  poor  woman  was  entirely      2)ie  armc  S^u  tt)ar  tiotlftanbtg  otjne 

without  means  Sftittet 

A  knife  without  a  blade  (Sin  Sfteffer  oljne  $linge 

3.  A  verbal  noun  in  -ing  dependent  on  without  should 
be  rendered  by  an  infinitive  with  ^it ;  see  128,  5  a. 


TOaorJ)^©r5et* 

<~ 

212.  A  sentence  is  called  declaratory  when  it  expresses 
a  simple  statement ;  it  is  called  interrogative,  when  it  ex- 
presses a  question ;  it  is  called  optative,  when  it  expresses 
a  wish. 

213.  There  are  three  ways  of  arranging  the  German 
sentence ;  they  differ  only  in  the  position  of  the  finite 
verb. 

I.  The  finite  verb  occupies  the  second  place  : 

a.  in  all  independent  declaratory  sentences ; 

b.  in  independent  interrogative  sentences  beginning 
with  an  interrogative  pronoun,  adjective,  or  adverb. 

This  may  be  called  the  Normal  Order. 

II.  The  finite  verb  occupies  the  first  place : 

a.   in  all  independent  interrogative  sentences  in  which 


140  WOKD-ORDER. 

the  question  is  not  expressed  by  an  interrogative  pronoun, 
adjective,  or  adverb ; 

b.  in  interrogative  clauses  used  to  express  a  condition 
(see  235,  2) ; 

c.  in  independent  optative  sentences  (see  235,  3) ; 

d.  quite  rarely,  merely  for  emphasis  (see  235,  4). 

This  may  be  called  the  Interrogative  or  Emphatic 
Order. 

III.  The  finite  verb  occupies  the  last  place  in  all  sub- 
ordinate clauses.  This  may  be  called  the  Dependent 
Order. 

I.     THE  NORMAL   ORDER. 

214.  In  all  independent  declaratory  sentences  the  finite 
verb  occupies  the  second  place ;  it  may  be  preceded  either 
by  the  subject,  with  its  qualifiers,  or  by  any  other  one 
element  of  the  sentence  with  its  qualifiers,  which  the 
writer  or  speaker  for  rhetorical  reasons  may  wish  to  place 
first. 

215.  A  word  may  be  placed  at  the  head  of  the  sen- 
tence either  for  emphasis ;  or  to  establish  a  proper  logical 
connection  with  the  preceding  sentence ;  or,  simply,  for 
the  sake  of  variety,  so  that  every  sentence  may  not  begin 
with  the  same  element.     Thus,  for  instance  : 

My  father  gave  me  yesterday  a  book 

SJcein  SSater  f  djenf  te  mir  gefteru  ein  23ud),  or 
9ft ir  f  6)  e  u !  t  e  mein  55a ter  geftent  ein  SBnd),  or 

©eftern         f  d)  e  n !  t  e  mein  $ater  ntir  ein  SBnd),  or 
Sin  23ud)      fdfyenfte  mir  tnein  $ater  geftent 

My  father  has  not  given  me  the  book,  he  has  only  lent  it  to  me 
©efdjenft       1)  a  t  mir  mein  $ater  ba%  23ud)  nidjt,  nur  getieljen 


WORD-ORDER.  141 

a.  The  same  effect  which  is  produced  in  English  by 
such  constructions  as 

It  was  in  Strassburg  that  he  met  Goethe 

may  generally  be  produced  in  German  by  placing  the  em- 
phasized element  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence : 

3n  ©trctgburg  traf  er  mit  ©oetlje  gufammen 
although  it  is  quite  correct  to  say : 

(58  mar  in  ©tragbitrg,  mo  er  mit  ©oetlje  jmjammentraf 

216.  The  number  of  words  which  may  precede  the 
finite  verb  is  unlimited,  provided  they  form  only  one  of 
the  elements  of  the  sentence,  i.  e.  either  the  subject,  or 
an  object,  or  the  predicate,  or  an  adverbial  phrase.  The 
subject,  for  instance,  may  consist  of  a  noun,  preceded  by 
the  article  and  one  or  more  adjectives,  and  followed  by  a 
relative  clause  or  an  adverbial  phrase,  any  part  of  which 
may  again  be  qualified  by  some  other  adjunct;  these  alto- 
gether are  regarded  as  forming  only  one  of  the  constituent 
parts  of  the  sentence  and  they  may  thus  all  precede  the 
finite  verb.  Several  adverbs  or  adverbial  phrases  quali- 
fying one  another  or  in  apposition  with  one  another,  may 
be  regarded  as  one  element  of  the  sentence,  and  may  pre- 
cede the  finite  verb.     Thus : 

The  king,  who  up  to  the  day  S)cr  $ontg,  ber  bi8  an  bem  £age,  on 

when    this    discovery    was  roetd)em  biefc  (Sntbecfung  gemad)t 

made,  had  had  the  greatest  murbe,  ba%  grogte  SBertrauen  in 

confidence   in  his  minister,  fetnen  Sftmtfkr  gefyabt  Ijatte,  mar 

was  greatly  shocked  by  his  fiber  feine  £reutoftgfeit  feljr  be= 

infidelity  ftiiqt 

In  the  house  on  the  hill,    a  3n  bem  §anfe  auf  bem  §iigel  molmt 

hermit  has  lived  for  many  fcfyon  fett  trielen  3al)ren  ein  ©in* 

years  jteMer 


142 


WORD-ORDER. 


a.  A  noun,  adjective  or  participle,  which  precedes  the 
subject  in  apposition,  is  regarded  as  a  separate  element  of 
the  sentence,  as  it  generally  takes  the  place  of  an  adver- 
bial clause  and  may  easily  be  resolved  into  such  a  clause ; 
it  should,  therefore,  be  followed  by  the  finite  verb : 

An  enemy  of  all  pomp  (=  be-      Sin  ftehtb  atteS  $runfe8,  entlteg  bcr 


cause  he  was  an  enemy  of 

all  pomp),  the  young  king  at 

once  discharged  many  of  the 

court  officials 
Faithful  to  his  vow,  he  devoted 

the  rest  of  his  life  to  the 

care  of  the  poor 
Tired  from  his  long  journey, 

he  lay  down  under  a  tree 


jimge  $ontg  fofort  t>iele  ber  §of= 
beatnten 


@emem  ©eliibbe  getreit,  nubmete  cr 

ben  Sfteft  femes  £eben$  ber  Wege 

ber  airmen 
(Srmiibet  toon  feiner  tangen  Sftetfe, 

legte  er  ftd)  unter  einem  23aume 

nicber 

217.  The  purely  coordinating  conjunctions,  especially 
unb  and,  ober  or,  aber,  fonbcrn  out  (see  161,  II),  aUeitt  hut, 
bernt  for,  when  standing  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence, 
are  felt  only  as  links  connecting  two  sentences,  not  as 
elements  of  either ;  hence  they  do  not  count  in  deter- 
mining the  position  of  the  verb.  A  few  others,  especially 
bocf),  jebod)  yet,  however,  enttoeber  either,  and  jtoctr,  to  be 
sure,  may  or  may  not  count : 

W)tx  g-riebrid)  fyiett  jein  SBerfpredjen 

m'djt 
3)a§  3eid)en  nntrbe   gcgeben,  unb 

balb  itoiitete  tie  ©d)iad)t  auf  ber 

garden  2tnie 
@ei  flitt,  ober  bu  mufet  ba$  .Bonier 

toeriaffen 
3ttoar  Uerfrcr)e  id)  (or  groar  id)  toer- 

ftefye)  tmr  toeing  toon  ber  2ftufif, 

bod)  liebe  id)  {or  bod)  id)  IkU)  jte 


But  Frederick  did  not  keep  his 

promise 
The  signal  was  given,  and  soon 

the  battle  raged  along  the 

whole  line 
Keep  quiet,  or  you  must  leave 

the  room 
To  be  sure,  I  know  very  little 

about  music,  but  I  am  very 

fond  of  it 


WORD-ORDER.  143 

218.  If  two  or  more  parallel  clauses  having  the  same 
subject  are  connected  by  nnb,  the  subject  need  not  be  re- 
peated in  the  second  and  following  clauses,  but  in  that 
case  the  finite  verb  must  immediately  follow  unb : 

On  the  third  day  the  stranger      91m  britten  Xage  ertyelt  ber  grembe 
received  his  money  and  then  fctn  ©elb  itnb  oerUefj  bann  bie 

left  the  town  ©tabt,  or  unb  bann  toertieg  cr  bie 

@tabt 

219.  Exclamations  are  generally  felt  as  standing  out- 
side of  the"  limits  of  the  sentence,  even  without  being 
separated  by  periods  or  exclamation  points : 

Alas !  it  was  too  late  2Id) !  e8  mar  fdjon  gu  fpdt 

Well,  I  have  done  what  you      SRun,    id)    Ijabe   getfjan,    tuad   bu 
desired  roiinfdjtejl 

220.  Occasionally,  concessive  clauses  at  the  head  of  a 

sentence  are  disregarded  in  determining  the  position  of 

the  finite  verb  of  the  principal  clause : 

Even  if  you  start  at  once,  you      SScnn  hn  and)  fofort  abretfefi,  bu 
will  arrive  there  too  late  fommft  bod)  )ii  jpcit  an,  instead  of 

jo  (see  140  and  221)  fommft  bu 

bod)  gu  fpat  an 

However  weighty  reasons  the      @o  nrid)tige  ©riinbc  ber  9ftimfter 

minister   might    bring   for-  aud)  toorbungcnmodjte,  ber^onig 

ward,  the   king  would    not         adjtete  ntd)t  auf  feine  SBorte,  in- 

heed  his  words  stead  of  fo  ad)tett  ber  $onig  bod) 

md)t  auf  jetne  SBorte 

221.  If  the  first  element  of  the  sentence  consists  of 
several  words,  these  may  be  summed  up  in  a  demonstra- 
tive pronoun  or  adverb  (see  140),  which  then,  naturally, 
also  precedes  the  verb,  since  it  cannot  be  considered  an 
independent  element  of  the  sentence : 

By  the  well,  outside  the  gate,         51m  SBrunncn  Dor  bcm  £I)ore, 
There  stands  a  linden-tree  2)a  fteljt  ciu  SJtnben&aum 


144  WORD-ORDER. 

Whoever  says  this,  lies  SSer  ba$  fagt,  ber  hlgt 

Although  he  is  poor,  yet  he  is  Dbgletd)  er  arm  ifi,  fo  ift  er  bod) 

very  much  respected  fefyr  angefefjen 

The  more  you  give  him,  the  3c  tnefyr  bit  tljm  gtBfr,  befro  meljr 

more  he  will  ask  nrirb  er  Derlangen  _  V- 

222.  It  has  been  stated  that  the  finite  verb  always 
occupies  the  second  place  in  the  sentence.  If  the  subject 
does  not  precede  the  finite  verb,  it  generally  follows  im- 
mediately, but  it  may  be  separated  from  the  finite  verb  by 
a  pronoun  or  an  adverbial  phrase  bearing  comparatively 
little  emphasis : 

Yesterday,  my  father  gave  me  ©eftern  fcfyenfte  mir  mein  SBater  etn 

a  book  33ud) 

Now  it  is  once  more  my  broth-  3efct  fontmt  ttueber  eirnnat  mein 

er's  turn  ©ruber  an  bie  9talje 

For  this  reason,  a  Democrat  SDeSfyalb  ttntrbe  im  ttadjften  3al)re 

was  elected  the  next  year  ein  2)emofrat  erttaljlt 

a.  When  the  subject  is  a  pronoun  bearing  little  or  no 
emphasis,  it  should  naturally  stand  either  before,  or  im- 
mediately after,  the  ve*b ;  this  applies  also  to  e£  in  e3  gibt 
(see  193,  2) : 

Yesterday  he  gave  me  a  book        ©efiern  $ab  cr  mir  {never  mir  er) 

ein  23ud) 
At   that   time    there  was   no      3)amat8  gab  e§    feine  @djufe  im 
school  in  the  village  2)orfe 

223.  The  order  of  words  may  be  further  varied  by  the 
use  of  the  impersonal  e3  as  a  temporary  or  anticipatory 
subject  before  the  verb ;  the  latter  is  followed  (see  222) 
by  the  real  (or  logical)  subject  with  which  it  must  agree 
in  number  (see  82).  This  construction  is  used  to  render 
sentences  beginning  with  the  "expletive"  there  (see  192, 
3)  j  but  it  may  ai,  :>  be  employed  with  great  freedom  in 


WORD-ORDER.  145 

translating  ordinary  English  sentences  in  which  the  sub- 
ject precedes  the  verb,  except,  of  course,  when  the  subject 
is  a  pronoun.  It  may  be  used  for  variety,  or  for  emphasis, 
or  to  bring  the  subject  into  closer  proximity  to  some  other 
part  of  the  sentence  that  may  follow,  e.  g.  a  relative 
clause.     Thus : 

A  hundred  thousand  persons  (§8  tocmberten  lefcteS  3af)r  fjunbert* 

emigrated    to     the    United  tcmfenb  ^erfoneu  it  ad)  ben  SBer* 

States  last  year  eintgten  <§taatm  au8 

Nobody  can  now  claim  that  I  (S3  fann  Jet^t  memaiib  befjaupten, 

have  not  done  my  duty  baft  id)  meine  ^flidjt  nid)t  getljan 

l)abe 

Many  now  complained  of  him,  (§3  beHagten  fid)  ityt  fiber  tf)n  triefe, 

who  had  formerly  been  his  Me  friifyer  feine  beften  greunbe  ge* 

best  friends  toefen  roaren 

224.  The  parts  of  the  sentence  not  already  provided 
for  by  the  foregoing  rules  are  then  arranged  in  the  re- 
verse order  of  their  logical  importance :  the  most  impor- 
tant element,  viz.  the  most  direct  adjunct  of  the  finite 
verb,  occupies  the  last  place ;  it  is  preceded  by  the  next 
important  element,  often  its  own  qualifier;  that,  by  the 
next  in  importance,  etc.  The  finite  verb  near  the  begin- 
ning of  the  sentence  with  its  most  direct  complement  at 
the  end  of  the  sentence  thus  form  a  framework  inside  of 
which  the  remaining  elements  of  the  sentence  are  ar- 
ranged, the  heaviest  elements  tending  toward  the  end  of 
the  sentence. 

225.  If  the  finite  verb  is  an  auxiliary,  its  most  direct 
adjunct  is  the  infinitive  or  past  participle  belonging  to  it; 
the  latter  should  therefore  stand  at  the  end  of  the  sen- 
tence : 


146 


WORD-ORDER. 


His    uncle     had    died    three 

months  before 
Professor  &.  will  build  a  house 

next  year 
I  cannot  come  to-morrow 
The  bridge  had  been  torn  away 
Tannhauser  is  to  be  given  next 

Monday 


©etn  Onfel  roar  Dor  brei  SWonatcn 

geftorben 
^3rofeffor   ©.  roirb    [ftdj]   nacfjftes 

3a^r  ein  Jpaus  bauen 
3dj  farm  morgen  nid)t  fontmen 
3)ie  93rMe  roar  roeggeriffen  roorben 
9Md)ften  Sftoutag  foil  Xannfyaujer 

gcgeben  roerben 


226.  First  in  importance  among  the  complements  of 
the  principal  verb  rank  the  adverbs  of  place  and  direction 
(see  130) ;  such  adverbs,  therefore,  stand  at  the  end  of  the 
sentence  and  yield  this  position  only  to  infinitives  or  past 
participles,  as  according  to  225,  in  which  case  they  are 
prefixed  to  them.  Such  other  adverbial  or  substantive 
qualifiers  as  are  essential  to  the  meaning  of  the  verb,  or 
as  form  with  the  verb  more  or  less  fixed  or  idiomatic  ex- 
pressions, are  similarly  treated,  except  that  only  the 
shortest  and  most  common  among  them  are  ever  prefixed 
to  their  verbs.  It  has  been  customary  to  speak  of  such 
combinations  of  verbs  with  their  qualifiers  as  "  separable 
compound  verbs." 

Wltin  $ater  fam  gejlern  guriitf 
9Mn  $ater  roirb  morgen  gimid* 

fommert 
Sfteitt  $ater  ifi  nodj  ttidjt  gitriicfge* 

fommeti 
<£x  fcfyroieg  fttfl 
(§r  mug  ftifljdjroetgen 
§ent€   ftnbet    feine   SBerfammhtng 

ftatt 
SDiefe  28odje  Ijat  feme  $erfammiuug 

ftattgefunben 
SDer  9ftd)ter  oerurteitte  bn\  ©efan* 

genen  gum  Zo^e 
£>cr  ©efangene  roirb  gum  £obe  oer* 

urteilt  roerben 


|  My  father  came  back  yesterday 
My  father  will  return  to-mor- 
row 
My  father  has  not  yet  come 

back 
He  remained  silent 
He  must  remain  silent 
No  meeting  takes  place  to-day 

No  meeting  has  taken  place 
this  week 

The  judge  condemned  the  pris- 
oner to  death 

The  prisoner  will  be  condemned 
to  death 


WORD-ORDER.  147 

227.  Next  in  importance  rank  the  negatives  mtf)t  not, 
liic,  ttiemalS  never,  feine3n>cg§  not  at  all,  and  others : 

My  father  will  not  give  me  the      9ftem  SSater  mitt  mir  ba%  23ud)  nic^t 

book  geben 

The   meeting   will    not    take      2>ie  SBerfammlung  nrirb  fyeute  nidjt 

place  to-day  ftattftnben 

I  have  never  seen  the  president      3d)  l)abe  ben  ^raftbenten  nic  ge* 

fefyen 

228.  In  regard  to  the  arrangement  of  the  remaining 
members  of  the  sentence  greater  freedom  prevails,  but,  as 
a  rule,  the  same  general  principle,  viz.  that  the  elements 
which  bear  the  greatest  stress  tend  toward  the  end  of  the 
sentence,  here  also  holds  good.  For  that  reason,  the  direct 
object,  as  a  rule,  stands  nearer  the  end  of  the  sentence 
than  the  indirect,  but  not  by  any  means  always : 

My  friend  did  not  tell  me  this  2ftetn  ftreunb  fflt   mir   biefe  @e= 

story                              -  fdjidjte  nid)t  ergciljlt 
But 

My  friend  did  not  tell  it  to  his  9Mn  greunb  l)at  e$  feinem  93ater 

father  nidjt  ergaljtt 

Notice  the  same  difference  in  the  arrangement  of  the  two  sentences  in 
English. 

229.  In  doubtful  cases,  the  relative  importance  of  two 
elements  may  sometimes  be  determined  by  considering 
which  of  the  two  might  be  omitted  with  less  injury  to 
the  general  sense  of  the  passage  : 

"  Where  were  you  last  night !"  „3Bo  tnaren  ©ie  geftern  Slbenb  ?" 

"I  was   at   home  until  10  „3d)  mar  bi8  10  lu)r  gu  §aufe" 
o'clock  n 

I  bought  a  horse  at  once  and  3d)  faufte  mir  fogletd)  ein  $ferb  unb 

took   a   riding-lesson  every  nat)m  taglid)  eine  Sftettftunbe 

day 

He  was  sent  to  Siberia  by  or-  (Sr  unirbe  ouf  33efet)l  be$  Q^aren 

der  of  the  Czar  nad)  ©ibirten  gejtfjidft 


V 


148  WORD-ORDER. 

Bliicher  marched  upon  Paris      231itd)er  tnarfdjierte  mit  ber  grogten 
with  the  greatest  rapidity  ©ejdjminbigfeit  auf  ^)3ari8  311 

230.  In  very  long  sentences,  there  is  a  tendency  to  dis- 
tribute the  less  weighty  elements  between  the  weightier 
ones  so  as  not  to  throw  the  whole  weight  of  the  sentence 
on  one  end ;  the  beginner  should  avoid  long  sentences.     \ 

231.  As  to  the  arrangement  of  the  various  words  con-i 
stituting  one  of  the  elements  of  the  sentence,  it  should  be 
borne  in  mind  that,  as  a  general  rule,  the  qualifier  pre- 
cedes the  word  qualified.  It  is  particularly  important  to 
observe  this  rule  in  so  far  as  it  applies  to  infinitives,  ad- 
jectives and  participles. 

1.  Infinitives  are  always  preceded  by  their  qualifiers 
(see  119,  1) : 

It  is  easier  to  criticise  a  book  (§8  ift  leidjter,  eutSBud)  gu  Mtifteren, 

than  to  write  a  better  one  al§  eirt  beffereg  gu  fdjreiben 

The  thief   stole   through  the  2)er  2)ieb  fd)Ud)  burd)  ba%  Sunnier, 

room  without  awakening  the  oljne  Me  23ett)ofmer  gu  erroecfen; 

occupants  see  128,  5  a 

2.  Adjectives  and  past  participles  used  attributively 
must  be  preceded  by  their  qualifiers : 

The  two  hundred  knights,  faith-  2)ie  gmeilnmbert  tfyrem  §ergoge  bis 

ful  unto  death  to  their  duke,  in  ben  Sob  getreuen  fitter  xotu 

declined    to   surrender  the  gerten  fief),  bie  23urg  p  iibergeben 
castle 

We  stopped  over  night  in  a  SSir  btieben  nber  9?ad)t  in  einem 

village  situated  at  the  foot  of  am  guge  be8  ©ebtrgeS  geiegenen 

the  mountains  2)orfe 

3.  Adjectives  and  past  participles  used  predicatively  or 
appositively  are,  as  a  rule,  preceded  by  their  qualifiers, 
but  longer  phrases  sometimes  follow : 


WORD-ORDER.  149 

This  story  is  very  similar  to  3)iefe  ©efdjidjte  ifi  eiuer  fe^r  a'fmlid), 

one  which  Goethe  tells  in  his  meldje  ©oetlje  in  feiner  ©elbftbio- 

autobiography  grapt)ie  ergafytt 

The  count,  faithful  to  the  vow  2)er  ©raf,  bem  ©eliibbe  getreu  (or 

which  he  had  made  in  the  getreu  bem  ©eliibbe),  rceldjeS  er 

face  of  death,  made  a  pil-  im  $ngeftd)te  be8  £obe8  getfjan 

grimage  to  the  Holy  Land  Ijatte,  mad)te  eine  SMfaljrt  nad) 

bem  fjeittgen  £anbe 

Struck  with  the  strange  sight,  $on  bem  fettfamen  SInbticfe  betrof= 

the  young  painter  gazed  at  fen   (or  betroffen  toon  bem  felt* 

the   maiden   without  being  famen  ^nblicfe),  ftarrte  ber  junge 

able  to  speak  a  word  Sftater  ba%  Sftabdjen  an,  oljne  cin 

SBort  fpredjen  gu  fonnen 

4    Present  participles  are  always  preceded  by  their 
qualifiers : 

The   bottle  standing  on   my  2)ie   auf    metnem    ^utte    fteljenbe 

desk  contains  poison  Stafdje  enttjcitt  ©ift 

Ashamed  of  his  conduct,  the  ©id)  feine8S8etragen$fd)cimenb,ent» 

young  man  withdrew  from  fernte  ftd)  ber  junge  Sttann  au8 

the  company  ber  ©efellfdjaft 

232.  The  finite  verb  also  occupies  the  second  place  in 

all  questions  marked  as  such  by  an  interrogative  pronoun, 

adjective  or  adverb : 

Who  will  go  with  me  to  walk  ?  2Ber  mitt  nut  mir  tyaflieren  gefyen  ? 

Where  did  you  buy  this  pic-  2Bo  ftaft  bu  bieS  23Ub  gefauft  ? 

ture? 

Which  picture  do  you  mean  ?  2Betd)e8  23itb  meinji  bu  ? 

233.  The  declaratory  order  may  also  be  used  in  rhe- 
torical questions  to  express  astonishment : 

Do  you  mean  to  say  that  you  9?ur  arocmgig  Wlaxt  fyaben  ©ie  (or 

paid  only  twenty  marks  for  fatten  ©ie,  see  114  ff.)  fur  biefeS 

this  book  ?  23ud)  be$af)tt  ? 

Is  it  possible  that  you  have  ©ie  tjaben  Camlet  nie  gelefen? 
never  read  Hamlet  ? 


150  WORD-OUDER. 

II.    THE   INTERROGATIVE    OR    EMPHATIC    ORDER. 

234.  In  the  interrogative  or  emphatic  order  the  finite 
verb  occupies  the  first  place ;  all  the  other  elements  of  the 
sentence  are  arranged  as  in  the  declaratory  order. 

235.  1.  The  interrogative  order  is  used  in  questions 
not  marked  as  such  by  an  interrogative  pronoun,  adjective 

or  adverb : 

Has  he  ever  read  Wallenstein  ?      £at  er  iemalS  SBafleiifteht  getefen  ? 
Do  you  believe  that  she  will      ©laubeit  ©ie  {see  85),  baft  fte  etit* 

consent?  ttulligen  tturb? 

Did  you  hear  the  new  singer  ?        §aben  @ie  {see  110)  bie  neue  ®an* 

gerin  gefyort? 
Is  she  going  to  appear  to-night?      SSirb  fte  (see  124,  3  b)  l)eute  $&enb 

cmftretett  ?  or  tvitt  fie  tjeute  9j(beiib 
auf?  see  108 

2.  The  interrogative  order  is  also  used  to  express  a  con- 
dition (see  171,  2) : 

Are  you  really  my  friend,  then  SBift  bu  tturfUd)  metn  greunb,  fo  er* 

do  me  this  favor  toeife  mir  biefe  @unft 

Had  he  known  the  man,  he  §citte  (see  118,  1)  er  ben  Sftaun  ge* 

would   never  have  granted  famtt,  fo  toiirbe  er  ifym  bie  ^Bitte 

his  request  ttie  getoafyrt  fyaben 

You  look  as  if  you  did  not  be-  2)u  fteljji  a\\8,  al3  gtaubteft  bu  e« 

lieve  it  itid)t 

3.  In  independent  optative  sentences  (see  112)  the  verb 
occupies  the  first  place,  except  in  a  few  fixed  expressions 
like  those  mentioned  in  112,  1;  in  imperative  sentences, 
also,  the  verb  usually  stands  first : 

Would  that  I  had  never  seen  §atte  idj  bid)  bodj  me  gefeljen ! 

you! 

Take  this  letter  to  the  post-  £ragen  @te  biefen  iBrief  auf  bit 

office  Wt 

4.  When  accompanied  by  bod),  \a,  or  jet  bod),  the  verb 
is  sometimes  placed  first  merely  for  emphasis : 


WORD-ORDER.  151 

Let  me  stay  a  little  longer;      £af$  mid)  nod)  ein  roenig  tterroetfen; 
[for]  I  have  never  seen  any-  rjab'  id)  bod)  nie  etroaS  fdjonereS 

thing  more  beautiful  gefeljen 

III.     THE   DEPENDENT   ORDER. 

236.  Every  dependent  clause  begins  with  a  conjunction 
or  a  relative  pronoun  and  ends  with  the  finite  verb ;  the 
remaining  elements  of  the  clause  are  arranged  as  in  inde- 
pendent declaratory  sentences.  The  most  direct  qualifier 
of  the  verb  thus  comes  to  stand  immediately  before  it, 
and  if  it  is  one  of  the  common  adverbs  of  place  it  is  pre- 
fixed to  the  verb  (see  130) ;  this  is  also  done  with  a  few 
of  the  most  common  other  adverbial  and  substantive 
qualifiers  of  the  verb,  as  explained  in  226 : 

I  saw  Bismarck  last  summer,  3d)  fal)  53i$mard  le^ten  ©ommer, 

when  I  was  in  Berlin  a(§  id)  in  ^Berlin  roar 

I  have  read  the  book  which  3d)  fyaht  ba%  23ud)  gefefen,  roeld)e$ 

you  recommended  to  me  @ie  mtr  empfol)fen  Ijaben 

I  shall  go,  unless  he  comes  34  gefye  fort,  roemt  er  nid)t  bcttb  gu= 

back  very  soon  riicftommt 

The  concert  which  took  place  2)a§  Concert,  roetd)e$  geftera  $benb 

last   night    was    poorly    at-  flattfanb,  roar  jd)ted)t  befud)t 

tended 

a.  Substantive  clauses  may  be  formally  independent, 
while  logically  dependent ;  see  115. 

b.  A  condition  may  be  expressed  by  the  interrogative 
order,  instead  of  by  a  conjunction  with  the  dependent 
order ;  see  235,  2. 

237.  When  in  a  dependent  clause  the  past  participle  of 
a  modal  auxiliary  or  of  any  other  verb  has  the  form  of  an 
infinitive  (see  98),  the  finite  verb,  which  then  apparently 
governs  two  infinitives,  generally  precedes  these,  instead 
of  standing  at  the  end  of  the  clause : 


152  WORD-ORDER. 

I  am  very  glad  that  I  have  @8  freut  mid)  fefyr,  bag  id)  3^ncn 

been  able  to  render  you  this  btefen  3)ienft  Ijabe  leiftett  fonnen, 

service  instead  of  letften  fomteit  fyaht 

Here  is   a   book   which   you  §ier  ift  ein  23nd),  toeldjeS  bu  Ijtitteft 

ought  to  have  read,  before  lefen  follen  (instead  of  lefen  fotten 

writing  anything  on  this  sub-  Ijatteft),  efje  bu  ettoa^  iiber  bicfen 

ject  ©egenftcmb  fcfyriebft 

238.  The  subject  of  a  dependent  clause  is  usually 

placed  immediately  after  the  introductory  conjunction  or 

relative  pronoun  (unless  the  latter  itself  is  the  subject) ; 

but  it  may  be  separated  from  them  by  a  pronoun  or  an 

adverb  bearing  comparatively  little  emphasis : 

2)a$  8udj,  tt>etd)e8  mein  SBater  mir  fdjenfte,  or  toeldjes  mir  mem  SSater 

fdjenfte,  tc. 
SBeim  morgen  fein  SBrief  fommt,  :c. 

239.  In  dependent  clauses,  the  auxiliaries  f)ct6en  and 
fein  may  sometimes  be  omitted,  when  no  misunderstanding 
can  arise : 

The  storm  came  sooner  than  2)a8  ©emitter  tarn  eljer  al3  tt)ir  ge* 

we  had  thought  bad)t  [fatten] 

The  news   that   the  emperor  2)te  9?ad)rid)t,  baft  ber  $aifer  plbfc* 

had   suddenly  died   caused  lid)  geftorben  [fei  or  mare],  oerurs 

great  consternation  fad^te  aflgememe  33eftur$img 

240.  If  several  coordinate  dependent  clauses  have  the 
same  finite  verb,  it  need  not  be  expressed  except  in  the 
last: 

I  told  him  that  I  had  paid  the      3d)  fagte  iljm,  baft  id)  bie  SKedjmmg 
bill,  but  had  lost  the  receipt  be$af)lt,  ober  bie  Ouittung  t»cr- 

loren  ^atte 

241.  Exclamatory  questions  beginning  with  an  inter- 
rogative pronoun,  adjective  or  adverb  are  usually  treated 
as  dependent  clauses,  a  governing  phrase  like  /  wonder,  or 
is  it  not  strange  ?  being  understood : 


WORD-ORDER.  153 

How  many  books  you  buy  SBic  oiefe  Silver  bu  jebe$  3a!jr 
every  year!  fcwfft! 

IV.     PERIODS. 

242.  As  every  dependent  clause  is  a  part  of  some  in- 
dependent sentence  (or  of  another  dependent  clause),  its 
position  within  the  sentence  is,  strictly  speaking,  deter- 
mined by  the  rules  given  above  for  the  construction  of 
independent  sentences.  Dependent  sentences  should, 
therefore,  be  arranged,  in  their  proper  order,  not  more  than 
one  before  the  finite  verb,  the  others  between  the  finite 
verb  and  its  most  direct  adjunct  at  the  end  of  the  sen- 
tence : 

When  the  war  was  over,  the  $U$  ber  $rteg  ooriiber  toax,  fefjrte 

great  general  returned  again  ber  gro&e  gelbf)err  ttrieber  %\i  ben 

to  the  studies  which  had  in-  ©tubten,  ntit  bcnen  er  fid)  fdjon 

terested  him  even  as  a  boy  d6  $nabe  befdjaftigt  fyatte,  priicf 

The  French  officers  were  re-  2)ie  fransbftfdjeu  Officiere  itmrben 

leased  on  condition  that  they  unter  ber  SBebingung,  bafj  fie  in 

should  not  fight  again  in  this  biefem  $rtege  nicfyt  meljr  fcimpfen 

war  follten,  entlaffen 

243.  It  should  be  especially  borne  in  mind  that  when 

a  sentence  begins  with  a  subordinate  clause,  the  finite 

verb  should  immediately  follow,  since  it  must  occupy  the 

second  place ;  see,  however,  220.     Thus : 

When  Sully  was  disgraced  as  TO  (gutty  at$  SDttmfter  in  Ungnabe 
a  minister,  he  occupied  him-  gefallen  tuar,  befdjaftigte  er  fid) 
self  with  writing  his  memoirs         batnit,  feme  (Srinnernngen  aufeu* 

fdjreiben 

244.  When  according  to  the  rules  for  the  arrangement 
of  the  sentence  the  subject  of  the  principal  clause  follows 


154  WORD-ORDER. 

a  subordinate  clause  having  the  same  subject,  in  case  a 
pronoun  is  used  in  either  clause  for  the  subject,  it  should 
be  in  the  principal  clause  rather  than  in  the  subordinate : 

The  sentinels,  when  they  saw  2H8  Me  ©djUbtoacfyen  ben  getnb 
the  enemy  coming,  did  not  at  fommen  fafyen,  ttmgten  ftc  nid)t 
once  know  what  to  do  fltetd),  toa«  fte  tljim  fottten 

245.  1.  While  it  is  possible  to  regard  a  dependent 
clause  as  one  of  the  elements  composing  an  independent 
sentence,  and  treat  it  accordingly,  it  is  also  generally  al- 
lowable to  place  it  outside  of  the  limits  marked  by  the 
direct  complements  of  the  finite  verb  : 

$13  ber  $rieg  ooriiber  roar,  fefjrte  ber  groge  gelbljerr  roieber  $u  ben  ©tu* 
bien  guritcf,  mit  benen  er  fid)  fcfjon  al8  $nabe  befcfyafttgt  Ijatte 

£)ie  franjbftj^en  Officiere  rourben  unter  ber  93ebingung  entfaffen,  bag  fte 
in  biejem  $riege  nid)t  mtfyx  fampfen  foltten 

Compare  with  the  sentences  under  242. 

2.  This  is  very  generally  done ;  and  it  ought  to  be  done 
whenever  the  number  and  length  of  the  dependent  clauses 
would  remove  the  direct  complements  of  the  finite  verb 
so  far  from  the  latter  as  to  make  the  construction  awk- 
ward or  unintelligible ;  it  is  also  often  done  for  emphasis 
or  variety : 

It  is  natural  that  man  wants  to  @8  if!  natiirlidj,  baft  ber  Sftenfd)  toon 
be  governed  by  one  who  was  bem  regiert  fein  mill,  ber  mit  ifjm 
born  and  educated  with  him         geboren  imb  er^ogen  ifi,  instead  of 

Don  bem,  ber  mit  iljm  geboren  unb 
ergogen  i)t,  regiert  fein  ttriU* 

246.  Not  only  dependent  clauses,  but  also  infinitives 
with  ^u  or  urn  ju,  with  or  without  adjuncts,  and  longer 
adverbial  phrases,  whether  or  not  qualified  by  dependent 
clauses,  may  be  placed  outside  the  limits  marked  by  the 


WORD-ORDER.  155 

direct  complements  of  the  finite  verb  or,  in  a  subordinate 

clause,  by  the  fiuite  verb  itself : 

He  began  to  work  (§r  fitig  gu  arbeiten  an,  or  cr  fing  an 

ju  arbeiten 
He  returned  to    the    country      (gr  fefyrte  in  bo«  2anb,  ba$  er  (ett 
which  he  had  not  seen  since         fetner  3ugenb  nid)t  gefefyen  Ijatte, 
his  youth  $urucf,  or  gnrfitf  in  ba«  2anb,  ba« 

zc,  or  in  ba$  £anb  aunitf,  t>as  tc. 


Bppen&fy. 


THE  MOST  COMMON  ADJECTIVES,  PARTICIPLES  AND 
VERBS,  REQUIRING,  IN  GERMAN,  CONSTRUCTIONS 
DIFFERENT    FROM    THE    ENGLISH. 

To  avoid  confusion,  each  adjective,  participle  and  verb  is  followed,  in 
these  lists,  by  the  preposition  or  case  which  it  governs  ;  it  should  be 
remembered,  however,  that,  in  actual  use,  adjectives,  participles  and 
infinitives  are,  as  a  rule,  preceded  by  their  qualifiers;  see  231. 

The  constructions  of  many  participles  and  adjectives  may  be  inferred 
from  those  of  the  corresponding  verbs. 

A.     Adjectives  and  Participles. 


abundant  in,  with  reid)  an  (dat.) 
accustomed  to    gerob'lntt,  gen.  or 

an  (ace.) 
adjacent  to,  use  the  verb  grcngen  an 

(ace.) 
advantageous  to  Dorteilfyaft  fitr 
affable  to  leutfeiig  gegen 
affected  at,  by  geriiljrt  burd),  Don 
affectionate  to  gartltd)  gegen 
afflicted  at,  by,  with   belummcrt 

iiber  (ace),  burd) 
afraid  of  bauge  r»or  {dat) 
akin  to  uerroanbt  mit 
alarmed  at  beunrufyigt  iiber  (ace), 

burd) 
allied  to  berbiinbet  mit 
amazed  at  toerttmnbert  iiber  (ace.) 
angry  with  one  bofe  auf  {ace.) 
angry  at,  about  something   bofe 

iiber  (ace),  roegen 
anxious  about,  for    beforgt    urn, 


roegen ;   a.  for  (desirous  of)  be* 

gterig  nadj 
apparent  from  erftd)tltd)  au8 
applicable  to  anroenbbar  auf  (ace.) 
apprehensive  of,  use  the  verb  fiiraV 

ten,  ace. 
apt  for  taugltdj  $u 
ashamed  of   befd)dmt  iiber  (ace), 

or  use  the  verb  fict)  fdjdmeu,  gen. 
astonished  at  erftaunt  iiber  (ace.) 
attached   to    befeftigt  an   (dat); 

(devoted)  gugetljan,  dat. 
attended  with  beglettet  Don 
attentive  to  aufmerffam  auf  (ace.) 
averse  to  abgeneigt,  dat.  or  gegen 
aware  of  geroafjr,  gen.  or  ace. 
bare  of  entbtofet  uon ;  olme 
beneficent  to  tDot)ltr)citig  gegen 
bent  on  entfdjloffen  $u 
benumbed  with  erftorrt  Dor  (dat) 
blind  to  blinb  gegen 

057) 


158 


APPENDIX. 


blind  with  blinb  toor  {dat. ) 
bound  for,  to  beftimmt  nad) 
capable  of  ftifyig,  gen.  or  311 
captivated  by,  with   eingenommen 

toon 
careful  of  adjtfam  aitf 
careful  for  beforgt  urn 
careless  of,  about  unbeforgt,  unbe* 

f  iitnmert  urn 
celebrated  for  berufymt  toegen 
charitable  to,  towards  tntlbt^dttg 

gegen 
charmed  by,  with  entjiirft  toon 
civil  to  fyoffid)  gegen 
clear  from,  of  rein  t)on 
close  by,  to   bid)t  bet,  an  (dat.  or 

ace.) 
cold  to  fait  gegen 
comparable  to  toergletdjbar  mit 
concerned  about,  for  beforgt  urn 
concerned  in  beteiligt  an  (dat. ) 
conscious  of  bettmgt,  gen. 
consequent  to,  use  the  verb  fotgen 

anf  (acc.) 
courteous  to  l)5fUd)  gegen 
covetous  of  begierig  nad) 
cruel  to  granfam  gegen 
curious  of  neugterig  anf  {acc.) 
customary  with  gebraud)Ud)  bet 
dazzled  with  geblenbet  toon 
dead  to  abgeftorben  fitr 
deaf  to  taub  gegen 
decisive  of,  use  the  verb  entfdjetben, 

acc. 
delighted  at,    with    ent$ucft   liber 

(acc),  Don 
dependent  on  abljangtg  toon 
desirous  of  begierig  nad) 
destructive  of  toerberbttd)  fitr,  jer* 

ftorenb,  acc. 


destitute  of  )       iT  ,.. ,A  , 

devoid  of      }eittblo6ttoon;ol,ne 

different  from  toerfdjieben  toon 
disgusted    at,  with      uberbritfftg, 
gen.  or  acc;    or  use  the  verb 
SBtbernrilten  empfmben  gegen 
disloyal  to  treuto§  gegen 
dismayed  at  erfdjrocfen  iiber  (acc.) 
displeased  at,  with  ungetjatten  iiber 
(acc.) 

eager  for  begierig  nadj 
empty  of  leer  an  (dat.) 
eminent  for  anSge^eidjnet  bnrdj 
enamoured  of  toerltebt  in  (acc.) 
engaged  in,  occupied    befdjaftigt 

mit;    (concerned)  toerroicfett  in 

(acc.) 
engaged  to  toertobt  mit 
enraged  at  ttoiitenb  iiber  (acc.) 
envious  of  netbifd)  anf  (acc.) 
essential  to  roefentlid)  fiir 
exempt  from  fret  toon 
faint  with  matt  toor  (dat.) 
famed,  famous  for  beriilmtt  roegen 
far  from  fern,  meit  entfernt  toon 
fatigued  with  ermitbet  toon 
favorable  for,  to  giinjtig,  dat. 
fearful  of  tool!  gurdjt  toor  (dat.) 
fearless  of  oljne  gitrdjt  toor  (dat) 
fertile  of,  in  frndjtbar  an  (dat.) 
fit  for  taugtid),  paffenb  gu 
fond  of  eittgenommen  toon,  ergeben, 

dat,  or  use  lichen 
forgetful  of,  use  the  verb  toergeffen, 

gen.  or  acc. 
free  from  frei  toon 
friendly  to  freunbttd)  gegen 
frightened  at  erfdjrocfen  iiber  (acc.) 


APPENDIX. 


159 


fruitful  in   frudjtbar,  ergiebtg  an 
(dot,) 

full  of  Doll  Don,  or  gen. 
generous  to  grogmiitig  gegen 
glad  of  fro!)  iiber  (ace),  or  gen. 
good  for  tctuglid)  $u 
good  to,  towards  gut  gegen 
gracious  to  gnabtg  gegen 
greedy  of  gierig  nad) 
grieved  at  befummert  uber  (ace.) 
guilty  of  fd)iitbtg,  gen.  or  an  {dat.) 
happy  at,  over  gliicf(td)  iiber  (ace.) 
heedful  of  adjtfam  auf  (ace.) 
heedless  of  uiibefiimmert  urn 
ignorant  of  unfunbig,  gen. ;  unbe* 

fannt  mit 
ill  of,  with  [a  disease]    franf  an 

(dat.) ;  ill  with  [fear,  etc  ]  franf 

Dor  (dat) 
impatient  at  ungebutbig  iiber  (ace.) 
impatient  for  begiertg  narf) 
impatient  of,  use  nid)t  bulben,  nid)t 

ertragen,  ace. 
incensed  at  aufgebrad)t  iiber  (ace.) 
inclusive  of  einjdjliefjUdj,  gen. 
independent  of  unabf)angig  Don 
indifferent  to  gteidjgittttg  gegen 
indignant  at  entriiftet  iiber  (ace.) 
indulgent  to  nad)ftd)tig  gegen 
infatuated  with  betljbrt  Don 
inferior  to  geringer  al8 
inflamed  with  entbrannt  Don 
innocent  of  unfdntlbig,  gen.  or  an 

(dat) 
insensible  of,  to  unempftnbltd)  fiir, 

gegen 
inseparable  from  un$ertrenntid)  Don 
insusceptible  to  unempftnbUd)  fiir 
intended  for  befttmtnt  fiir;  (to  be) 

3U 


intent  on  (attentive)    aufmerffam 

auf  (ace);   (desirous)   begierig 

nad) 
intoxicated  with  beraufdjt  Don 
irritated  at  aufgebradjt  iiber  (ace.) 
jealous  of  etferfiidjtig  auf  (ace.) 
just  to  geredjt  gegen 
kind  to  giitig  gegen 
lavish  of  Derjdjtoenberifd)  mit 
liberal  to  freigebig  gegen 
loyal  to  treu,  dat. 
mad  with  toll  Dor  (dat.) 
merciful  to  tnitteibtg  gegen 
mindful  of  etngebenf,  gen. 
mortified  at  unangenefym  beriiljrt 

Don 
moved  at,  by,  with    geriifyrt  Don, 

burd) 
needing  bebiirftig,  gen. ;  or  use  the 

verb  bebiirfen,  gen.  or  ace. 
negligent  of  nad)tafftg  in  S3e^ug  auf 
noted  for  befannt,  beriitymt  burd), 

meg  en 
notorious  for  beriidjtigt  burd),  n>e» 

gen 
obedient  to  geljorfam,  dat. 
obsequious  to  rotllfafyrig,  dat.  or 

gegen 
observant  of  adjtfam  auf  (ace) 
offended  at,  by  Derle^t  Don 
overcome  with  iibermdltigt  Don 
owing  to,  use  the  verb  fyerriifjreu  Don 
pale  with  bleid)  Dor  {dat.) 
particular  about  genau  mit 
patient  of,  use  the  verb  gebulbtg  er» 

tragen,  ace 
penetrated  with  burd)brungen  Don 
perfidious  to  treuloS  gegen 
pleased  with  erfreut  iiber  (ace) 
polite  to  fyoflid)  gegen 


160 


APPENDIX. 


poor  in  arm  an  {dot.) 
popular  with  beltebt  bei 
posterior  to  tyater  al8,  nad) 
prior  to  friiljer  a(8;  Dor 
prodigal  of  Derjdjmenberifd)  mit 
productive  of  frud)tbar  an  (dat.) 
profuse  of  oerjdimenberifd)  mit 
proud  of  ftolj  auf  (ace.) 
provoked  at,  with  aufgebradjt  iiber 

{ace.) 
provoked  by  gereijt  burdi 
qualified  for  geetgnet  311 
ready  for  bereit  ju 
reckless  of  unbefiimmert  urn 
red  with  rot  Dor  (dat.) 
regardless  of  unbeiiimmert  urn 
related  to  Dermanbt  mit 
relative  to  begiigtid)  auf  (ace.) 
remarkable  for  merfroiirbig  meg  en 
remote  from  entfernt  Don 
renowned  for  beriifymt  megen 
replete  with  DoH  Don 
rich  in  reid)  an  (dat.) 
ripe  for  reif  ju,  fur 
rude  to  unpfltd)  gcgen 
safe  from  ftdjer  Dor  {dat.) 
satisfied  with   befrtebtgt  Don,  burd) 
secure  from  fidjer  Dor  (dat.) 
seized  with  ergriffen  Don 
sensible  of  empfcmgltd)  fiir 
separate  from  getrennt  Don 
severe  to,  on,  with  fireng  gegen 
shocked  at  entf  efct  iiber  (ace.) 
short  of,  use  the  verb  Sftangelleiben 

an  {dat) 
sick  of  (tired)  iiberbrujftg,  gen.  or 

ace. 
sick  with,  ill  with  [a  disease]  front 

an  (dat.) ;  [fear,  etc.]  franf  Dor 

{dat) 


solicitous  about,  for    beforgt  um, 

megen 
sorry  for  betriibt  megen 
stiff  with  fteif  Dor  (dat.) 
struck  with  betroffen  iiber  (ace), 

Don 
stupefied  with  betaubt  burd),  Don 
subsequent  to,  use  the  verb  folgen 

auf  (ace.) 
suffocated  with  erfticft  burdj 
suitable  for,  to  angemeffen  fiir 
superior  to  iibertegen,  dat. 
sure  of  ftd)er,  gen. 
surprised  at  iiberrafdjt  iiber  (ace.) 
susceptible  to  empfangltd)  fiir 
suspicious  of  argmofynifd)  auf  (ace.) 
thoughtful  of  beba^t  auf  (ace.) 
thoughtless  of  unbefiimmert  um 
terrified  at,  by,  with    erfdjrocfen 

fiber  (ace.) 
tired  from,  with    miibe,  ermiibet 

Don 
tired  of  miibe,  iiberbriifjtg,  gen.  or 

ace, 
touched  by,  with   geriifyrt  burd), 

Don 
transported  with  entgittft  Don 
treacherous  to  Derraterifd)  gegen 
troubled  about  beforgt  um 
uncertain  of  ungetoig,  gen.  or  iiber 

(ace.) 
unconscious  of  unbemufjr,  gen. 
unmindful  of  uneingebenf,  gen. 
uneasy  about  unrnljig  megen 
used  to  getoolmt  an  (ace.) 
usual  with  gemofyntid)  hd 
vain  of  ettet  auf  (ace.) 
vexed  at  berbrtefjlid)  iiber  (ace.) 
void  of  leer  an;  of)ite 
wasteful  of  Derfdjmenberifdj  mit 


APPENDIX. 


161 


watchful  of  aufnterffam  auf  {ace*) 
wearied,  weary,  see  tired 
wet  with  nag  Don 


worn  with,  worn  out  with  erfdjopf 

burd) 
worthy  of  inert,  nmrbtg,  gen. 


B.     Verbs 

abound  in  Uberflug  Ijaben  an  {dat.) 
absolve  from  loSfpredjen  Don 
abstain  from  fid)  entfyatten,  gen. 
accuse  of    anflagen,  befdjulbtgeu, 

gen. 
accustom  to  getDofmeu  an  {ace.) 
acquit  of  fretfpred)en  Don 
adapt  to  anpaffen,  dat.  or  an  (ace.) 
address  to  rid) ten  an  (ace.) 
adhere  to  anfyangen,  dat 
adjoin  to  grenjen  an  (ace.) 
advise   raten,  dat.  (person),  ace. 

(thing) 
agree  about   iiberetnfommen  iiber 

(ace.) 
agree  to  etnttrifligen  in  (ace.) 
aid  in  fyetfen  (dat.)  bei 
ail  fefjlen,  dat 
aim  at  gielcn  auf  (ace.) ;  =  strive 

for  jfrebennad) 
allude  to  anfpielen  auf  (ace.) 
amount  to  ftd)  belaufen  auf  (ace.) 
answer  (a  person)  antroorten,  dat. ; 

(a  question,  a  letter)  antlDorten 

auf  (ace.),  beantroorten  (ace.) 
answer  for  einftefjen  fiir 
appeal  to  ftd)  berufen  auf  (ace.) 
apply  to    ftd)  tnenben  an  (ace.) ; 

bb  refer  to  fid)  bejieljen  auf  (ace.) 
apply  one's  self  to  ftd)  legen  auf 

(acc.)t  ftd)  befletfHgen,  gen. 
approach  [ftd)]  nciljern,  dat. 
approve  a  thing,  of  a  thing  bttUgen, 

ace. 
arise  from  Ijerritljren  oon 


ascribe  to  juifcfyreiben,  dot. 

be  ashamed  of  ftd)  fdjamen,  gen. 

ask  after  ftdj  erfunbtgen  nad) 

ask  for  a  thing  bitten  urn;  for  a 

person  fragen  nadj 
ask  of  erbitten  Don 
aspire  to  ftreben  nad) 
assent  to  gufitmmen,  dat. 
assign  to  guroetfen,  dat. 
assist  in  t)etfen  bei 
assure  of  Derftcfyern,  gen. 
atone  for  fuljnen,  ace. 
attend  a  person,  on  a  person,  auf* 

marten,  dat. ;  =  accompany,  be* 

gtetten,  acc.\    =  take  care  of, 

pflegen,  ace.  or  gen. 
attend  (school, etc. )  bejudjen,  ace.; 

(a  meeting)  beitnolnten,  dat 
attend  to  ad)ten  auf,  (ace.) 
avail  one's  self  of  benufcen,  ace. 
bear  [with]  ertragen,  ace. 
become  of  roerben  auS 
beg  for  bitten  urn 
beg  of  erbitten  t)on 
behave  to  ftd)  betragen  gegen 
believe  in  gtauben  an  (ace.) 
bestow  on  oerleiljen,  dat. 
beware  of  ftd)  Ijitten  Dor  (dat.) 
bid  gebieten,  dat. 
bind  to  binben  an  (ace.) 
blame  for  tabetn  roegen 
blush  at  erroten  iiber  (ace.) 
boast  of  ftd)  riiljmen,  gen. 
border  on  grenjen  an  (ace.) 
borrow  from,  of  borgen  Don 


161 


APPENDIX. 


bow  to  ftdj  tjemetgen  Dor  {dat.) 
burn  with  brennen  Dor  {dat) 
burst  with  berften  Dor  (dat.) 
buy  from,  of  fattfen  Don 
call  at,  on  Dorfpred)en  bd;  befudjen, 

ace. 
call  for  frogen  nad);  gu  ljoten  font* 

men,  ace. 
call  upon  ait  ff  orb  em,  ace. 
care  about  ftd)  futnmern  urn;  he 

cares  nothing  about  it  e8  Uegt 

iljm  nid)t§  baran 
care  for,  =  take  care  of  |  org  en 

fiir;  =  like  mbgen,  ace. 
catch  at  greifen  nad) 
caution  against  roarnen  Dor  (dat.) 
change  for  Dertcmfdjen  mit 
change  into  Derroanbeln  in  (ace.) 
charge  with  anflagen  (gen.) 
cheat  out  of  betriigen  urn 
cling  to  ftd)  fefttjalten,  fid)  anflam* 

mern  an  (ace.) ;  =  remain  true 

anfyangen  (dat.) 
come  by  (obtain)  edentgen,  ace. ; 

fommen  gu 
command,  see  order 
compare  to,  with  Dergtetdjeu  mit 
complain  about,  of    fid)  betlagen 

iiber  {ace.) 
comply  with  ftdt)  fug  en,  dat. 
conceal  from    oerbergen,  dat.  or 

Dor [dat) 
conclude  from  fdjttegen  au« 
confer  on  Dedeifyen,  dat. 
confide  in  Dertrauen  auf  {ace.) 
confine  to  befcrjranfen  auf  (ace.) 
conform  to  ftd)  rid)ten  nad) 
congratulate  on  ©liicf  ttmnfdjen  gu 
consent  to  etnnrifligen  in  (ace.) 
be  composed  of  befteijen  an%, 


consist  in  beftetjcn  in  (dat.) 
consist  of  befteben  au3 
contend  for  ftreiten  um 
contrast  with,  intr.  abftedjen  Don, 

gegen;   tr.  entgegenftellen,  gegen* 

iiberfteUen,  dat. 
converse  about,  on  fid)  unterfyaf ten 

iiber  (ace.) 
convert  into  Derroanbeln  in  (ace.) 
convict  of  iiberfiifyren,  gen. 
crave  for  Dedangen  nad) 
cure  of  t)eilen  Don 
deal  in  rjanbeln  mit 
debate  about,  on  beratfdjfogen  iiber 

(ace.) 
decide  about,  on   ftd)  entfdjeiben 

iiber  {ace.) ;  d.  in  favor  of  [fid)] 

entferjeiben  fiir 
decrease  in  abneijmen  an  (dat) 
defend  from  Derteibigen  gegen 
defy  trorjeit,  dat. 
deliberate  about,  on  beratfdjlagen 

iiber  (ace.) 
delight  in  ftd)  erfreuen  an  (dat) 
deliver  from  befreien  Don 
demand  of  f  orb  em  Don 
depart  for  abreifen  nadj 
depend  on  abfyangen  Don;   =  rely 

on  ftd)  oedaffen  auf  (ace.) 
deprive  of  berauben,  gen. 
deserve  of  ftd)  Derbient  madjen  um 
design  for  befttmmen  gu 
desire  begefyren,  gen.  or  ace. 
desist  from  abfteljen  Don 
despair  of  Dergroeifetn  an  (dat) 
determine  on  ftd)  entfcrjltefjen  gu 
die  of  fterben  an  (dat) 
differ  from  ftd)  mtterfdjeiben  Don 
differ  with    ntd)t  iibcreinfitmmen 

ntit 


APPENDIX. 


163 


dig  for  graben  nad) 
direct  to  ridjten  an  (ace.) 
disagree  with  nid)t  ubereinfttntmeu 

mit 
disapprove  of  nutjbitligeu,  ace. 
dispense  with  oergtd)ten  anf  {ace.) 
dispose  of  oerfiigen  iiber  (ace.) 
dissuade  from  abroten  Don 
distinguish  from  unterfdjeiben  Don 
divide  into  teilen  in  (ace.) 
doubt  about,  of  groeifeln  an  (dat.) 
drink  to  tvinfen  anf  (ace.) 
dwell  on  oerroeilen  bei 
echo  with  nneberfjaflen  Don 
embark  for  ftd)  einfd)iffen  nad) 
encroach  on  (Singriffe  tfjun  in  (ace.) 
end  in  cnbigen  mit 
engage  in  fid)  beteiligen  bei 
enjoy  geniegen,  gen.  or  ace. 
enter  a  room  in  ein  ^tnimer  treten 
enter  into  ftd)  eiulaffen  in  {ace.) 
enter  on  iiberndnnen 
escape  a  person,  or  from  a  person 

entffieljen,  entfommen,  dat;  from 

a  place,  au§;  one's  observation, 

etc.  entgefyen,  dat. 
examine  [into]  unterfucfyen,  ace. 
exceed  in  ubevtreffen  an  (dat.) 
exchange  for  Dertaufd)en  gegen 
exult  at,  over  fvotjtocfen  iiber  {ace.) 
faint  with  otjnmadjtig  toerben  Dor 

(dat.) 
fasten  to  befeftigen  an  {dat.  or  ace.) 
feed  on  fid)  emaljren  Don 
find  fault  with  tabeln,  ace. 
lire  at  getter  geben  auf  (ace.) 
fish  for  ftfdjen  nad) 
fit  for  befafyigen  gn 
fix  on  fid)  entfdjeiben  fiir 
flatter  jd)tneid)eln,  dat. 
flee  from  flier)en  oor  (dat.) 


foam  with   [rage]     fdjaumen  Dor 

[2But,  ace] 
follow  f  of  gen,  dat. 
follow  from  folgen  an8 
forgive     oergebett,    dat.  {person), 

ace.  {thing) 
free  from  befreien  Don 
gaze  at  anftarren  (ace.) 
glory  in  ftolj  fein  auf  (ace.) 
glow  with  glittjen  Dor  (dat.) 
grasp  at  greifeu  nad) 
grieve  at,  for  fid)  grfimen  urn,  iiber 

(ace. ) 
grumble  at  murren  iiber  (ace.) 
guard  against,  from,  intr.  fid)  fjiiten 

Dor  (dat);    tr.  =  protect,  be- 

fdjiiken  nor  (dat),  gegen 
hear  about,  of  fyoren  Don,  iiber  {ace.) 
hear  from  l)oren  Don 
heed  ad) ten,  gen.  or  auf  (ace.) 
help  Ijetfen,  dat. 
hide  from    oerbergen,  dat.  or  Dor 

(dat) 
hinder  from  Ijinbem  an  {dat.) 
hint  at  anjpielen  auf  (ace.) 
hope  for  fyoffen  auf  (ace.) 
hunt  after,  for   jag  en  nad),  nadj- 

jag  en,  dat. 
impose  on   auferlegeu,  dat. ;     = 

cheat,  betriigen,  ace. 
increase  in  juuer^men  an  (dat.) 
indulge  in      fid)    fyingeben,    nad)* 

fjangen,  dat 
inflict  on  auferlegen,  dat 
inform  of  benad)rid)tigeu  Don 
ingratiate  one's  self  with   fid)  be- 

tiebt  madden  bei 
injure  fdjaben,  dat 
inquire  after  fid)  erfunbigen  nad) 
inquire  into  unterfudjen,  ace. 
inquire  of  ftdj  erfunbigen  bei 


164 


APPENDIX. 


insist  on  beftetjen  auf  (dat.) 
intercede  with  fid)  Dertoenben  bei 
interfere  in  fief)  einmifd)en  in  (ace.) ; 

interfere  with  Ijinbevn,  ace. 
introduce  to  oorftellen,  dat. 
intrude  on  fief)  aufbrangen,  dat. 
intrust  one  with  a  thing,  to  one  a 

thing     jemembem   etroaS  anDer* 

trauen 
issue  from,  intr.,  entering  en  a  it  3 
jest  at  (emergen  iiber  (ace.) 
join  in  ftd)  beteiltgen  bet,  an  (dat.) 
judge  by,  from  urteilen  ttad) 
judge  of  urteilen  iiber  (ace.) 
keep  from  bett>at)ren  Dor  {dat.) 
keep  to  fief)  fatten  an  {ace.) 
knock  at  flopfeu  an  (ace.) 
know  about,of  hnffen  iiber(acc.),Dou 
labor  for  fid)  abtuiiben  urn 
labor  under  letben  Don,  unter  (dat.) 
languish  for  fdnuadjten  nad) 
laugh  at  ladjen  iiber  (ace.) 
lavish  on  Derfd)tt)enben  auf  {ace.) 
lean  against,  tr.t  let)iten  an  (dat.) ; 

intr.  [fid)]  lefynen  an  (ace.) 
leave  for  abreifen  nad) 
light  on  (descend)  fid)  nieberlaffen 

auf  (dat.  or  ace) ;    (hit  upon) 

ftoften  anf  (ace.) 
limit  to  befdjranfen  anf  (ace.) 
listen  to    l)ord)en  anf  (ace),   gn* 

Ijoren,  dat. 
live  on,  by  leben  Don 
live  with  roofmen  bei 
long  for  fid)  fefynen  nad) 
look  after   fel)en  nad),  ad)ten  anf 

(ace.) 
look  at  anf  el)  en,  ace. 
look  for,  look  about  for   fid)  urn* 

fel)en  nad);  fnd)en,  ace. 


look  over  burd)fel)en  (ace.) 
look  to  binbticfen  auf  (ace), 
look  upon  as    anfefyen,  betrad)ten 

al$,  ace. 
make  of  mad)en  au8 
make  up  for  erfe^en,  ace. 
marry  to  Derljeirateu  mit 
measure  by  meffen  nad) 
meddle  with,  in  ftd)    mifdjen    in 

(ace),  ftd)  befaffen  mit 
meditate  on  nad)ben!en  iiber  (ace.) 
meet  begegnen,  dat. ;    I  met  with 

an  accident  ein  Unfall  begegnete 

mir 
mention  ertDafynen,  gebenfen,  gen. 

or  ace. 
mingle  with,  intr.,  ftd)  mtfd)en  un* 

ter  (ace.) 
mock  at  fpotten  iiber  (ace.) 
mourn  for,  over  trauern  unt,  iiber 

(ace.) 
murmur  at,  against   nturren  iiber 

(ace.) 
muse  on  nad)ftnnen  iiber  (ace.) 
need  bebiirfen,  braudjen,  gen.  or  ace. 
nod  at,  to  gunicf  en,  dat. 
obey  gefyordjen,  dat. 
object  to,  against,  tr.,  etnmenbeu 

gegen;  intr.  ©innoenbungen  mo» 

d)en  gegen 
occur  to  (happen)  begegneu,  dat. ; 

(of  an  idea,  etc. )  einf alien,  dat. 
order  befel)len,  gebieten,  dat.  [per- 
son) ,  ace.  (thing) 
pardon  one  for   jemanbem  ettuaS 

oer$eU)en 
part  with,  from  ftd)  trennen  Don 
partake  of,  participate  in  teilneb* 

men  an  (dat.) 
partake  of  (eat, etc.)  gentefjen,  ace. 


APPENDIX. 


165 


pay  for  begafyten,  ace. 

perish  with  umfommen  Dor  {dot.) 

permit  ertauben,  dat.  (person),  ace. 

(thing) 
persevere  in,  persist  in   beljarrett 

bei,  fortfatjren  in  (dat),  or  inf. 

with  gu 
pine  for,  after  ftd)  fetyten  nad) 
play  at  (cards,  etc.)  fptelen,  ace. 
play  for  fyielen  urn 
play  on  (an  instrument)   fpieleu, 

ace. 
please  gefatlen,  dat. 
point  at,  to  geigen  auf  (ace.) 
ponder  on  nadjgrfibeht  fiber  (ace.) 
praise  for  loben  tnegen 
prepare  for   [(id)]  norberetten  auf 

(ace. ) 
present  one  with  something  cincm 

etroaS  fdjenfen 
preserve  from  beroatjren  nor  (dat.) 
preside  over,  at  ben  SBorftfc  fiitjren 
r     bei 
prevent  from    abfyatten  Don,  oer* 

fyinbem  an  (dat.) 
pride  one's  self  on    ftotg  fein,  fid) 

etinaS  eutbilben  auf  (ace.) 
profit  by  Sftufcen  gier)en  au8 
protect  from,  against  fd)fi£en  gegen 
quarrel  about  [fid)]  ganfen,  ftreiten 

urn 
rail  at  gotten  fiber  (ace.) 
reach  to,  intr.  retdjen  bi«  an  (ace), 

tr.  reidjen,  dat. 
read  to  oorlefen,  dat. 
reconcile  to  oerfbfyneu  tnit 
efer  to,  tr.  roeijen  an  (ace.) ;  intr. 

fid)  begieljen  auf  (ace.) 
reflect  on  nadjbenfen  fiber  (ace. ) 
refrain  from  fid)  enttjatten,  gen. 
rejoice  at  fid)  frcueu  fiber  [ace. ) 


relate  (refer)  to   ftd)  begier)en  auf 

(ace.) 
rely  on  ftd)  oerlaffen  auf  (ace.) 
remember  ftd)  erinnern,  gen.  or  an 

(ace ) 
remind  of  ertnnem  an  (ace.) 
repent  of  bercueu  (ace.) 
reply  (to  a  person)  ernnbent,  dat. ; 

(to  a  question,  etc.)  ernnbent  auf 

(ace.) 
reproach  one  with  jentaubem  ettoas 

Donuerfctt 
request  a  thing  of  one  jemanb  um 

etroaS  bitten 
require  of  forberu  oon 
resolve  on  fid)  entfdjliegeu  gu 
resound  with  nnebertjallen  Don 
restrict  to  befdjranfen  auf  (ace.) 
result  from  folgen  au§ 
revenge  on  rad)en  an  (dat.) 
rid  from,  of  befreien  oon 
ring  for  flingefn  nad) 
ring  with  erfdjatten  con 
rob  of  berauben,  gen.,  or  jemanbem 

etroa§  rattben 
rush  upon  Ijerf alien  fiber  (ace.) 
sail  for  fegeln  nad) 
save  from  beroafyren  oor  (dat.) 
scoff  at  gotten  fiber  (ace) 
search  for,  after  fudjen  nad) 
secure  from,  against    fid)ent  Dor 

(ace),  gegen 
seize  upon  ergreifen  (ace.) 
seize  by  ergreifen  bei 
send  for  fyolen  laffen,  ace. 
send  to  fenben,  fd)icfen  gu,  an  (ace.) 
serve(render  service  to)bienen,da*. 
serve  for  bieuen  gu 
shake  with  gittern  oor  (dat.) 
share  in  teilfyaben  an  (dat.) 
shelter,shield  from  fdjiifcen  \>ox(dat.) 


166 


APPENDIX. 


shiver  with  jittem  Dor  (dat.) 
shoot  at  fd)ief$en  nad) 
shrink    from     guriitffdjreden   t»or 
•     (dat.) 
shudder  at  fdjaubern  Dor  {dat.) 
sigh  for,  after  feufjen  nad) 
smell  of  riedjen  nad) 
smile  at  fddjeln  iiber  (ace.) 
sneer  at  fyotteln  iiber  (ace. ) 
spare  fdjonen,  gen.  or  ace. 
speak  of,  about  fpredjen  Don,  iiber 

(ace.) 
speak  to,  with  fpredjen  mit;  speak 

to  (address)  anreben,  ace. 
stand  by  (aid)  beiftel)en,  dat. 
stare  at  anftarren,  ace. 
start  for  abreifen  nad) 
steal  from  fter/len,  dat. 
stick  to  feftrjalten  an  (dat),  bleiben 

bei 
strive  for  ftrcben  nad) 
struggle  for  ftreiten  urn 
subsist  on  leben  Don 
substitute  for  an  bie  (©telle  fe^eu 

Don 
succeed  in    (Srfofg  fjaben  in,  ge* 

Ungen;  see  87,  2  a. 
sue  for  roerben  urn 
suffer  from  leiben  Don,  burd);   suf- 
fer from,  with  (a  disease)  leiben 

an  (dat) 
surpass  in  iibertreffen  an  (dat) 
suspect  of  in  $erbad)t  Ijaben  megen 
swarm  with  hrimmetn  Don 
swear  by  fd)tt>oren  bei 
swear  to  befdjmoren,  ace. 
swell  with  anidjroetlen  Don 
take  by  faff  en  bei 
take  for  fatten  fur 
take  from  roegneljmen,  dat. 


talk  about,  of  reben  Don,  iiber  (ace.) 
talk  to,  with  fored)en  mit 
taste  of  fdjmeden  nad) 
tell  of,  about  fagen,  ergatjlen  Don, 

iiber  (ace.) 
thank  banfen,  dat 
think  about,  on   nadjbenfen  iiber 

(ace.) 
think  of  benfen  an  (ace.) 
thirst  for,  after  biirften  nad) 
threaten  broken,  dat  (person) 
throw  at  roerfen  nad) 
tie  to  btnben  an  (ace.) 
touch  upon  beriifyren,  ace. 
trade  in  fjanbeln  mit 
tremble  at  gittem  bei 
tremble  with  gittern  Dor  [dat) 
trouble  one's  self  about  fid)  be= 

fnmmern  nm 
trust  in,  to  Dertrauen  auf  (ace.) 
trust  one  with  a  thing  jemanbem 

etroaS  anDertrauen 
turn  into  oerroanbeln  in  (ace.) 
turn  to  [fid)]  roenben  an  (ace.) 
unite  with,  to  Dereinigen  mit 
upbraid  one  with,  for  jemanbem 

SSornritrfe  mad)en  roegen 
value  for  fd)d£en  roegen 
wait  for  marten  auf  (ace.),  barren, 

gen. 
wait  on  aufmarten,  dat 
want.be  in  want  of  ermangetn,  gen. 
warn  of  mam  en  Dor,  dat 
watch  for  taiiern  auf  (ace.) 
weep  at  roeinen  iiber  (ace.) 
weep  for  beroeinen,  ace. 
wish  for  miinfd)en,  ace. 
wonder  at  fid)  rounbern  iiber  (ace.) 
write  about,  on  fdrreibeu  iiber  (ace.) 
write  to  fd)reiben,  dat  or  an  (ace.) 


INDEX. 


The  references  are  to  paragraphs. 


About,  143. 

above,  144. 

Accusative,  as  direct  object,  74 ;  with 
verbs  of  naming ,  etc.,  75  ;  with  verbs 
of  choosing,  etc.,  76 ;  with  (cfyren,  77 ; 
with  adjectives,  78 ;  of  measure,  etc., 
79;  of  time,  80;  absolute,  81;  with 
impersonals,  84,  2  a ;  with  an  infini- 
tive, 122. 

across,  145. 

Address,  forms  of,  27. 

Adjectives,  17-18;  repetition  of,  13. 

Adverbs,  from  adjectives,  129;  of 
place  and  direction,  130-136;  com- 
pounded with  t>a,  l)ter,  no,  136 ;  al- 
phabetical list,  143  if. 

after,  146. 

against,  147. 

ago,  148. 

Agreement  of  pronouns,  24-26;  of 
verbs,  82. 

all,  36. 

alter,  strengthening  a  superlative,  23. 

along,  149. 

although,  150. 

another,  49. 

Antecedents  of  relative  pronouns,  33, 
2  a ;  not  to  be  omitted,  34,  4. 

any,  anybody,  etc.,  37. 

Apposition,  nouns  in,  14;  59,  2;  ad- 
jectives and  participles,  18,  2. 

around,  151. 

Arrangement,  see  word-order. 


Articles,  1-13;  see  definite  and  indefi- 
nite article. 

as,  152. 

at,  153. 

Auxiliaries,  85-86;  see  perfect,  plu- 
perfect, etc. ;  modal,  96-105;  omis- 
sion of,  in  dependent  clauses,  239. 

he=,  prefix,  function  of,  83  c. 

because  [of],  154. 

befef)ten,  120. 

before,  155. 

behind,  156. 

below,  157. 

beside,  besides,  158-159. 

beyond,  160. 

bleiben,  auxiliary,  87,  3;  with  infini- 
tive, 121. 

both  [and],  38. 

braudjen,  119,  4. 

but,  161. 

by,  162. 

Causal  clauses,  140. 

Collective  nouns,  26. 

Comparative,  19-20. 

Compound  verbs,  separable,  130 ;  226. 

Concessive  clauses,  140;  influence  on 
word-order,  220. 

Conditional,  and  conditional  perfect, 
formation  of,  90. 

Conditional  clauses,  118;  140;  171; 
235,  2. 

Conjunctions,  139-141  ;  alphabetical 
list  of,  143,  ff. 

(107) 


168 


INDEX. 


Countries,  names  of,  3  d. 

Dative,  as  indirect  object,  63-64;  as 
sole  object,  65 ;  with  an  accusative, 
66 ;  with  verbs  of  delivering,  etc., 
67 ;  with  fagen,  68 ;  with  verbs  of 
removal,  69 ;  with  compound  verbs, 
70 ;  to  replace  an  English  possessive, 
71 ;  of  interest,  72  ;  with  adjectives, 
73  ;  with  impersonals,  84,  2  b. 

Definite  article,  2-7 ;  with  names  of 
seasons,  etc.,  2 ;  with  proper  names, 
3 ;  in  a  generalizing  sense,  4  ;  for  a 
possessive,  5;  omission  before  a 
genitive,  6  ;  before  all,  7. 

Demonstratives,  32. 

Dependent  order,  236-241. 

ber,  see  definite  article;  as  demonstra- 
tive, or  in  place  of  a  personal  pro- 
noun 32;  as  determinative,  33,  as 
relative  34. 

berjenige,  33. 

berjetbe,  50. 

Determinatives,  33. 

btefer,  32. 

do,  as  auxiliary  or  substitute,  85. 

bod),  with  verbs,  235,  4. 

down,  163. 

biirfen,  100. 

each,  39  ;  each  othtr,  49. 

etn,  see  indefinite  article ;  =  one,  48. 

etntge,  51,  52. 

either,  pron.,  40 ;  conj.,  164. 

Emphatic  order,  234-235. 

Emphatic  pronoun,  30,  6. 

e§,  uses  of,  29. 

e§  ift,  e§  gtbt,  193.2;  194. 

ettt)Ct§,  with  following  adj.,  17,  2  a. 

ever,  165. 

every,  everybody,  etc.,  39. 

Exclamations,  influence  on  word-order, 
219. 

Exclamatory  questions,  241. 

Expletives,  29,  3 ;  192,  3. 

Factitive  predicate,  75-76. 


fallen,  with  inf.,  121. 

Feminines  in  -in,  15. 

few,  41. 

finbcn,  119,  3. 

Final  clauses,  subjunctive  in,  113,  2 

and  3 ;  190,  2. 
for,  166. 
from,  167. 
fii^lcn,  119,3;  120. 
Future,  and  future  perfect,  formation 

of,  89;  used  to  express  probability, 

109. 
gebteten,  120. 
gefyen,  121. 

Gender,  grammatical  and  natural,  25. 
Genitive,  57-62;  position  of,  58 ;  with 

nouns,  59 ;  to  denote  time,  60 ;  with 

adjectives,  61 ;  with  verbs,  62. 
Gerundive,  120,4  a. 
Ijabcn,  see  auxiliaries. 
hardly,  168. 
have,  with  infinitive  or  past  participle 

=  cause,  order,  120,  1  a;    have  to, 

103,  3. 
fjei&en,  98  a;  119,3;  120. 
Ijetfen,   98  a;  119,3. 
hence,  169. 

#err,  inflected  before  a  name,  16,  2  a. 
I)8d)ft,  f)6tf)ften§,  22,  2  b. 
fjoren,  98  a;  119,3;  120. 
Hour  of  the  day,  153,  6. 
however,  170. 

Hypothetical  clauses,  90;  171 ;  235,  2. 
if  171. 

Imperfect,  see  preterit. 
Impersonals,  84;    impersonal  passive, 

84,4. 
in,  172. 
Indefinite  article,  8-13;  with  al§,  9; 

with  ofyne,  10;  with  numerals,  11. 
Indefinites,  36-53. 
Indirect  discourse,  114-116. 
Infinitive,  119-122;  128,26;  position 
of,  225,  231,  1. 


INDEX. 


169 


instead  [of],  173. 

Interrogatives,  35. 

Interrogative  sentences,   interrogative 

order,  232;  234-235. 
into,  174. 
Intransitives,  83 ;  formation  of  perfect 

and  pluperfect,  87,  2. 
ja,  235.  4. 
jener,  32. 
femten,  101,  6. 
fonnen,  101. 

(affen,  98  a;  119,3;  120. 
tel)ren,  77;  119.3. 
(ernen,  119,  3. 
less,  42. 

like,  adv.  175;  v.  186,  1  a. 
little,  43. 
man,  48,  3. 
mand),  44. 
many,  44. 

met)r,  45;  mebrere,  51. 
meift,  with   def.  art.,  21,3;    metftenS, 

22,  2  b. 
minbeften§,  22,  2  b. 
tnSgen,  102. 
more,  45. 
much,  46;  176. 
muffcn,  103. 

Negatives,  position  of,  227. 
neither,  pron  40;  177. 
utd)t§,  with  following  adj.,  17,  2  a. 
7io,  nobody,  etc.,  47. 
Nominative,  56. 
Normal  order,  214,  23?. 
Nouns,  14-16. 
Numbers,  54-55. 
Object,  direct,  74;   indirect,  63. 
Objective  predicate,  75-76. 
of  57. 
off,  179. 
Omission    of  auxiliary    in    dependent 

clauses,  239. 
on,  180. 
one,  48 ;  one  another,  49. 


only,  181. 

Optative  subjunctive,  112-113. 

Order,  see  word-order. 

other,  49. 

out  [of],  182. 

outside  [of],  183. 

over,  184. 

Participles,  17-18;  123-126;  substi- 
tutes, 125-126;  position  of,  225; 
231,  2-4. 

Passive,  formation  of,  91-92 ;  substi- 
tutions, 93-95 ;  impersonal,  84,  4. 

past,  185. 

Past  tense,  see  preterit. 

Perfect,  formation  of,  87;  use  of,  for 
the  preterit,  110. 

Periods,  242-246. 

Personal  pronouns,  24-29 ;  substitutes, 
28;  as  reflexives,  30,  2  and  4-5; 
after  relatives,  34,  6;  genitives  of, 
59,9. 

Pluperfect,  formation  of,  87. 

Position,  see  word-order. 

Possessive  case,  57 ;  rendered  by  a  da- 
tive, 71 ;  "  double  possessive/'  59, 
13. 

Possessives,  31 ;  replaced  by  def.  art., 
5;  by  a  dative,  71. 

Potential  subjunctive,  117. 

Prepositions,  137-138;  alphabetical 
list,  143,  ff. 

Present  tense,  for  the  perfect,  106,  1 ; 
for  the  preterit,  107 ;  for  the  future, 
108. 

Preterit  tense,  for  the  pluperfect,  106, 
2. 

Pronouns,  24-53;  see  personal  pro 
nouns,  etc.;  repetition  of,  13;  substi- 
tutes, 28. 

Proper  names,  3. 

rather,  186. 

Reciprocal  pronoun,  30,  5. 

Reflexives,  30 ;  use  of,  to  replace  Eng- 
lish transitives,  83,  b. 


170 


INDEX. 


retten,  with  inf.,  121. 

Relatives,  34 ;  not  to  be  omitted,  34,  5. 

Repetition  of  articles,  pronouns,  adjec- 
tives, 13;  of  to  before  an  infinitive, 
119,2  c. 

same,  50. 

scarcely,  187. 

Men,  98  a;  119,3;  120. 

fein,  see  auxiliaries. 

felb,  50. 

felbft  30,  6. 

several,  51. 

since,  188. 

Singular  and  plural,  54-55. 

fo,  189. 

fotten,  104. 

some,  somebody,  etc.,  52. 

Subject,  position  of,  222;  in  depend- 
ent clauses,  238. 

Subjunctive,  111-118;  optative,  112- 
113 ;  in  indirect  discourse,  114-116 ; 
potential,  117-118. 

Subordinate  clauses,  word-order  in, 
236,  240. 

Substantive  clauses,  190;  114,  ff. 

such,  53. 

Superlative,  19-23. 

Temporal  clauses,  140. 

Tenses,  use  of,  106-110;  in  indirect 
discourse,  116. 

that,  190. 

the,  adv.,  191. 

there,  192-195. 

though,  196. 

through,  throughout,  197. 


tfjun,  not  to  be  used  as  auxiliary  or 

substitute,  85. 
till,  until,  198. 
Titles,  16;  59,1. 
to,  199;  before  infinitives,  119,  2. 
toward,  towards,  200. 
Transitives  and  intransitives,  83. 
Uf)r,  uninfected,  55. 
under,  201. 

Verbal  nouns  in  -ing,  127-128. 
Verbs,  82-128. 
toiel,  44,  46. 
toctgen,  119,  4. 
roa§,  =  etma§,  17,  2  a ;  as  relative,  34, 

3  and  a ;  as  interrogative,  35. 
tua§  fur,  35,  2  b. 

tueldjer,  relative,  34;  interrogative,  35. 
well,  204. 

roentg,  43,  2;   nienioe,  41 ;  tuentger,  42. 
menigftenS,  22,  2  b. 
toer,  as  relative,  34, 3 ;  as  interrogative, 

35,  1. 
tuerben,  =  be  changed  into,  53,  2  a;  see 

auxiliaries. 
when,  205. 
where,  whither,  206. 
whether,  208. 
while,  whilst,  207. 
nriffen,  101.  6. 
with,  209. 
within,  210. 
without,  211. 
molten,  105. 
Word-order,  212-246. 


GERMAN  TEXT-BOOKS 

PUBLISHED   BY 

HENRY   HOLT  &   CO.,   New  York. 

These  books  are  bound  in  cloth  unless  otherwise  indicated. 

» 

Grammars  and  Exercise  Books. 
Blackwell's  German  Prefixes  and  Sufiixes.    By  J.   8.   Blackwbll, 

Professor  in  the  University  of  Missouri.     16mo.     137  pp. 
Huss'a  Conversation  in  German.    By  H.   C.  O.  Huss,  Professor  of 

Modern  Languages  in  Princeton  College.     12mo.    230  pp, 
Joynes-Otto  First  Book  in  German.     For  young  pupils.     By  Emil 

Otto.     Revised  by  Edward  S.  Joynes,  Professor  in  the  South 

Carolina  College.    12mo.     116  pp.    Boards. 
Joynes-Otto  Introductory  German  Lessons,  The.     New  edition,  with 

full  vocabularies     By  Prof.  Edward  S.  Joynes.    12mo.   252  pp, 
Keetels's  Oral  Method  with  German.    By  Jean  Gustave  Keetels. 

12mo.     371  pp. 
Otis's  Elementary  German.    By  Charles  P.  Otis.     16mo.    832  pp. 

p^"  There  are  two  editions  of  this  book:  I.  In  German  type;  II.  In 
Roman  type,  which  edition  will  only  be  sent  when  specially  ordered. 
Otto's  German  Conversation  Grammar.    By  Dr.  Emil  Otto,    New 

edition,  revised,  and  in  part  re-written,  by  Wm.  Cook.    12mo. 

Half  roan.    591  pp. 
Otto's  Elementary  German  Grammar.    With  a  vocabulary  by  George 

Moritz  Wahl.     12mo.     315  pp. 
Otto's    Translating    English    into    German.      By  Dr.    Emil    Otto. 

Edited  by  Prof.  Rhodes  Massie  and  Prof.  Edward  S.  Joynes. 

12mo.    167  pp. 
Spanhoofd's  Deutsche  Grammatik.    By  A.  W.  Spanhoofd,  teacher  in 

St.  Paul's  School,  N.  H.     16mo.     187  pp. 
Wenckebach  und  Schrakamp's  Deutsche   Grammatik  flir  Amerikaner. 

By  Carla  Wenckebach,   Professor  in  Wellesley  College,  and 

JOSEPHA  SCHRAKAMP.      12mO.      291  pp. 

Whitney's  Compendious  German  Grammar.  By  Wm.  D.  Whitney, 
Professor  in  Yale  University.     12mo.    472  pp.     Half  roan. 

Whitney's  Brief  German  Grammar,  based  on  the  author's  "Compen- 
dious German  Grammar."  By  Wm.  D.  Whitney.   16mo.    143  pp. 

Whitney-Klemm  German  by  Practice.  By  Dr.  L.  R.  Klemm.  Edited 
by  William  D.  Whitney.    12mo.    805  pp. 

Natural  Method  and  Conversation  Books. 
Game  of  German  Conversation.     By  Mme.  F,  Jeff  Tensler. 
Heness's  Der  neue   Leitfaden.     Beim   Unterricht  in  der  deutschen 

Sprache.    By  Gottlieb  Heness.     12mo.    403  pp. 
Heness's    Der  Sprechlehrer   unter  seinen  Schulern.    By  Gottlieb 

Heness.    12mo.     187  pp. 
Kaisers  Erstes  Lehrbuch.     By  H.  C.  Kaiser,  Ph.D.   12mo.   128  pp. 
Pylodet's  German  Conversations.    By  L.  Pylodbt.    l8mo.    278  pp. 


HENRY  HOLT  &  CO.'S  GERMAN  TEXT-BOOKS. 

Schrakamp  und  Van  Daell's  Das  Deutsche  Buch.  By  A.  N.  Van  Paell 
and  Josepha  Schrakamp.     12mo.     144  pp. 

Sprechen  Sie  Deutsch  \    18ino.     147  pp.     Boards. 

Stern's  Studien  und  Plaudereien.  First  Series.  By  Sigmon  M.  Stern, 
Director  of  Stern's  School  of  Languages.     12mo.     262  pp. 

Stern's  Studien  und  Plaudereien.  Second  Series.  By  Sigmon  M. 
Stern  and  Menco  Stern.    12mo.     380  pp. 

Wenckebach's  Deutscher  Anschauungs-TJnterricht.  By  Carla  and 
Helene  Wenckebach.    12uio.    451  pp. 

Williams's  German  Conversation  and  Composition.  By  Alonzo  Wil- 
liams, A.M.a  Professor  in  Brown  University.     12mo.     147  pp. 

Reading  Books. 

Fouque's  Undine.     With  introduction,  notes,  and  vocabulary,  by  H  C 

G,  von  Jagemann,  Professor  in  the  Indiana  University.     190  pp. 
Hey's  Fabeln  fur  Kinder.     Illustrated   by  Otto  Speckter.     With 

vocabulary.     (In  roman  type.)    12mo.     52  pp.     Boards. 
Joynes-Otto    Introductory    German    Reader.      By    Dr.    Emil    Otto. 

With  notes  and  vocabulary  by  Prof.   Edward  S.  Joynes.    12mo. 

282  pp. 

Klemm's  Lese-  und  Sprachbuecher.    In  sieben  Kreisen.    By  Dr.  L.  R. 

Klemm. 
Klemm's  Abriss  der  Geschichte  der  deutschen  Literatur.     Kreis  VIII. 

12mo.     385  pp. 
Meissner's  Aus  meiner  Welt.      Geschichten  ftir   Grosse  und  Kleine. 

With  vocabulary  by  Carla  Wenckebach.     12mo.    127  pp. 
Otis's  Grimm's  Maerchen.     Selected   and   edited,  with  introduction, 

notes,  and  vocabulary,  by  Charles  P.  Ottis.     151  pp. 
Otto's  German  Reader.    By  Prof.   E.   P.   Evans.     12mo.    239  pp. 

Half  roan. 
Schrakamp's  Erzaehlungen  aus  der  deutschen  Geschichte.     By  Josepha 

Schrakamp.     12mo.    286  pp. 
Simonson's  German  Ballad  Book.     Prepared  by  Prof.  L.  Simonson,  of 

the  Hartford  (Ct.)  High  School.     12mo.     804  pp. 
Storme's  Easy  German  Reading.     By  G.  Storme.     16mo.     356  pp. 
Wenckebach's  deutsches  Lesebuch.    By  Carla  and  Helene  Wencke 

bach.     12mo.     316  pp. 
Wenckebach's  Die  schoensten  deutschen   Lieder.        By  Carla  and 

Helene  Wenckebach.     12mo.     363  pp. 
Whitney's  German  Reader.     By  William  D.  Whitney,  Professor  in 

Yale  University.     12mo.     523  pp.     Half  roan. 
Whitney-Klemm  Elementary  German  Reader.      By  Dr.  L.  R.  Klemm. 

Edited  by  Prof.  W.  D.  Whitney.     12mo.    237  pp. 
Dictionary. 
Whitney's  Compendious  German  Dictionary.     (German-English  and 

English-German.)    By  William  D.  Whitney.    8vo.     900  pp 

A  complete  catalogue  and  price-list  of  Henry  Holt  <&  Co.' 8  educa- 
tional publications  will  be  sent  on  application. 


HENRY  HOLT  6*  CO.'S  GERMAN  TEXT-BOOKS. 


Whitney's  German  Texts. 

delected  and  annotated  under  the  general  editorship  of  Professor  William  D. 
Whitnkv.    16mo.    Cloth. 

Goethe's  Iphigenie  auf  Tauris.  With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  Frank- 
lin Carter,  President  of  Williams  College.    113  pp. 

Faust.    I.  Theil.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  William  Cook, 

late  Professor  in  Harvard  University.    220  pp. 

Leasing' s  Minna  von  Barnhelm.  With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  W. 
D.  Whitney,  Professor  in  Yale  University.    138  pp. 

Nathan  der  Weise.    With  an  Introduction  and  notes  by  H.  0.  G. 

Brandt,  Professor  in  Hamilton  College.    158  pp. 

Schiller's  Wilhelm  Tell.  With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  A.  Saohtlb- 
ben,  Professor  in  the  College  of  Charleston,  S.  C.    199  pp. 

Maria  Stuart.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  Edward  S.  Joynes, 

Professor  in  South  Carolina  College.    222  pp. 


Seidensticker's    German    Scientific   Monographs. 

With  notes.    12mo.    Paper. 

No.  I.  Uber  Goethe's  Naturwissenschaftliche  Arbeiten.  Von  H.  Helmholtz. 
53  pp. 

No  II.  Uber  Bakterien,  die  Kleinsten  lebenden  Wesen.  Von  Dr.  Ferdinand 
Cohn.    65  pp. 

Student's  Collection    of    Classic    German    Plays. 

12mo.    Paper. 

Goethe's  Hermann  und  Dorothea.  With  notes  by  Calvin  Thomas.  104  pp. 

Egmont.    Edited  by  Professor  William  Steppen.    113  pp. 

Koerner's  Zriny.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  Edward  R.  Rugoles, 

Professor  in  Dartmouth  College.    126  pp. 
Lessing's  Emilia  Galotti.    With  notes.    82  pp. 
Schiller's  Der  Neffe  als  Onkel.     With  notes  and  a  vocabulary  by  A. 

Clement.    99  pp. 

Jungfrau  Von  Orleans.    Edited  by  Rev   A.  B.  Nichols,  Instructor  in 

German  in  Harvard  University.    203  pp. 

■-  Wallenstein's  Lager.    With  notes  by  E.  C.  F.  Krauss.    60  pp. 

— —  Die  Piccolomini.    With  notes  by  E.  C.  F.  Krauss.    139  pp. 

Wallenstein's  Tod.    With  notes  by  E.  C.  F.  Krauss.    210  pp. 

Wallenstein,  complete  in  one  volume.    Cloth. 

College  Series  of  German  Plays. 

12mo.    Paper. 

Einer  muss  heiraten,  by  Wilbelmi  ;  and  Eigensinn,  by  Benedix.    With 

notes.    63  pp. 
Three  German  Comedies.    I.  Er  ist  nicht  eifersnechtig,  by  Elz;  II 

Der  Weiberfeind,  by  Benedix  ;  III.    Im  Wartesalon  erster  Classe 

by  Mueller.    With  notes.    24  pp. 
Der  Bibliothekar.    By  Gustav  von  Moser.    With  notes.    162  pp. 
Die  Journalisten.    By  Gustav  Freytag.    With  notes.    178  pp. 
Zopf  und  Schwert.    By  Gutzkow.    With  notes.    173  pp. 
Englisch.    By  Goerner.    With  notes  by  A.  H.  Edgren.    61  pp. 
Badekuren.    By  Putlttz.    With  nores.    69  pp. 
Das  Herz  vergessen.    By  Pututz.    With  notes     79  pp. 

3 


HENRY  HOLT  &  CO:S  GERMAN  TEXT-BOOKS. 

Stern's  Selected  German  Comedies. 

Selected  and  Edited  by  Professor  8.  M.  Stern.    12mo.    Paper. 

Bin  Knopf.    By  Julius  Rosen.    41  pp. 

Der  Schimmel.    By  G.  von  Moser.    55  pp. 

Sie  hat  ihr  herz  entdeckt.    By]W.  Mueller  ton  Koenigswinter.   TO  pp 

Simson  und  Delila.    By  Emil  Claar.    55  pp. 

Er  sucht  einen  Vetter.    By  Jungman.    49  pp. 

Er  muss  tanzen.    ByC.  A.Paul.    51  pp. 

G-aenschen  von  Buchenau.    By  W.  Friedrich.    60  pp 

German  Plays  for  Children. 

Kinder-Comoedien.    By  various  authors.    Edited  and  annotated  in  German 
by  Professor  Th.  Heness.    Five  plays  in  one  volume   12mo.    141  pp. 

Unterhaltungs  Bibliothek.    (12mo.    Paper.) 

Andersen's  Bilderbuch  ohne  Bilder.    With  notes  and  vocabulary  by  Pro 

fessor  L.  Simonson  of  the  Hartford  (Ct.)  High  School.    104  pp. 
Die  Eisjungfrau  u.  andere  Geschichten.  With  notes  by  E.  C.  F.  Krauss 

150  pp. 
Auerbach's  Auf  Wache;  Roquette's  Der  gefrorene  Kuss.    The  two  in 

one  volume.    With  notes.    126  pp. 
Carove's  Das  Maerchen  ohne  Ende.    With  notes.    45  pp. 
Ebers'  eine  Frage.    With  introduction  and  notes.    117  pp. 
EichendorfFs  Aus  dem  Leben  eines  Taugenichts.    132  pp. 
Fouque's  Undine.    With  a  glossary  of  the  principal  words  and  phrases. 

137  pp.    See  also  Jagemann^s  edition  under  Reading  Books. 

Sintram  und  seine  Gefaehrten.    114  pp. 

Grimm's  Die  Venus  von  Milo ;  Kafael  und  Michel- Angel o.    189  pp. 
Grimm's  Kinder-  und  Hausmaerchen.    With  notes.    228  pp.    See  also 

Otis's  edition  under  Reading  Books. 
HaufTs  Das  kalte  Herz.    61  pp. 

Heine's  Die  Harzreise.    With  introduction  and  notes.    97  pp. 
Heyse's  Anfaung  und  Ende.   54  pp. 

Die  Einsamen.    44  pp. 

Hillern's  Hoeher  als  die  Kirche.    With  notes  and  vocabulary.    46  pp. 
Muegge's  Biukan  Voss.    55  pp. 

Signa  die  Seterin.    71  pp. 

Mueller's  Deutsche  Liebe.    With  English  notes.    121  pp. 
Nathusius'  Tagebuch  eines  armen  Fraeuleins.    163  pp. 
Ploennies'  Princessin  Ilse.    With  notes  by  J.  M.  Merrick.    45  pp. 
Putlitz's  "Was  sich  der  wald  erzaehlt.    62  pp. 

Vergissmeinnicht.    With  English  notes.    44  pp. 

Riehl's  Der   Pluch  der   Schoenheit.    With  introduction  and  notes  by 

Francis  L.  Kendall.    77  pp. 
Schiller's  Das  Lied  von  der  Glocke.    With  introduction  and  notes  by 

Charles  P.  Otis,  Ph.D.    70  pp. 
Storm's  Immensee.    With  notes.    34  pp. 
Tieck's  Die  Elfen ;    Das  Rothkaeppchen.    With  notes  by  Professor  L. 

Simonson.    41  pp. 
Vilmar  and  Richter's  German  Epic  Tales.    Told  in  prose.    Die  Wibe- 

lungen.  von  A.  F.  C.  Vilmar.     Walther   und   Hildegund,    von   Al- 
bert Richter.    100  pp. 

4 


FRENCH  TEXT-BOOKS 

PUBLISHED   BY 

HENRY   HOLT  &  CO.,    New  York. 

These  books  are  bound  in  cloth  unless  otherwise  indicated* 

♦      ■- 

Grammars  and  Exercise  Books. 

Borel's  Grammaire  Frangaise.  A  l'usage  des  Anglais.  Par  Eugene  Borel, 
Revised  by  E.  B.  Coe.    lJmo.    450  pp.    Half  roan. 

Delilles  Condensed  French  Instruction.  By  C.  J.  Delille.  18mo.  143  pp. 
Eugene's  Student's  Comparative  French  Grammar.     To  which  ar« 

added  French- English  Exercises.      Revised  by  L.  H.  Buckingham,  Ph.D. 

12mo.    284  pp. 

Eugene's  Elementary  French  Lessons.  Revised  and  edited  by  L.  H. 
Buckingham,  Ph.D.    12mo.    126  pp. 

Case's  The  Translator.— English  into  French.  By  Professors  Gasc,  L. 
Brun,  and  others.    12mo.    220  pp. 

Gibert's  French  Manual.  A  French  Pronouncing  Grammar  for  Toting 
Students.    By  M.  Gibert.    12mo,    112  pp. 

Julien's  Petites  Logons  de  Conversation  et  de  Grammaire.  By  F.  Julien. 
Square  12mo.    222  pp. 

Otto's  French  Conversation  Grammar.  Revised  by  Ferdinand  Bocher. 
Professor  of  Modern  Languages  in  Harvard  University.  12mo.  489  pp.  Half 
roan. 

Pylodet's  Beginning  French.    Exercises  in  Pronouncing,  Spelling,  and 

Translating.    By  L.  Pylodkt.    16mo.    180  pp.    Boards. 
Sadler's  Translating  English  into  French.    By  P.  Sadler.    Revised  and 

annotated  by  Prof.  C.  F.  Gillette.    12mo.    285  pp. 

The  Joynes-Otto  Introductory  French  Lessons.  By  Edward  S.  Joynes, 
Professor  in  University  of  South  Carolina.     12mo.    275  pp. 

The  Joynes-Otto  First  Book  in  French.  By  Edward  S.  Joynes.  12mo. 
118  pp.    Boards. 

Whitney's  French  Grammar.  By  William  D.  Whitney,  Professor  in  Yale 
University,    l'.'mo.    442  pp.    Half  roan. 

Whitney's  Practical  French.  I  Taken  from  the  author's  larger  Grammar, 
and  supplemented  by  conversations  and  idiomatic  phrases.  By  Professor 
W.  D.  Whitney. 

Whitney's  Brief  French  Grammar.  Systematically  arranged,  with  exer 
cises.    By  William  D.  Whitney.    16mo.    177  pp. 

Natural  Method  and  Conversation  Books. 

Aliiot's  Contes  et  Nouvelles.  Suivis  de  Conversations.d'Exercices  de  Gram 
m aire.    Par  Madame  L.  Alliot.    12mo. 

Aubert's  Colloquial  French  Drill.  By  E.  Aubert,  Professor  in  the  Normal 
College,  New  York  City.    Part  I.  16mo.    66  pp.    Part  H.  118  pp. 

Le  Jeu  des  Auteurs.    96  Cards  in  a  Box. 

Moutonnier's  Les  Premiers  Pas  dans  l'Etud  e  du  Frangais  par  If 
m6thode  naturelle.    Par  C.  Moutonnikr.    12mo.    197  pp.    Illustrated. 

Pour  Approndre  a  Parler  Frangais.    12mo.    191  pp. 

Parlez-vous  Frangais  P  A  pocket  manual  of  French  and  English  Conversa- 
tion, with  hints  for  pronunciation  and  a  list  of  the  irregular  verbs.  18tno. 
\M  pp.    Boards. 


HENRY  HOLT  &  CO.'S  FRENCH  TEXT-BOOKS. 

Biodu's  Lucie.    Familiar  Conversations  in  French  and  English.    By  Mme.  A. 

Riodu.    12mo.    128  pp. 
Stern  &  Meras'  fetude  Progressive  de  la  Langue  Frangaise.    By  Sigmon 

M  Stern  and  Baptiste  Meras.    lsJrao.    288  pp. 
Witcomb  &  Bellenger's  French  Conversation.    Dialogues  on  Familiar 

Subjects,  to  which  is  annexed  the  Summary  of  French  Grammar,  by  Delille. 

18mo.    259  pp. 

Reading  Books. 

-^Esop's  Fables  in  French.    With  vocabulary.    16mo.  237  pp. 
Alliot's  Les  Auteurs  Contemporains.    Extraits  choisis  d'ceuvres  diverse^ 
avec  Notices  Biographiques  et  Notes.    By  Mme.  L.  Aluot.    12mo.    371  pp. 

Aubert's  Litterature  Frangaise.  Premiere  Annee.  By  E.  Aubert.  16mo. 
338  pp. 

Bocher  s  Progressive  French  Beader.  With  notes  and  vocabulary  by 
F.  Bocher,  Professor  in  Harvard  University.    12mo.    291   pp.    Half  roan. 

Fisher's  Easy  French  Beading.  Historical  tales  and  anecdotes,  arranged 
with  foot-notes,  containing  translations  of  the  principal  words.  16mo.  253  pp. 

Fleury's  ITHistoire  de  France.  Racontee  a  la  Jeunesse.  Par  M.  Lame 
Fleury.    16mo.    372  pp. 

De  Janons  Becueil  de  Poesies.  A  l'usage  de  la  Jeunesse  Americaine.  Par 
Mlle.  Camille  de  Janon.    16mo.    186  pp. 

Joynes-Otto  Introductory  French  Beader,  The.  Edited,  with  notes  and 
vocabulary,  by  Edward  S.  Joynes.    12mo.    163  pp. 

Julien's  Practical  and  Conversational  Beader  in  French  and  English.  By 
F.  Julien.    Square  12mo.    182  pp. 

Lacombe's  Petite  Histoire  du  Peuple  Frangais.  By  Paul  Lacombe. 
With  Grammatical  and  Explanatory  Notes  by  Jules  Bue.     12mo.    212  pp. 

La  Fontaine's  Fables  Choisies.  Edited,  with  notes,  by  Leon  Delbos.  12mo. 
119  pp.    Boards. 

Pylodet's  Beginner  French  Beader.  WTith  a  complete  vocabulary.  Ar- 
ranged by  L.  Pylodet.     16mo.    235  pp.    Boards. 

Pylodet's  Second  French  Beader.  With  a  complete  French-EDglish  vo- 
cabulary.   Compiled  by  L.  Pylodet.    Illustrated.    12mo.    277  pp. 

Pylodet's  La  Litterature  Frangaise  Classique.  Tirees  des  Matinees  Litte- 
raires  d'  Edouard  Mennechet.    12mo.    393  pp. 

Pylodet's  La  Litterature  Frangaise  Contemporaine.  Recueil  en  prose 
et  en  vers.     12mo.    310  pp. 

Pylodet's  Gouttes  de  Bosee.  Petit  Tresor  poStique  des  Jeunes  Personnes. 
l8mo.     188  pp. 

Pylodet's  La  Mere  l'Oie.  Poesies,  Snigmes,  chansons  et  'rondes.enfantines. 
Illustre.    8vo.    80  pp. 

Whitney's  Short  French  Reader.  With  notes  and  vocabulary.  By  W.  D. 
Whitney.    16mo. 

Dictionaries. 

Bellow's  French  and  English  Dictionary  for  the  Pocket.    82mo.    600  pp. 

The  same.    Larger  print.    12mo.    600  pp.    Half  roan. 

Gasc's  New  Dictionary  of  the  French  and  English  Languages.    By 

Ferdinand  E.  A.  Gasc.    8vo.    French-English  part,  600  pp.    Englisli-French 

part,  586  pp.    One  volume. 
Gasc's  Improved  Modern  Pocket  Dictionary.    By  F.  A.  E.  Gasc.  18mo. 

French-English  part,  261  pp.    English-French  part,  387  pp.  One  volume. 

A  descriptive  catalogue,  with  prices,  of  Henry  Holt  dt  Co.  '8  educational  publi- 
cations wdl  be  sent  on  application* 


HENR  Y  HOLT  &  CO:S  FRENCH  TEXT-BOOKS. 
Students'  Collection  of  Classic  French  Plays. 

The  first  six  with  full  notes  by  Prof.  E.  S.  Joynes.    The  last  three  with  notes 
by  Leon  Dklbos,  M.A.    12mo.    Paper. 

Le  Cid.    Par  Corneille.    110  pp. 

Athalie.    Par  Racine.    117  pp. 

Le  Misanthrope.    Par  Moliere.    180  pp. 

L'Avare.    Par  Moliere.    132  pp. 

Esther.    Par  Racine.    60  pp. 

Cinna.    Par  Corneille.    87  pp. 

Le  Bourgeois  Gentilhomme.    Par  Moliebb.    140  pp. 

Horace.    Par  Corneille.    78  pp. 

Les  Plaideurs.    Par  Racine.    80  pp. 

The  foregoing  in  3  vols.,  three  plays  in  each,  in  the  above  order.    12mo.    Cloth 

Romantic  French  Drama.    (12ino.    Flexible  covers.) 

Buy  Bias.    By  Victor  Hugo.    With  notes  by  Rena  A.  Michaels.    117  pp. 

College  Series  of  Modern  French  Plays. 

With  English  notes  by  Prof.  Ferdinand  Bocher.    12mo.    Paper. 

La  Joie  Fait  Peur.    Par  Mme.  de  Girardin.    46  pp. 
La  Bataille  de  Dames.    Par  Scribe  et  Legouve.    81  pp. 
La  Maison  de  Penarvan.    Par  Jules  Sandeau.    72  pp. 
La  Poudre  aux  Yeux.    Par  Labiche  et  Martin,    59  pp. 
Jean  Baudry.    Par  Auouste  Vacquerie.    72  pp. 
Les  Petits  Oiseaux.    Par  Labiche  et  Delacour.    70  pp. 
Mademoiselle  de  la  Seigliere.    Par  J.  Sandeau.    99  pp. 
Le  Boman  d'un  Jeune  Homme  Pauvre.    Par  O.  Feuillbt.    100  pp. 
Les  Doigts  de  Fee.    Par  E.  Scribe.    Ill  pp. 
Above  in  2  vols.    Cloth.    Vol  I.  containing  the  first  five,  Vol.  II.  the  last  four. 

Modern  French  Comedies.    (12mo.    Paper.) 

Le  Village.    Par  O.  Feuillet.    34  pp. 

La  Cagnotte.    Par  MM.  Eugene  Labiche  et  A.  Delacour.    83  pp. 

Les  Femmes  qui  Pleurent.  Par  MM.  Siraudin  et  Lambert  Thiboust.  28pjx 

Les  Petites  Miseres  de  la  Vie  Humaine.    Par  M.  Clairville.    85  pp. 

Le  Niaise  de  Saint  Flour.    Par  Bayard  et  Lemoine.    38  pp. 

Un  Caprice.    Par  Alfred  de  Musset. 

Trois  Proverbes.    Par  Th.  Leclerq.    68  pp.    With  vocabulary. 

Valerie.    Par  Scribe.    39  pp.    With  vocabulary. 

Le  Collier  de  Perles.    Par  Mazeres.    56  pp.    With  vocabulary. 

Selected  French  Comedies. 

Original  text,  with  a  close  English  version  on  opposite  pages. 
En  "Wagon.    Comedie  en  1  acte.    Par  Eugene  Verconsin.    12mo.    44  pp. 
Cetait  Gertrude.  ComSdie  en  1  acte.  Par  Eugene  Verconsin.  12mo.  54  pp. 

French  Plays  for  Children.    (12mo.    Paper.) 

La  Petite  Maman,  par  Mme.  de  M. ;  Le  Bracelet,  par  Mme.  de  Gaule.  38  pp. 

La  Vieille  Cousine,  par  E.  Souvestre;  Les  Ricochets.    52  pp. 

Le  Testament  de  Madame  Patural,  par  E.  Souvestre;   La  Demoiselle 

de  St.  Cyrs  par  Drohoyowska.    54  pp. 
La  Zjotene  de  Francfort,    par  E.  Souvestre.    La  Jeune   Savante, 

par  Mme.  Curo.    47  pp. 

French  Plays  for  Girls.    (12mo.    Paper.) 

Trois  Comedies  pour  Jeunes  Pilles:  I.  Les  Cuisinieres;  II.  Le  Petit 
"Mm:  III.  La  Malade  Imaginaire.   Par  Lemercier  de  Neuville    184  pp. 


HENRY  HOLT  &  CO.'S  FRENCH  TEXT-BOOKS. 

Bibliotheque  (^'Instruction  et  de  Recreation. 

12mo  volumes.    Paper  or  Cloth. 

Achard's  Clos-Pommier,  et  lies  Prisonniers  du  Caucase.    Par  Xavxeb 

de  Maistre.    Cloth.    144  pp. 
Achard's  Clos-Pommier.    Paper.    106  pp. 
Bedolliere's  Mere  Michel.    With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    188  ppt 

The  same.    Paper. 

Biographies  des  Musiciens  Celebres.    Cloth.    871  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Carraud  et  Segur's  Contes  (Les  Petites  Filles  Modeles,  par  Mme.  de  Segur. 

et  Les  Gouters  de  la  Grand'mere,  par  Mme.  Z.  Carraud).    With  a  list  or 

difficult  phrases.    Cloth.    193  pp. 

Carraud's  Les  Gouters  de  la  Grand'mere.    With  a  list  of  difficult 
phrases.    Paper.    95  pp. 

Choix  de  Contes  Contemporains.  With  notes.    By  B.  F.  O'Connor.  Cloth. 

300  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Erckmann-Chatrian's  Conscrit  de  1813.    With  notes.    By  Prof.  F. 

Booher.    Cloth.    236  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Le  Blocus.    With  notes.    By  Prof.  F.  B6cher.    Cloth.   258  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Madame  Therese.    With  notes.    By  Prof .  F.  Bocher.    Cloth.    216  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Pallet's  Princes  de  l'Art.    Cloth.   834  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Feuillet's  Boman  d'un  Jeune  Homme  Pauvre.    Cloth.   804  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

P6val's  ■  Chouans  et  Bleus.'    With  notes.    Cloth.    188  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Foa's  Contes  Biographiques.    With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    180  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Petit  Robinson  de  Paris.   With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    166  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Mac6's  Bouchee  de  Pain.   (L'Homme  )  With  vocabulary.    Cloth,   860  pn 

The  same.    Paper. 

De  Maistre's  Voyage  Autour  de  ma  Chambre.   Paper.    117  pp. 

Les  Prisonniers  du  Caucase.    Paper.    88  pp. 

Merimee's  Columba.    Cloth.    179  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Porchat's  Trois  Mois  sous  la  Neige.    Cloth.    160  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Pressense's  Rosa.    With  vocabulary.    By  L.  Pylodbt.    Cloth.    88&, 

The  same.    Paper. 

Saint-Germain's  Pour  une  ^pingle.    With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    174  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Sand's  Petite  Padette.    Cloth.    205  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

S6gur  et  Carraud's  Contes.    (Petites  Filles  Modeles;  Les  Gouters  de  la 

Grand'mere.)    Cloth.    193  pp. 
Segur's  Les  Petites  Filles  Modeles.    Paper.    98  pp. 
Souvestre's  Philosophe  sous  les  Toits.    Cloth.    187  pp. 
— -— —  Tht  same.    Paper. 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made 
4  days  prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


AU6  28  2006 


SPsSKsSS* 


^W-Ail^ 


797966 


m 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


